Home

User Guide 9.0 vol. 2_Advanced Features.book - Support

1. M General Settings jestricted Msg Service Type None X Msg Service Name X I Silence F vTx 1000 lt lt Basic p I Conference Lock Chair Control None v F Mute Meet Me parties Cascade None z F StatC F OnHod Master Name None X I Terminate I Enebe Invite T120 Rate None z IT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None z Before First Join 5 4 Min AfterLast Quit 7 Min m Media Settings Audio Ala Auto X Dual Stream Mode None z lt lt Basic T Fol Gall Pro Mation None 7 IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Video Protocok H261 IV End Time Alert Tone 5 2 Min Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Video Foma ele Frame Rate 30 pic sec x Talk Hold Time fis Sec Guality Auto 7 Audio Mix Depth E 4 Stes AnnezN M Amere I Annex F The conference default Line Rate is set to 384 Kbps This is the line rate of the conference broadcasted to the conference participants The Video Rate In Out box displays the video rate per incoming video channel per participant and the total video rate of the outgoing video channel broadcasted to all participants The video rate per participant is calculated as follows Conference Bitrate audio bandwidth 4 For example if the conference Video Bitrate is set to 384 Kbps and the audio algorithm is set to 64 Kbps the video rate per participant is 384 64 4 80 Kbps Select the Line Rate for the conferen
2. The participant is deleted An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window to indicate that changes have been made 3 Click Save on the Template menu when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window This confirms that the modifications have been saved 8 65 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 66 Recording External recording systems can be used to perform both audio and video recording of conferences Recording can be performed using the Polycom Readikecorder and the RSS 2000 recording systems or any external recording system for example the Prairie system The recording system can be installed at the same site as the conferencing MCU or at a remote site Several MCUs can share the same recording system There are two methods of recording e Using a Recording Link e Using a recording port participant Recording using a Recording Link This method can be used to record both audio and video and enables you to use the MGC Manager and WebCommander applications to control the recording process Conferences are recorded over a dial out connection from the con
3. 2 25 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The Welcome Message dialog box opens xl IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message WELCMPNS AC Add Message File IV Enable Conference Welcome Message CONFCONN ACA w Add Message File 6 Select the Enable Welcome Message check box to define the system behavior when the participant enters the conference IVR queue play a general Welcome message play aconference specific message let the participant wait for the operator s assistance If the Enable Welcome Message check box is cleared the Welcome message is skipped and the participant will hear the next prompt in the IVR menu the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference the participant will hear the Welcome message twice once via the Entry Queue Service and the second time via the IVR Service In such a case you can disable the General Welcome Message in the IVR Service or select None as the Welcome Message If the IVR Service will be used in conjunction with an Entry Queue Service and 2 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 7 When the IVR Service Welcome Message check box is enabled you can select the various audio messages that will be played when the participant enters the conference IVR queue Table 2 4 IVR Properties Welcome Message General Welcome e None to sk
4. 8 46 Copying Reservation Templates from one File or Database to AMOUNT ocsi tp iadan ei aoai bapanesy ces tedpecenveperens doy 8 47 Basing a Reservation Template on another Reservation Template scccssesiaseisos os satasioadoscavbsgenhesacds toaedveguie te aariaa anarias 8 49 Moving Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another soinera roae aa EE EEEE dessaviiatesdsalo ES 8 50 Copying an On Going Conference or a Conference Reservation to a Reservation Template File or Reservation Database 8 52 Modifying Reservation Templates 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 54 Deleting a Reservation Template eee eee eeeereeeeeeeeees 8 56 Printing the Template Information 20 0 eee ee eeeeee reece 8 57 Adding a Participant from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Participant Template file or Participant database 8 60 Modifying a Participant Definition in a Participant Template file or Participant Database ciscciscsccescsanesiveivecsancascbased esasvinaseas concantsies 8 61 Linking Unlinking Participants in the Database ee 8 63 Deleting Participants from a Participant Template file or Participant Database iunie aires A cet caaer 8 64 RGCOIGING css ds sce ecce recesses eck ae aes 9 1 Configuring the MCU to enable Recording o eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 2 Defining a Recording Link wee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeseeeeaes 9 2 Defining Recording Functions in an IVR Service eee 9 6 Modifying
5. The system displays in a table format the User Name Permission Access Level Directory Name Entry Password and Chairperson Password as defined for each User Sorting the Users List You can sort the users according to the Name Permission Directory or Password by clicking on the appropriate column heading Assigning Groups to Users Groups are used to increase the system security by allowing users to view reservation and participant data only from groups to which they have access rights Once the Groups are created you can define the access rights of users to each of the existing groups in the Group hierarchy The definition can be done either per group or per user When defining the access rights per user you select the groups that the user will be able to access When defining the access rights per group you select the users who will be able to access a certain group For more details regarding the Groups table and the assignment of access rights to a group see Setting the Access Rights to a Group on page 6 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To assign groups to users 1 In the Browser area click the User icon to list the currently defined users Right click the icon of the user whose access right you wish to define and then click Assign groups to user Grorvcom Copy Copy As Delete Propertie Assign groups to user The lt User Name gt Group Assignment dialog box opens
6. Reservation Templates Participant Templates V Read V Read M write M Write View MCU Conferences Enter without passworc z Close This dialog box lists all the currently defined users It also displays their current Read and Write permissions to the Reservation and Participant templates assigned to this group RW indicates that the user may view Read and add delete or modify Write templates R indicates that the user may only view Read templates None indicates that the user has no access rights to this group To set or modify the access rights of a user to the group 1 2 Click the user name Click the Conference Templates Read and Write check boxes to enable disable the user to view read and or add write conference templates to the group Click the Write check box to automatically check the Read check box Click the Participant Templates Read and Write check boxes to enable disable the user to view read and or add write Participant templates to 6 67 Chapter 6 Using a Database the group Click the Write check box to automatically check the Read check box Leaving the check boxes cleared means that the user has no access to the Reservation and Participant templates assigned to this group it will appear as None in the list In the View MCU Conferences list click one of the following options No The user will not be able to view the reservations Mee
7. eee eeeseeeteeeees 6 31 Displaying the Database Tables 0 0 0 0 cece eee esc ceceeeeneeenetseeeeeeenes 6 34 The Database Manager Toolbar 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 35 Defaults js cssccsvesace tied ducese stead ccasdatatesebsitesds sta a a aas 6 37 Defining User Defined Defaults 00 eee eeeeeee 6 38 Defining Conference Defaults 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 40 Defining Participant Defaults oo eect eee eeeeees 6 42 Defining MGC Manager General Defaults 0 0 6 45 Managing the Defaults Sets oo eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 47 Defining Permissions ic cise eis caviessasep catia deotsensteseesegesivtovecgacsvonte 6 50 Viewing the Permissions List eeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 6 53 Sorting the Permissions List 0 0 eee eeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 53 Defining a New USED sisi cctssicsscisssicsigecsseiarcasacsss daecess cent escenioanaves 6 53 Viewing the Users List oo riiseni 6 60 Sorting the Users Last svii asuransi 6 60 Assigning Groups to Users oo eee eeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes 6 60 Groups niea aieeaa ea a Eaa TaS 6 63 Defining a New GOUD ssiisisisieirinisiniioicnsiniosvassinisnississsias 6 65 Setting the Access Rights to a Group 00 eee eects 6 66 Table of Contents Defining a New Label 000 eee eeceeeceeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaees 6 68 Viewing the Labels List oo eee cee eeeeeeeteeeeeeees 6 69 Sorting the Labels List sipiin ininom 6 69 Refreshing the Database List occ cece eee ceeceeceeeeeeeeetseteene
8. g ke x or H323 Lecture Mode knz cnfalpha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching d Lecture Show alpha 1 e a A A E 8 y Sea H323 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence The asterisk that appears in the title bar indicates that the database was modified and must be saved to retain the changes 16 To save changes to the database click the Save button B on the toolbar or select Save Database from the Database menu DataBase Directory Options Window Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC 7 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Starting a Conference from a Reservation Template Using the Reservation template you can schedule a conference to start immediately On Going Conference or to start automatically at a predefined date and time Reservation For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Starting an On Going Conference from a Reservation Template Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template To view the participants assigned to a Reservation template expand the Groups tree to locate the Template Group in which the Reservation template is stored To list participants in the Reservation Template 1 Open the Reservations in Database window 2 C
9. 6 When the list of Reservation or Participant templates is very long click Filter from the Database menu MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Filter Database Reservations or Filter Database Parties dialog box opens Filter Database Reservations x Filter Name T Labet Jin one Reservation Start Time From J foo a FE Unti Jio 11 04 v Cancel 7 Select one or more of the following filters and specify values for them Name The name of the template Wild cards can also be used Label The label assigned to the template during its definition The labels are defined in the Database Manager Reservation Start Time This option is enabled only for Reservations and Requested Meetings It enables you to filter reservations according to the start date and time set during the reservation definition either in the WebCommander application or in the MGC Manager By default the current date and time is displayed 8 Click OK The filtered list of Reservation or Participant templates is displayed The Template Groups hierarchy is defined in the Database Manager The administrator can add or delete Template Groups and sub Template Groups in the hierarchical tree Users can depending on their access rights add or delete Template Groups directly from the Reservations or Participants in database windows For example if users have only Read permissions in a
10. FE ee Ca tele Bebuid cence Click the Settings button to select the appropriate sort order 6 17 Chapter 6 Using a Database The Collation Settings widow opens Collation Settings Latint_General z f g Select the following parameters Collation designator Latin1_General Check the following check boxes Case sensitive Width sensitive and Kana sensitive h Click OK i Inthe Rebuild Master dialog box click Rebuild At the end of the process the Rebuild Master dialog box closes 6 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Reconnect the SQL Server by right clicking the SQL Server icon in the System Tray bottom right corner and then clicking Start from the pop up menu B d SQL Server Group Py F 3 WEB SERVE jinde E D New SQL Server Registration Edit SQL Server Registration properties Delete SQL Server Registration Connect Stop New All Tasks gt View gt New Window from Here Refresh Export List Properties Help j Repeat steps 1 to 12 in the SQL Server Configuration procedure Make sure that the appropriate path is selected in the Restore database General dialog box Registering the SQL Database in ODBC Data Sources The SQL database provided with the MGC Manager Server must be registered in the ODBC Data Source to enable its use by both the SQL and MGC WebCommander applications 6 19 Chapter 6 Using a Databa
11. Properties Help The Server disconnects and an icon Zs appears next to the server Ti SQL Server Enterprise Manager a Console Window Help Ta Console Root Microsoft SQL Servers SQL Server Group Action view Tools eS fin AP BIB IFINIP i es Tree sau Server Group 2 Items E Console Root a g S E Microsoft SQL Servers s 4 SQL Server Group F3 WEB SE MGC WEB S F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 Windows NT f Windows NT Windows NT MGC WEB SERVER SQL2000 Windows NT b Using Windows Explorer access the SQL directory on your system and copy the Data directory either to the same location a Copy of Data directory is created or to a different location 6 15 Chapter 6 Using a Database c From the Start menu run the Rebuild exe utility Rebuild Master F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 E E EE Ro SS tele Rebuid cene d Click the Browse button to select the Master Database that will be used to change the sort order 6 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II e f The Browse for Folder dialog box opens Browse for Folder Select the Copy of Data folder according to its path that you created in step b of this procedure and then click OK The name of the folder appears in the Source Directory containing Data Files box Rebuild Master F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 i C Program Files Microsoft SOL Server MSSQL SQL2000 Cc_
12. Slave indicates that the participant is part of a Master conference and is used as a link to a Slave conference Displays the name of the default Network Service Sub Service Name Displays the terminal name if one exists Node Type Terminal indicates that the participant is not used as a link between Cascading conferences If the participant is the link between two conferences the terminal number is 0 and the conference properties to which it is linked are shown The Terminal number of a link to a second Slave conference will be 0 2 0 terminal number and 2 is the second conference and the Cascade Status is Slave which is the status of the second conference If the participant is part of the Master conference but not the link the MCU number is 1 and the Cascading Status is Master When participants connect or disconnect from the conference the participants list on all the endpoints is updated accordingly In addition the cascading status of a conference can be viewed in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box If the Master conference is terminated the slave conference is run as a standard conference In such a case the MCU number is changed to 1 and numbers of all the terminals connected to this MCU are updated accordingly MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II H 243 Chair Control Chair Control enables an endpoint to control the conference and other conference participants The endpoint that
13. 9 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens This dialog box is identical to the IVR Operator Assistance dialog box Operator Assistance x IV Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message OPERHELP AC x Add Message File Disconnection Message GOODBYE ACA 7 Add Message File IV Enable Operator Assistance on Failure lt Back Cancel Help 10 Define the appropriate parameters for the new Entry Queue Service as described in Table 2 8 on page 2 39 11 Click Next 2 56 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Video Services dialog box opens LT x M Enable Video Services Add Slide Video Welcome Slide lt Back Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the Video Welcome Slide for the Entry Queue Service Video participants connecting to this Entry Queue will see the slide while hearing the audio welcome message e To enable H 323 participants to view the Welcome slide define the LS system cfg flag in IP MEDIA FLAGS section ENABLE_IP_SLIDE YES e SIP participants cannot view the Welcome slide 12 Click Enable Video Services The Video Welcome Slide option is enabled 13 In the Video Welcome Slide list select the video slide that will be displayed to participants connecting to the Entry Queue The slide list includes the video slides that were previously downloaded to the MCU memory If the list is
14. By default the system is configured to validate the participant s right to start a new on going conference without checking if the conference is already running flag is set to NO To modify the system behavior and validate the participant s right to start a new on going conference only after checking if the conference is already running 8 Inthe Section pane double click the GREET AND GUIDE IVR section 9 Manually add the following flag by clicking the Add button and then entering AD_HOC_EQ_DIRECT_ONGOING_CONF 10 Set the flag value to YES To set the authentication mode for joining an on going conference By default the system is configured to use a Password or PIN code for authentication with the external database application flag is set to NO To modify the system behavior and enable CLI authentication with the external database application 11 In the Section pane double click the GREET AND GUIDE IVR section 12 Manually add the following flag by clicking the Add button and then entering USE_CLI_AS_PWD_FOR_EXT_DB 13 Set the flag value to YES When the participant connects to a conference the MCU uses the participant s CLI to query the external database application When the flag is set to YES the system does not prompt for password and the request to the external database application includes a dummy password 999886 which is ignored by the external database application during authentication 3 15
15. Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 14 Click OK to conclude the flag definition process Entry Queue Service with Access to the External Database The Entry Queue Service must be configured to access to an external database application to verify the conference Numeric ID and permission to start a new conference and to enable the Numeric ID Audio Messages To define the access to the External Database application 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand its tree 3 Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to it to display the MCU Configuration options U Pro ent Normal ga MCU Configuration is Cards aa Connections H E IVR Msg Services AV Message Services H amp Network Services H Operators H E GateWay Configuration H i Profiles ag Recording Links i On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 amp Participants Queue 0 EEN Reservations 0 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 H H MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 4 Right click the IVR Services icon and then click New Entry Queue Service Product Management Normal Ba MCU Configuration H el Cards TE connections H ey E AV Message Ser ew IWR Service H amp Network lt a ee H T Operators Messages Status H 2 GateWay Config Properties Ex amp Profiles BIE
16. Open the Reservation or Participant Template file or the Reservations or Participants in Database window 2 Double click the Reservation template icon or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template A list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose dial in dial out settings you want to modify The system displays the next definition the participant can toggle to either Dial In or Dial Out depending on the current definition of the participant If the participant s current definition is Dial Out the system displays the Dial In option in the right click menu 4 Click the Dial In or Dial Out option 2 a fa Alice Copy As Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl ine Ra gt Link participant Properties The participant definition changes to Dial Jn or Dial Out accordingly and the pop up menu displays the next toggled option 8 45 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or when the Participation template is stored in a Participant Template file Alternatively click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation or Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar Deleting Parti
17. SB Set As Default Delete Del e Copy gol Print IVR Data E Properties gt The IVR Message Service properties dialog box opens xi General Operator Assistance Roll Call Video Services SilencelT DTMF codes Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson Conference Password IVR Service Name Attended Language for IVR ENGLISH z External Server Authentication Never bd Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input 5 sec DTMF Delimiter The tabs and options of this dialog box are described in Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 23 Modify the required parameters or download the required audio file Click OK 2 49 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Assigning IVR Services to Conferences Assigning an IVR Service to a conference enables the participants and the chairperson to perform various operations from their endpoints using the DTMF codes and also to use the Roll Call feature You can assign an IVR Service to a conference during the definition of a new On Going Conference Meeting Room or Reservation You cannot disable or change the selected IVR Service during an On Going Conference To assign an IVR Service to a video conference 1 During the definition of a new On Going Conference or a new Reservation in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box in the Msg Service Type list select IVR x General Settings Participants Video S
18. Select the Enable Password Message check box to request the conference password before moving the participant from the conference IVR queue to the conference Select the Dial In and Dial out options You can configure different IVR Service behavior for password requests for dial in and dial out participants When dial in participants connect to the conference via an Entry Queue they are requested to enter the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration so that the system can route them to the destination conference Once moved from the Entry Queue to the conference IVR queue they can be requested to enter the conference entry password and or the chairperson password Alternatively you can configure the IVR Service not to request any password or to request that participants enter any key to confirm their presence When the system connects a dial out participant to the conference not via an Entry Queue in many cases there is no need for the participants to enter the conference password as they have been predefined in the system However you may require participants to enter a password or to press any key digit to confirm their presence and join the conference Select the required system behavior as follows Request password The system requests the participant to enter the conference password and after the correct conference password is provided moves the participant to the conference Reques
19. Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK Continued Recording Link The name of the Recording Link Name Recording Link ID The Recording Link ID Start Recording The start recording policy as follows Policy 1 Start recording automatically as soon as the first participant connects to the conference 2 Start recording when requested by the conference chairperson via DTMF codes or the WebCommander Web site or when the operator starts recording from the MGC Manager or WebCommander applications Table A 33 Event Fields for Event 27 RECORDING SYSTEM LINK cS Sea ee Party Name The name of the participant The participant represents an On Going recording or an On Going playback Party ID The participant s identification number as assigned by the system Op Type The type of playback or recording operation as follows 21 Start playback 22 Pause playback 23 Resume playback 24 End playback 25 Skip forwards 26 Skip backwards 27 Skip to end 28 Restart playback 51 Start recording 52 Pause recording 53 Resume recording 54 End recording A 57 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 58 Table A 33 Event Fields for Event 27 RECORDING SYSTEM LINK Continued Ga ee Party Type The type of participant as follows 1 On Going recording 2 On Going playback The user s PIN code Failure Indicates whether the recording or playback operation succeeded or failed a
20. To format a retrieved file off line 1 Select Off Line Formatting from the File menu in the CDR List window File Connection View Help Preferences gt Refresh FS Offline Formating Exit A dialog box opens x A OnOfflineFormat 2 Click OK The Open dialog box opens open x Lookin E Desktop deeg My Documents 3 My Computer My Network Places MCMS Sim Accord domain je NetApp Release 6 5 1R1P8 Accord Fs File name l Files of type cor Files cdr x Cancel I Open as read only p h 3 Navigate to the folder containing the retrieved text file cdr and select the file to be formatted You may select several files to be formatted using the standard Windows multi selection methods 10 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Open If the retrieved formatted version of the conference record already exists the following message is displayed pieton x File Polycom_cl32 cdf exists do you wantto overwrite Yes All No AIl No Cancel Click Yes to overwrite the existing file or No to cancel the formatting for the file and continue the formatting of the remaining files Click Cancel to cancel the operation At the end of the formatting process a message is displayed MGC Manager CDR x e 1 Finish Offline Formating es Click OK 10 13 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 10 14 Appendix A CDR Fi
21. aske Click Add User Defined Default The User Defined dialog box opens User Defined x Name Owner IV Show User Defined fields in Conference Parameters IV Show User Defined fields in Participant Parameters M Conference User Defined Titles To Appear In MGC Manager User Defined 1 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 3 m Participant User Defined Titles To Appear In MGC Manager User Defined 1 l User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined2 User Defined 3 User Defined3 User Defined 4 User Defined Co a MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 6 Define the following parameters Table 6 2 User Defined parameters description ma eea Enter the name of the User Defined default set Owner Show User Defined fields in Conference Parameters Show User Defined fields in Participant Parameters Conference User Defined Titles Participant User Defined Titles Enter the name of the owner of this set Only the owner and the administrator with the appropriate permission will be able to modify this set Leave this field blank to assign this set to the current logged in user Select this check box to display the User Defined fields in the Conference Properties General dialog box If you clear this check box all three User Defined fields will be hidden Select this check box to display the User Defined field
22. 1 2 In the Database Manager Status area right click the Defaults set icon A pop up menu appears Video Set As Private Default Set Default to Users Alt D Copy Copy As Delete Properties Click Set As Global Default The appropriate indiction appears in the Status area and a check mark appears next to the Set as Global Default option To define a Defaults set as the Private Defaults set 1 In the Database Manager Status area right click the Defaults set icon A pop up menu appears Video Set Default to Users Alt D Copy Copy As Delete Properties Set As Global Default Click Set As Private Default The Defaults set is assigned as the Private Defaults set of the user who is currently logged in The appropriate indiction appears in the Status area and a check mark appears next to the Set as Private Default option MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To Assign a defaults set to other users LS Only the administrator can assign a Defaults set to other users 1 2 In the Status area right click the Defaults set icon A pop up menu appears Set As Private Default Set Default to Users Copy As Delete Properties Set As Global Default Click Set Defaults to Users The Add Default to Users dialog box opens listing all users currently defined in the database Add Default to Users x ACCORD Administrator admin Administrator
23. 1 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II From anon encrypted conference to an encrypted conference or another non encrypted conference e When the Participant Level flag is set to NO the participant s encryption setting must match the conference encryption setting to be moved to the other conference For example encrypted participants can move only from an encrypted conference to another encrypted conference These guidelines apply to both connected and disconnected standby participants Monitoring the Encryption Status The conference encryption status is indicated by an icon in the Encryption column in the Status pane and the Status column in the Monitor pane ia The participant encryption status is indicated by an icon in the Encryption column in the Status pane and the Status column in the Monitor pane For more information on monitoring the MCU features and capacities related to encryption see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 1 39 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 40 An encrypted participant who is unable to join a conference is disconnected from the conference The disconnection cause is displayed in the Participant Properties Disconnection Cause tab where the Security Failure indication is selected and the Cause box identifies the encryption related situation Nadine Properties es MGC Manager User s Guide Volume
24. 8 19 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Dragging and dropping is unavailable for Reservation templates Reservation or Participant templates whose names already exist in the When problems occur during the conversion process such as converting ey database an error message is displayed To copy a Reservation template from the Reservation Template file to the Reservations in Database window 1 Open the Reservation Template file from which you want to copy the Reservation template 2 Log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window In the Reservations Template file window right click the icon of the Reservation template to copy and click Copy E ResTemplatesFile2 tit 5 x Conferences List os 48 Audio Conference a aa as Operator Conference Properties 8 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Reservations in Database window right click the Group to which you want to copy the Reservation template and then click Paste loj x H Root Name LineRate Audioaig Video Se Meet Me __ H 0 Default oP H Sales gt New Res Template s 56 G72 Videos New Res Operator Template Print All Paste As New Group Delete Group The Reservation template is copied to the selected group in the Reservation database Alternatively use the shortcut keys to perform these operations The list of shortcut keys can be found in the MG
25. Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 9 Event Fields for Event 2 CONFERENCE END i a Conference End Indicates the reason for the termination of the Cause conference as follows 2 The conference was terminated by an operator 3 The conference ended at the scheduled end time 4 The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the conference for a predefined time period or all the participants disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty for a predefined time period 5 The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes 252 The conference never started since the end time was past at startup 253 The conference could not start due to a problem 254 The conference was ended by an MCU reset 255 An unknown error occurred Table A 10 Event Fields for Event 3 NET CHANNEL CONNECTED Fie il se eT Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Channels Number Note This field is only relevant to multirate calls The total number of channels being connected for this participant A 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 10 Event Fields for Event 3 NET CHANNEL CONNECTED Continued eae
26. Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Modifying Reservation Templates 8 54 When the same Reservation template is used repeatedly you may need to modify its parameters when conditions change When modifying a Reservation template you can modify Global conference information Individual participants information To modify global conference information 1 In the Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window double click the Conferences List or Group icon to expand the list of Reservation templates Right click the icon of the Reservation template that you want to modify and then click Properties ice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del The Conference Properties dialog box opens Modify the necessary conference properties For a detailed description of the conference properties see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference Click OK to complete the changes and close the Conference Properties dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the
27. Linking Unlinking Participants in the Database Participants who are embedded in a Reservation template may be changed to become linked participants In such a case the participant properties are copied to the Participant database and a new Participant template is created in the same group where the Reservation template is stored Linked participants may be unlinked In such a case the participant is embedded in the Reservation template and any change to his her properties will not affect the template and the participant definition in other Reservation templates to which the Participant template was linked Unlinking a participant does not delete the Participant template from the database To link unlink a participant in the database 1 2 3 Open the Reservations in Database window Expand the Groups tree and locate the desired Reservation template Double click the Reservation template icon A list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose link status is to be changed Click Link participant to change an embedded participant to a linked participant Lr Alice Copy As Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl Line Rates gt Link participant Properties Click Unlink participant to embed the participant in the Reservation template and break the link to the Participant template stored in the P
28. Restrict Number Type Net Sub Service Name Number of Party Phone Numbers Number of MCU Phone Numbers Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or not relevant Indicates whether or not the participant is an Audio Only participant as follows 0 The participant is not an Audio Only participant 1 The participant is an Audio Only participant 255 Unknown Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The type of telephone number Since undefined participants are dial in participants the only possible value is 255 Taken from Network Service default Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The name of the Network sub service An empty field means that MCU selects the default sub service Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The number of participant phone numbers The participant phone number is the CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The number of MCU phone numbers The MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU A 51 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 27 Event Fields for
29. t H A g 3 gas dE 67221 alpha 21 c 512 kbps Auto Continuous Presence oh x iB H 323 conf alpha 17 fa 384kbps 24 G722 1 5ir Video Switching Po E H323 crf alpha 22 S H 323 conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G728 5iren7 Video Switching Ea 3 SEB H323 Lecture Mode EEibr323 cnf apha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching ES Lecture Show alpha 1 x EAE ecipHse3 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence The Reservation templates in the database are organized in Template Groups Users can only access the Template Groups to which they have the appropriate access rights The access rights are assigned to them by the administrator For more details about the organization of the Reservation templates in Template Groups in the databases and Permissions refer to Defining a New a Reservation Template on page 7 10 and Chapter 6 Assigning Groups to Users on page 6 60 Chapter 7 Database Templates Defining a New a Reservation Template Open the 1 Log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window sce 2 Inthe left pane Groups Browser area expand the Groups tree double window click the icon of the Template Group to expand until you locate the Template Group to which you want to add the Reservation template Expand the Groups tree and locate the required Group E Reservations in AccordDB E oj x E gt Root Name Video Session 5 Office Reservation te WH w Polycom Office
30. 2 Connected IR puedo ED wa D gt Connected 172 22 13 39 Be oaot Qi Ht 5 wait AD connected 172 22 132 112 Be Dia out Qi E 3 Diana me No Wait D connected 172 22 132 146 Be Dial out q a osh z Nowat AD Connected 172 22 133 67 Be Daout Q t Ready TT uw Participants of an Attended Wait conference that are waiting for operator assistance are listed both in their Home conference and in the Participants Queue Participants of a Welcome No Wait conference who are in the Greeting stage are only listed in the Home conference Icons used to indicate the Participant Status Specific icons are used to identify the participant status in a Greet and Guide conference as follows Table 4 2 Greet and Guide Participant Status a ee The participant was moved to the Operator conference the Attended stage and is being assisted by the operator The participant is in the Greeting stage and has been placed in the Participants Queue 4 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 4 2 Greet and Guide Participant Status Continued E When there is a problem with the participant connection while in the Greeting stage an exclamation point appears next to the participant icon The participant is connected to the MCU and is waiting in the Participants Queue for the operator s assistance When a fault occurs while the participant is in the Participants Queue an exclamation point appears next to the parti
31. 925 A 9251000 lt a GP oji J with this 1D Entry Queue Name DefaultEQ Numeric ID 1000 Th gt or Profile Parameters aed yes i Ws Going Ae conference gt El oj oE New Conference ID 1300 Figure 3 1 Conference Initiation Validation with External Database Application 1 The participant dials in to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue 2 The participant is requested to enter the conference Numeric ID 3 The participant enters the conference Numeric ID via his her endpoint remote control using DTMF codes If there is an ongoing conference with this conference Numeric ID the participant is moved to that conference where another authentication process can occur depending on the IVR Service configuration 4 If there is no ongoing conference with that conference Numeric ID the MCU verifies the conference Numeric ID with the database application that compares it against its database If the database application finds a match the external database application sends a response back to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II MCU granting the participant the right to start a new ongoing conference If this Numeric ID is not registered in the database the conference cannot be started and this participant is disconnected from the Entry Queue The external database contains a list of participants users with their assigned parameters Once a participant is identified in the database accord
32. Add Message File cancel _ This dialog box lists the currently used languages that were selected from the languages supported by the system 4 To add a new language click the plus button MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Custom Language dialog box opens x New Language New Language ITALIAN cme In the New Language field enter the name of the language to include in the Supported Languages list LS The language name cannot include a period Click OK The new language is added to the IVR Properties dialog box To download the audio files for the various messages and prompts in the IVR Properties dialog box click the Add Message File button The Add Message File dialog box opens Add Message File i x Path Generation Message Language Message Category Message Type Install to fEngish o z Conference Password z Request Password z Download File The audio files are downloaded to the MGC unit one by one In the following steps you select a single Message Type in one of the Message Categories for which the audio file will be downloaded You can download several audio files for each Message Type Each file is downloaded separately when the appropriate Language Message Category and Message Type are selected You can download the required files during the definition of the IVR Message Service In such a case you can skip the next steps 2
33. Email Address WebOftice URL I Custom MCU Select MCUs MCUs per User Creation amp Authentication gt gt Corcel 2 Define the following parameters Table 6 5 User Properties Options Fela Deseripton o Enter the name of the user Password Enter the password to be used by the user when accessing the MGC Manager Database Manager module 6 54 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 6 5 User Properties Options Continued ee Se ae Confirm Password Type the identical string entered in the Password field to confirm the password If a mistake is made typing the password string a Wrong Password confirmation error message will appear Permission Select the Permissions access rights type for the user from the drop down list The permission type is defined in the Permissions table It defines the modules the user can access and the functions s he can perform Email Address If the email option is enabled in the permissions selected for the user enter the user s email address This address will be used to notify a user when a reservation is scheduled This is for the WebCommander only WebOffice URL The web site or destination address of WebOffice MCU per User The system administrator can select the MCU s on Custom MCU which the user may schedule reservations or start On Going Conferences Select this check box to select the MCU s for the user When cleared
34. Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC Alternatively click the Save button E on the toolbar MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Opening Additional User Tables You can open the Participant and Reservation User Tables and display them concurrently Once you have opened one User Table using the logging in process you can then open the other without having to perform the login again This only applies if you have access rights to both databases To open additional User Tables 1 On the Database menu select Open D B Reservation Template or Open D B Participant Template and then select the database you want to work with The system lists all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password DataBase Directory Options Window Saye Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template AccordDB Open D B Participant Template gt Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC The window of the selected database opens 2 If the list of Reservation or Participant templates is very long you can filter the list of templates For instructions see steps 6 to step 8 on page page 7 6 Deleting a Reservation Template from the Database
35. If this attempt fails as well the connection with the endpoint is terminated If the capabilities exchange is 1 71 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 72 successful the endpoint is connected according to the conference line rate communicated by the MCU during the capabilities exchange and using the standard H 221 aggregation procedure Dial out Auto Detect When a dial out participant connects to the conference the system exchanges capabilities with the endpoint and attempts to connect the participant using Bonding If Bonding is unavailable the participant is connected in H 221 Once the aggregation method is determined the MCU attempts to connect the participant at the Line Rate defined for the conference If this fails it connects the participant using a lower line rate e When Bonding fails and H 221 is selected problems may occur when connecting the participant if the operator entered only one dial number and the participant s line rate is higher than 2B 128 Kbps e HO is not automatically detected Monitoring You can view the endpoint s connection parameters in the Monitor and Status panes of the MGC Manager window For more details see the MGC Manger User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Interactive Voice Response IVR is an application that allows participants to communicate with the conferencing system over the telephone or via their endpoint s input device s
36. If you no longer need a Reservation template you can remove it from the database to keep the database smaller To delete a Reservation template 1 Log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window 2 Expand the Template Groups tree by clicking the plus icon next to the Group icons Continue this process until you locate the Template Group in which the Reservation template is stored 7 43 Chapter 7 Database Templates 3 Double click the Group icon in which the Reservation template is stored or click the plus icon alongside it to expand the list of Reservation templates within that Template Group 4 Right click the icon of the Reservation template to delete and then click Delete or press the lt Del gt key dee Sales1 Ss Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste cri y Paste Ctrl P Cee De Properties A message appears prompting you to confirm the deletion MGC Manager xi A Delete Reservation HR Weekly Are You Sure lt a e 5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to Cancel the deletion If you have selected Yes the Reservation template is removed from the Reservations in Database list Adding a Template Group to the Database 7 44 If you have the appropriate permission you can add groups to the Groups tree in the database directly from the Part
37. Ifonly the Basic parameters are displayed click the Advanced button Select the type of Annex to use with Visual Concert FX Complete the conference definition and click OK 1 15 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD Certain video cameras and their software applications allow conference participants to control far end remote cameras The Far End Camera Control protocol H 281 is used to control the video camera remotely with ISDN and IP endpoints With H 323 endpoints Annex Q or RV mode Radvision proprietary method is used for H 281 commands messages requesting control over the far end camera from the MCU Control of the remote endpoints is accomplished by the means of data tokens In a conference with IP and ISDN participants the MCU simulates the use of data tokens with H 323 endpoints to work in a similar way as with ISDN endpoints To obtain control over a far end camera FECC a participant requests the data token from the MCU by clicking one of the arrow keys or one of the zoom keys in the endpoint s software application Upon this request the MCU opens the LSD Low Speed Data channel of all the conference participants and allocates the data token to the requesting participant This allows the participant to transfer commands from one endpoint to the camera of another endpoint When the data token is released by the endpoint holding it the token can be taken b
38. OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued el ee eee Party Name The name of the participant who was moved Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Connection Type The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in 6 Direct Bonding Mode Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Indicates whether Bonding is enabled or disabled Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Possible values are 0 Bonding is disabled 1 Bonding is enabled 255 Auto Number Of Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Channels The number of channels as follows 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 Net Channel Width The band width of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a band width of 1B which is the only band width that is currently supported Net Service Name The name of the Network Service An empty field indicates the default Network Service A 61 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 62 Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued ee eee er Restrict Number Type Net SubService Name Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or not relevant In
39. Prefix 101 Prefix 102 Prefix 103 Figure 1 9 Enhanced Cascading with H 323 Links Dial up MasterConference M lt M MCU A MCU B Conference Name MasterConference Conference Name Slave1 Participant InFrom MasterConference Participant OutTo MasterConference Connection Type Dial in Connection Type Dial out Alias Name Slave1 name of the conference Alias Name 1719MasterConference making the call from MCU B Network Service Prefix and the name Network Service Prefix 1719 of the Master conference on MCU A Figure 1 10 Enhanced Cascading using H 323 Links 1 57 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To define the H 323 Enhanced Cascading links The Participant s Properties Identification dialog boxes show how to define the participants used as links in each of the Enhanced Cascading conferences described in Figure 1 10 Identification Advanced Identification Advanced Name Name InFromSlaveConference OutToMasterConference Connection Type Interface Type Connection Type Interface Type Diakin z H323 z Diatout z H323 z Participant IP Signaling Port Participant IP Signaling Port O 0 v TTO 1720 e S E 0 1720 Alias Name Alias Type Alias Name Alias Type Slavel H323 ID bd 1719MasterConference H323 ID Extension Identifier String Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 U
40. The event fields are separated by commas Two consecutive commas with nothing between them or a comma followed immediately by a semi colon indicates an empty field as in the example below E Debbie_c416 cdr Notepad loj x File Edit Format View Help 4001 11 06 2006 14 00 32 0 5001 11 6 2006 14 00 32 0 i235 060302 247072 3 6001 11 06 2006 14 00 32 303 101 11 06 2006 14 05 10 0 Number Type ae from service 0 0 1 6 0 El 255 o re ZERO 1 0 342 25 5 5 0 1 342 4504967295 4294967295 1720 g a21 06 314 05 10 umber Type taken fram service 0 3010 11 06 2006 14 05 10 Standard Event Record Fields All event records start with the following fields e The CDR event type code For a list of event type codes and descriptions refer to Table A 2 CDR Event Types on page A 6 e The event date GMT The event time GMT The structure length This field is required for compatibility purposes Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Event Types The table below contains a list of the events that can be logged in the CDR file and indicates where to find details of the fields that are specific to that type of event name identifies the event in the formatted CDR file LS The event code identifies the event in the unformatted CDR file and the event Table A 2 CDR Event Types CONFERENCE START NET CHANNEL CONNECTED 2 CONFERENCE END A 6 The conferen
41. The participant is copied to the selected group in the Participant database Alternatively use the shortcut keys to perform these operations The list of shortcut keys can be found in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Commands Shortcut Keys Dragging and Dropping Participant Templates With the drag and drop method you must open two template windows To copy Participant Template files by the Drag and Drop method 1 8 22 Open the Participants in Database window and the Participant Template file from which you want to copy the Participant template In the Participants in Database window expand the Group hierarchy to locate the group to which you want to copy the Participant template MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 3 Inthe Participant Template file window click the icon of the Participant template you want to copy and drag it to the target group in the Participants in Database window Reservation or Participant templates whose names already exist in the When problems occur during the conversion process such as converting ls database an error message is displayed 8 23 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Managing MGC and Database Templates The following operations may be performed with templates stored in the database or in template files 8 24 amp List the participants in a Reservation template Add participants to an existing Reservation template Copy a participant from a Re
42. default IVR and Entry Queue Services installed with the MCU software These default audio files can also be used to create new IVR and Entry Queue Services The conversion of wav files is required when you record your own set of voice prompts and messages The Audio and Video conversion tools are described in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools 2 13 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services IVR Hardware Requirements 2 14 The following hardware is required to set up and manage IVR enabled conferences Audio card The Audio card stores the audio messages that are part of the Entry Queue and IVR Services These messages are played while the participants wait in an IVR queue or in an Entry Queue The Audio card also enables the usage of DTMF codes Music IO card An I O card attached to the rear of the Audio module at the MCU s rear panel is used to play back music or recorded messages from an external device such as a tape or a CD player The music is played when e The conference is placed on hold e The participant is placed on hold e The participant is waiting in the Participants Queue for the operator s assistance This card is optional in the MGC 50 MGC 100 but is embedded in the MGC 25 MUX MUX card Audio only The video slides are downloaded and stored in the memory of the MUX or MUX card Up to four slides can be stored in the MUX or MUX card memory V
43. or 0 if the reservation was not set up from the web Table A 6 Event Fields for Event 4001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 3 Lee Cc eet Conf Remarks The remark that was entered in the conference general properties during the definition stage Maximum 300 characters If no remark was entered this field will be empty Table A 7 Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 a eee Note When this event occurs as the result of a change to the value of one of the event fields the event will only contain the value of the modified field All other fields will be empty Conference The conference Numeric ID Numeric ID User Password The conference entry password MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 7 Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 mo ee Chairperson web The chairperson web password Password User Defined 1 The contents of the User defined fields for the User Defined 2 conference User Defined 3 These fields enable operators to enter general information about the conference such as the company name and the contact person s name and telephone number The maximum length of each field is 80 characters Billing Info The billing code Table A 8 Event Fields for Event 6001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5 O as Encryption Indicates the conference encryption setting as follows 0 The conference is not encrypted 1 The conference is encrypted A 29
44. 17 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 18 From the Message Language list select the language for which the audio file will be downloaded to the MCU The languages list includes the languages that were defined in the IVR Properties In the Message Category list select the category for which the audio file will be downloaded Welcome Message Played when the participant connects to the Polycom MGC unit and enters the Entry Queue VR enabled conference or Participants Queue Conference Password Requests the participant to enter the conference password in order to connect to the conference Conference Chairperson Requests participants to identify themselves as the conference chairperson and enter the chairperson password General Played when participants must be notified of system related events for example notification that a conference is locked Operator Assistance Played when the participant requests or is entitled to the operator s assistance Roll Call Messages related to Roll Call such as the message requesting that participants state their name for recording SilencelT Played when the SilenceIT options are enabled in the definition of the IVR Service that is used for this conference Conference ID Requests the participant chairperson to use the required conference ID to connect to the conference In the Message Type list select the message type for which the downloaded message is to be played
45. 2 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Continued Message Category Operator Assistance Roll Call Message Type Description Operator Assistance The message is played when the Indication Message participant is waiting for the operator s assistance Disconnection Informs that the participant is Message being disconnected from the conference Roll call related messages such as the message prompting participants to enter their name and the message played when a participant joins the conference SilencelT SilencelT Menu Played to announce the SilencelT feature options Return to Conference Indicates which DTMF code the Muted participant must enter to return to the conference muted Unmute Reminder Indicates which DTMF code the participant must enter to unmute his her line after returning to the conference muted Unmute and Return to Indicates which DTMF code the Conference participant must enter to return to the conference unmuted Adjust SilencelT Indicates which DTMF code the Sensitivity and participant must enter to adjust Unmute the sensitivity of the SilencelT algorithm and return to the conference unmuted Disable SilencelT and Indicates which DTMF code the Unmute participant must enter to disable the SilencelT option and return to the conference unmuted MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Continued Message ia Category Message Typ
46. 5 4 Setting Up Cascading Conferences oo eee ec eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaes 5 5 Defining Master and Slave Conferences 0 cee 5 5 Defining other Conferences Participating in the Cascade CONTCLCNCE eciusioth ice dontienss evadevdeeveilaameblwevamis Miades ces ce 5 13 H 239 People Content in Cascading Conferences 5 13 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II An Example of Defining a Star Cascading Conference 5 15 An Example of Defining a Multi Hierarchy Cascading CONMELEN CE iiion aoaaa aaa aaie 5 18 Managing a Cascading Conference e sssseeseseeessessseersrresresesreees 5 20 Monitoring Participants in a Cascading Conference 5 21 243 Chair Control oss ics case casedsveass ctandaveewedis cdassivaascnavsundissnavasaceentneis 5 23 Withdrawing the Chair Token during a Conference 5 26 Using a Database sccicdecsstaVerenietece Uwe ed weenie 6 1 Database Configuration 0 cece ceeeseeeceeeeeeeceeseesseeesseeeseeeseeeaes 6 3 Registering the Access Database in ODBC Data Sources 6 4 SQL Server Configuration and Registration Optional 6 11 Restoring the SQL Database 0 eee eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeas 6 11 Registering the SQL Database in ODBC Data Sources 6 19 Database Manager scceisce ciececcscnsonectesssscvastechosvevtesesseravenudesnevssccsvenveeds 6 28 Logging into the Database Manager ou ee eeeeeeeeseeseteeeeeees 6 28 Upgrading from a Previous Version
47. 6 Click the Scheduler tab The Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Default Conference Properties 7 Define the parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 9 Defining a New Reservation 7 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 8 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties TF Roll Call 9 Define the parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference Settings 7 29 Chapter 7 Database Templates 10 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties xi General Scheduler Settings Participants Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name 4 K New F Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants E Max Participants fi Pre Defined Participants File JCD ebbie MGC data T emplate and MCU files participants usr J Dial Dut Manually Browse From database From directory In an Operator Conference only one participant is defined the operator The operator adds the second participant interactively during an Attended or Welcome conference Define the operator as a new participant or if already defined in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database add the operator to the conference as described in the MGC M
48. 8 9 Creating a New Reservation Template File 0 8 10 Adding a Reservation Template to a Reservation Template PU Ge sieniin anaana iaa a aa aaa aae 8 12 Opening a Reservation Template File teens 8 16 Converting MGC Templates to Database Templates 0 8 18 Converting Individual Reservation Templates into the Reservations Database csssesicscvictssisveavessde chaddesesuesss Eneee oE EE toni eadaves Rae 8 19 Converting Participant Templates into the Participant Database zennin a teh chia REE a S k 8 21 Dragging and Dropping Participant Templates 0 0 0 0 8 22 Managing MGC and Database Templates 0 0 eee eee eeeeeees 8 24 Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template 000 8 25 Adding Participants to an Existing Reservation Template 8 27 Adding a New Participant to an Existing Conference 8 28 Adding a Participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database ssesevcissssseceasiaseennearesseeyeasecosenasauesasueredentae 8 31 Adding Participants from another Reservation Template 8 37 Copying a Participant from a Reservation Template to an On Going CONTCLENCE cu itiedivees Sovecssnens sisvesstea seca vanpais steecdews Ne ao iao S an 8 41 Modifying the Line Rate Set in the Participant Template 8 43 Modifying the Participant Dial In Dial Out Definition 8 45 vii Table of Contents viii Deleting Participants from a Reservation Template
49. 9Participant Data Base Name AccordDB S For each Permission the system shows the currently defined access rights to three main modules e Scheduler indicates whether the user has access to the Meeting Scheduler module This option is not relevant to MGC Manager users e Monitoring Conference indicates whether the user has access to the Meeting Director module This option is not relevant to MGC Manager users e Database Configuration indicates whether the user has access to the administrator tables of the database Sorting the Permissions List You can sort the Permissions in ascending or descending order alphabetically by clicking on the Name column heading Defining a New User The database includes the list of all the users that can access the database from the MGC Manager and their access rights The user definition is used in Ad Hoc conferencing when the WebCommander is used as the External database application for conference initiation and access validation For more information about Ad Hoc Conferencing see Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 6 53 Chapter 6 Using a Database To define a new User 1 Inthe Browser area right click the Users icon and click Add New User to DB ors Add New User to dB The User Properties dialog box opens User Properties x Name I Password Confirm Password poo Permission Administrator M
50. Before FistJoin 2 Min After Last Quit T Min r Media Settings Audio Alg Auto X Dual Stream Mode None 7 lt lt Basic F Roll Call Pro Motion I Enty Tone Roll Call announcement cl Video Pook ha a Le IV End Time Alert Tone 5 Min I Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Talk Hold Time Audio Mix Depth Video Format Frame Rate 1 25 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings the conference to Quad Views or if you select Sharpness in the Quality field it is recommended to set the Video Protocol to H 263 and not Auto which is the default setting e Connecting endpoints using H 264 and H 263 4CIF in the same conference may reduce the conference video frame rate In conferences where 4CIF is used by endpoints it is recommended to set the Video Protocol to H 263 and the Quality to Sharpness e When defining the properties of a Continuous Presence conference if you set For more information on Advanced Media settings see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings 1 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Software Continuous Presence Settings Software Continuous Presence Software CP is a software solution for IP Only conferences that resembles the Continuous Presence feature in terms of functionality without using video card resources Software CP combines four incoming QCIF streams with a fixed video bitrat
51. CALL SETUP SIP CALL SETUP on page A 47 H323 CLEAR The clear indication termination of the INDICATION call of an H 323 participant For a description of the fields see Table A 25 Event Fields for Events 16 25 H323 CLEAR INDICATION SIP CLEAR INDICATION on page A 48 MPICHANNEL An MPI channel disconnected A 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued H323 PARTY CONNECTED NEW UNDEFINED PARTY BILLING CODE SET PARTY VISUAL NAME DTMF CODE FAILURE SIP PARTY CONNECTED An H 323 participant connected to the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 26 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTY CONNECTED SIP PARTY CONNECTED on page A 48 A new undefined participant joined the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY on page A 50 A billing code was entered by a participant using DTMF codes For a description of the fields see Table A 29 Event Fields for Event 20 BILLING CODE on page A 55 An operator assigned a new name to a participant For a description of the fields see Table A 30 Event Fields for Event 21 SET PARTY VISUAL NAME on page A 55 An error occurred when a participant entered a DTMF code For a description of the fields see Table A 31 Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF CODE FAILURE on page A 56 A SIP pa
52. Cancel Appi Help 2 Inthe FECC LSD Rate box select one of the following options Table 1 2 LSD FECC Rate Options None Default When The FECC LSD option is disabled any request for far end camera control during the conference is rejected MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 1 2 LSD FECC Rate Options Dynamic The On Going Conference starts with the FECC LSD channel closed Upon request from a participant the MCU opens the FECC LSD channel and assigns the data token to that participant The FECC LSD channel remains open throughout the conference In Video Switching conferences when opening the FECC LSD channel endpoints that do not support FECC LSD become connected as Secondary audio only This is the only option available in encrypted conferences In encrypted conferences with ISDN participants when starting the conference the MCU opens the FECC LSD channel at a fixed rate of 4 8 Kbps LSD 4800 and keeps the channel open at this rate throughout the conference Note This option is not available for P Only video conferences The fixed rate MCU opens the FECC LSD data channel at a fixed rate of LSD 6400 when starting the conference and keeps the channel open throughout the conference Once the channel is open the behavior is the same as in the Dynamic mode Note This option is not available for encrypted conferences LSD4800 YES section CHAIR FECC and the FECC LSD field is set to Dynamic when an
53. Conferences Link In Link Out Dial in ISDN Dial out ISDN 7087996 Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out 5 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Shown below is the Star Cascading Conference as viewed in the MGC Manager Main window nager VER File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help dje AMAA 3 2 wiz a H SSRN vecere euren fan z 22 5 zal ia a pI AEA PEREA Nar Saas MGC 256 E Prod mame Normal te H MCU Configuration p conterence A Jan 26 2004 12 17 41 Jan 26 2004 14 17 41 00 Jan 26 2004 14 24 00 T i conterence B Single Participant Jan 26 2004 12 aR conference c Single Participant Jan 26 2004 12 25 26 Jan 26 2004 14 25 26 On Going Conferences 3 H Conference amp un On Going Gateway Sessions 0 EB participants Queue o D connected M996 996 P 99 99 amp Dial in 4i OK 1238 128 o Audio Video Link I 8 Link In 2 D gt connected M998 998 P 99 99 ZS Dialin q a OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link I conference ve 1 Connected Single Participant tink out We connected 7087996 Bee Dia out Q OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link h conference ve 1 Connected Single Participant Connected 7087998 ga Dial out q OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link TT fuer 5 17
54. Conferences ceeeseesecssecsseeseceseceaeceeeeaeeeneeeneeaeenes 4 2 Operator Conferences scveisscessessieiestecdasssacdurscuanstasdoodaaeasieiaascanzenees 4 3 Greet and Guide Stages oc ieeeeceeececseceeeeecseceeeeeeseteseeseeeeas 4 3 AV Message Services iesirea 4 4 Greet and Guide Hardware 0 ccceecesccscceseeseeeseeeeeeseeeneeeneeeneeaees 4 4 Greet and Guide Tools 0 0 0 eececesscceseesseceeesneeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenes 4 5 Greet and Guide Settings Workflow 0 ec eee eeeeeseeeeeeeenes 4 5 Defining a New AV Message Service 0 cece eceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeas 4 6 Listing the AV Message Services c ce eeeeeeeseessceeseecseeeeeeeees 4 10 Setting an AV Message Service as the Default Service 4 11 Modifying an AV Message Service eeeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeee 4 12 Deleting a Message Service from the Message Services List 4 13 Defining an Attended Wait or Welcome No Wait Conference 4 14 Managing Greet and Guide Conferences 000 0 eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 4 18 Viewing Participants in a Greet and Guide Conference 4 19 Icons used to indicate the Participant Status oe 4 20 Participant QUCUES icnn ner E E 4 22 H243 CONIErONCOS srissicidrisiiris idi iekaanescers 5 1 H 243 Cascading Conferences eeseesseeeeseeserseseresrerestsrersresesreesresest 5 1 Star Cascading H243 oivssccs csi tit ccjasossiatasaasvietsbsbostvsnactaveessplaes coves 5 2 Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading H 243 sesser
55. Control Panel SaKeyboard Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor b Email Microsoft Outlook Profiles Mouse Customize your mouse settings such as the button conl network Connections Connects to other computers networks and the Intern S NVIDIA nYiew Desktop Manager Configure your NVIDIA nVview Desktop Manager settings Re Phone and Modem Options Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settir Power Options Configure energy saving settings for your computer yprinters and Faxes Shows installed printers and fax printers and helps you Quicktime Configures QuickTime software and hardware componer 2 Regional and Language Options Customize settings For the display of languages numbet w Sa Administrative Tools 6 5 Chapter 6 Using a Database In the Control Panel window double click the Administrative Tools option The Administrative Tools window opens administrative Too ali File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Q O P ah gt raters gt KID Address 4 Administrative Tools gt SE Shortcut ey Computer Managem 2KB Shortcut 2KB Shortcut hil Event Viewer 2KB Shortcut Bp Local Security Policy 2KB Shortcut Hemicrosoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration 1KB Shortcut Afpmicrosoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards 2KB Shortcut ff Performance 2KB Shortcut By Services 2KB Shortcut Double click the Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data S
56. Copying the Reservation parameters from an On Going Conference or Reservation For more details see see Chapter 8 Copying an On Going Conference or a Conference Reservation to a Reservation Template File or Reservation Database on page 8 52 Converting existing templates from Reservation Template files to the database format For more details see see Chapter 8 Converting Individual Reservation Templates into the Reservations Database on page 8 19 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a Reservation Template in the Database The following procedure describes the definition of a new Reservation template in the database Once created the template can be used to initiate an On Going Conference or a Reservation that will automatically start at a predefined date and time This is the recommended method to set up conferences as it allows you to save the conference for repeated use or to use it as a basis for reserving other conferences with similar properties To define a new Reservation template in the database you must first log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window For more details see Logging into the User Tables of the Database on page 7 3 M Reservations in AccordDB J O x Name LineRate Audioaig te Office Reservation Polycom Office Reservation WebOffice Polycom weboffice_v2 WebOffice cb ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 gee oa dE CP conf 28 Auto Transcoding
57. Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl A Line Rates Link participant Properties 8 37 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The participant s definition is copied to the clipboard Use the Copy As option from the right click menu to copy the participant parameters to the clipboard using a new name 5 If the Reservation Template file or Reservation database containing the target Reservation template is not open open it now 6 Expand the Conferences List icon in the Reservation Template file window to list the Reservation templates Alternatively expand the Groups in the Reservation database to locate the target Reservation template 7 Right click the icon of the target Reservation template and then click Paste A dep weboffice_v1 g Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Cop rl C Paste rl P Delete Del Properties The participant is added to the target Reservation template The participant icon is added to the Reservation template s participants list If you copy a linked participant from a Reservation template in the same Reservation database the participant will be added as a linked participant In all other cases the participant will be added as an embedded participant 8 Click Save from the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database from
58. Dial in 8 Ge 9754800 da 1234 NID Local Participant Entry Queue and natal Conference Dial in Numeric ID NID ngan sk Pye da ch fa E P Local Call 310 8795222 4567 re configured MCU 8 a r Conference Dial out Link1 Long Distance Call 00 1 212 9754801 eas Mu USA Atlanta Pre configured MCU ad Conference Dial out Cascaded Meeting Local Participant Entry Queue and Israel Link2 Long Distance Room Conference Dial in Numeric ID NID un Call 00 1 212 9754802 Dial in Link England 8 0 o 9251252 8901 a 2 m a a NERS 8a Figure 1 3 Simple Cascading in Cluster Mode As illustrated in Figure 1 3 participants dial in their local MCU to access the appropriate Entry Queue Once they enter the correct conference ID or password depending on MCU configuration they are moved to their local Meeting Room When the conference starts the Cascaded participant link automatically dials out to the direct dial in number assigned to the Meeting Room on the main MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II It is important to configure the IVR Service assigned to the Meeting Room without the need to enter the conference password otherwise the links will not be able to connect to the conference MCU Rollover In MCU Rollover mode one MCU is used as the Master MCU all MCUs are installed at the same location site and are connected to the same network and PBX This mode employs the same basic principle as the Clust
59. Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY Continued es Cee Party and MCU Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Phone Numbers No one or more fields one field for each participant and MCU phone number The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers Ident Method Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The method by which the destination conference is identified as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number or IP address or alias 2 Calling phone number or IP address or alias Meet Method Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel Net Interface Type The type of network interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 1 ATM 2 H 323 3 MPI 4 T1 CAS 5 SIP H 243 Password The H 243 password or an empty field if there is no password Chair Not supported Always contains the value 0 A 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY Continued a ea Video Protocol Audio Volume Undefined Type Node Type Bonding Phone Number Video Rate The video protocol used by the participant as follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 3 H 264 4 H 264 255 Auto The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is
60. Group 3 Reservation Template 9 Reservation Template 10 Figure 7 2 Database Organization in Template Groups 7 3 Chapter 7 Database Templates The access rights of users to the Participants and Reservation Template Groups are defined by the administrator during the configuration stage Access rights determine the user s ability to view modify or create templates in a specific Template Group Template Groups enhance the system security by enabling the system administrator to limit the user access to specific Template Groups This feature is important when the database is accessed from remote sites and over the Internet The Template Groups are defined in the MGC Database Manager in the administrative segment of the database To view modify or define the Reservation and the Participant templates stored in the database you must first log in to the database By default you are automatically logged into the database However if you logged out of the database you must log in again To log in to the database and list the Reservation or Participant templates 1 On the Database menu click Login DataBase Directory Options Window Se a sh Dat Filter Open 3 eservation Template Open D B Participant Template gt Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC gt The Database Login dialog box opens x Login Name fl Password
61. Hold Time 1 5 Sec Quality Audio Mix Depth 3 A sites T Annex I Anner R Il Annek 12 Select Master from the Cascade field Setting the Cascading field to Auto means that the conference status as Master or Slave will be defined later once the connection with the second conference is established The definition of Master and Slave is made according to the Cascading definition of the second conference or according to the status negotiated between the two MCUs In that case MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II the conference is set as a Slave if the link from the second conference identifies itself as Master by sending a special message 13 Complete the conference definition H 323 ID in the call setup message The message H 323 ID is then defined as LS The conference name is automatically added to an outgoing H 323 call as an an H 323 alias that matches all incoming parties to the conference To define a Slave Conference Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 1 2 J Product Management Normal En Ba mcu Configuration On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 re Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 g Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference 2 On Going Conferences 1 lew Conference New Operator Conference Print A
62. J Terminate After Chairperson Exits Layout Border BS F Biei Speaker Notation A r Recording J Enable Recording Recording Link Name Start Recording Immediately E 6 41 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 42 Define the Settings2 parameters These additional fields are defined in the same manner as in the Conference Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference Audio Only conference fields are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining a New On Going Audio Only Conference In the Owner field users with administrator s permission may assign the conference to any user by entering the user s name Reservations stored in the database may be filtered using the Owner name 10 Click OK to confirm and store the new Conference Defaults set Defining Participant Defaults To define participant defaults 1 Right click the Participant Defaults icon A pop up menu appears 1 Participant Defaults Add New Participant Defaults 2 Name Interface Type Connection ISDN x Dial in x Participant Phone MCU Numbers Participant Bonding a OoOo X User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Identifier String sent to Recording system Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Tt at a a Owner aaa Me Ca
63. Lyne Qiks 7 02 02 2004 09 43 17 Lynne 2 193 0 2007 02 02 2004 09 43 17 0 0 0 0 65535 6553 17 02 02 2004 09 43 17 0 Duke Knoop 1 1 276 1 16 02 02 2004 09 43 18 0 Nadine 3 1 7 02 02 2004 09 43 18 0 Nadine 3 193 0 Figure 10 1 Unformatted CDR File General conference section Event heading Q MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II e Formatted text Formatted CDR files contain multiple sections The first section in each file contains general conference data The remaining sections contain event data one section for each event Each field value appears in a separate line together with its name This data can be used to generate a summary report for a conference The following is an example of a formatted CDR file j Polycom_c150 cdf Notepad File Edit Format Help ile version 546 conf name Polycom conf ID 3802 reserved start time 01 02 2004 11 03 11 reserved duration 02 00 00 actual start time 01 02 2004 11 03 11 actual duration 00 13 26 Terminate by Operator GMT offset 2 ile retrieved CONFERENCE START conf transfer rate 2B nen restrict by audio rate 16kbps E cattch Event section picture format auto CIF frame rate auto QCIF frame rate auto LSD rate NONE HSD rate NONE T120 rate none CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 O1 02 2004 11 03 11 Figure 10 2 Formatted CDR File The formatted and unformatted files are text files that can b
64. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 2 lists the Message Types for each category for which files can be downloaded Table 2 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Message ee Category Message Type Description Welcome General Welcome The first message played when Message Message the participant connects to the MCU conference Entry Queue Conference Welcome Played when the participant Message enters the conference Conference Request Password Requests the participant to enter Password the password required to connect to the conference Retry Password A participant who enters an incorrect password is requested to type it again Request Digit Requests the participant to enter the digit required to connect to the conference Conference Chairperson Identifier Requests the participant to enter Chairperson Request the chairperson identifier key required to identify them as the conference chairperson Request Chairperson When the participant has been Password identified as the conference chairperson requests the participant to enter the chairperson password Chairperson When the participant enters an Password Failure incorrect chairperson password Message requests the participant to type it again General Messages played when participants must be notified of system related events for example notification that a conference is locked 2 19 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 20 Table
65. Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Save As on the Template menu Template DataBase Directory Optior New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Ghrl4S Convert into Database Recent File The Save As dialog box appears savea Save in O My Templates a Es Friendly blend of tmpltes tlt lec ResTemplatesFile2 tlt i ResTemplatesFile24 tlt lec ResTemplatesFile3 tlt lec ResTemplatesFiles tlt lee ResTemplatesFileS tlt E Standard New Reservation Templat File name ResT emplatesFile2 Save as type Reservation Files tlt Cancel Use the standard Windows techniques to specify the file name and the destination folder where the new Reservation Template file will be stored Al Reservation template files are of Reservation File file type and have the tlt extension Click the Save button The Reservation Template file is saved in the selected folder The window s title bar contains the name of the new Reservation Template file 8 11 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 12 Adding a Reservation Template to a Reservation Template File A Reservation template can be added to a Reservation Template file in one of the following ways e Creating a new Reservation template directly in the Reservation Template file e Copying a Reservation template from another Reservation Template file e Moving a Reservation template from another Reservation Template file To create a
66. Queue Services Table 2 5 IVR Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages Request Chairperson Select the audio file that prompts the participant Password for the chairperson password Chairperson Password Select the audio file that prompts participants to Failure Message re enter the chairperson password if they enter it incorrectly Chairperson Identifier Enter the key to be used for identifying the Key participant as a chairperson Possible keys are pound key or star Use Chairperson Select this option to enable the caller to join to the Password as conference as the chairperson by using only the Conference Password chairperson password instead of two passwords the Conference Entry password and the Chairperson password Note When this option is enabled the chairperson password must be different from the conference entry password Billing Code Select this option to enable the chairperson to enter a code for billing purposes 12 Click Next The Conference Password dialog box opens x IV Enable Password Messages Dial In Request Password Request Password confpass aca v Add Message File C Request Digit CN Eee Retry Password confttry aca v Add Message File Dial Out C Request Password Request Digit Request Digit anykey aca v Add Message File C None lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 2 30 13 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II
67. Recording Links 83 on Going Conferences 0 The Entry Queue Messaqge Service General dialog box opens x Entry Queue Service Name Language for IVR ENGLISH ail temal Server Conference NID umber of User Input Retries Timeout for User Input DTMF Delimiter fa Sea ee This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the Entry Queue Service 5 Define the following parameters Table 3 2 Entry Queue Service Global Parameters ce ae eee Entry Queue Type the name of the Entry Queue Message service Service Name Language for Select the language in which the Audio Messages and IVR prompts will be heard The Languages are defined in the VR Properties dialog box 3 17 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Table 3 2 Entry Queue Service Global Parameters Continued n e O OOOO External Server Select Conference NID to verify the conference Numeric ID with an external database application Number of User Enter the number of times the user is able to respond Input Retries to each menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the IVR system or waits for the Operator s assistance Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for Input input from the participant before it is considered as an input error DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system
68. Reservation my WebOffice Polycom w weboffice_v2 WebOffice sa ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 seh G7221 alpha 21 Bam alpha 1 28 Auto Transcoding a H 323 conf alpha 17 dorz alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 Siren Video Switching j ia H323 cnf alpha 22 Gibn 223 conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G726 Siren7 Video Switching goo 7 ey H323 Lecture Mode SERH323 cnf apha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching im Lecture Show alpha 1 JE Lecturemode Select New Res Template from the Group right click pop up menu The General tab opens Define the conference type duration and password SEIPH323 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Prese x sib Lecture Show alpha 1 128kbps 16 G728 Siren7 Continuous Prese JE Meeting Confer 00167879549 w rt g SEP LectureMode 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Continuous Prese gts 3 Right click a Group icon and then click New Res Template Define the conference parameters in the Settings tab New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print All Paste Ctrl V Select or define Paste As Ctrl P the conference New Group Delete Group participants in the Participants tab Select the Video Layout Continuous only in the Video tab If required define the phone number to be assigned to the conference in the Meet Me Per Conf tab The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties x General Scheduler Se
69. Reservation Template directly in a Reservation Template File The MGC Manager does not need to be connected to an MCU when you add a Reservation template to the Reservation Template file 1 Open the target Reservation Template file To open an existing Reservation Template file refer to Opening a Reservation Template File on page 8 16 2 Right click the Conferences List icon in the Reservation Template file window and then click New Res Template ResTemplatesFile2 5 x Conferences List New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print All MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties xj General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID User Detined 1 I Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 Meet Me Per Cont User Defined 3 EENE Conference Type Media r Supported Network m Video Session Standard Audio CIP Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio IPLISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator C Continuous Presence Elas sic bd Remarks E Aa Update Remark Remarks History The Conference Properties dialog box does not include the Scheduler tab when defining templates in MGC format When the Reservation template is used to reserve a conferenc
70. To cancel the voting session press pound eight two Roll Call User After the tone please state your NAMERCRD ACA name recording name request Roll Call Playing The name you have recorded NAMEIS ACA the recorded name is here the system will play the for the user to get name confirmation 2 69 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Roll Call Name Press one to record your name RERECRD ACA recording again or remain on the line to enter confirmation the conference Roll Call has joined the conference JOINED ACA Participant s entry prompt Roll Call has left the conference LEFT ACA Participant s exit prompt Roll Call The conference participants are ROLLCALL ACA Introduction to the participant s list Roll Call End of This is the end of the participants LISTEND ACA Roll Call list list SilencelT Adjust To reduce the noise detection level SLNRDRT ACA SilencelT sensitivity and return to the conference press and unmute three SilencelT To disable noise detection and SLNDNDRT ACA Disable and return to the conference press four unmute SilencelT Your line is muted due to a noisy SLNMUTE ACA SilencelT menu line For available options press nine SilencelT To return to the conference muted SLNRTMUT ACA Return to the press two conference muted SilencelT To unmute and return to t
71. Upon Request z Select the Enable Recording check box In the Recording Link Name drop down list select the required link according to the conference network connections For an IP only conference use an IP Recording Link For ISDN or a mixed network conference select either an ISDN or an IP Recording Link In the Start Recording drop down list specify when to start recording Immediately when the first participant connects to the conference automatic Upon Request when the operator or chairperson initiates recording manual Complete the conference definition and click OK Managing the Recording Process An operator can manage the recording process using the MGC Manager or the WebCommander application A chairperson can manage the recording process using DTMF codes or the WebCommander application 9 11 Chapter 9 Recording Using the MGC Manager to Manage the Recording Process To manage the recording process using the right click menu Right click the icon of the conference for which you want to manage the recording process and then click one of the following options as applicable Start Stop Pause Resume Only one or two recording options are displayed in the right click at any one time The options that are displayed depend on the current status of the recording process To manage the recording process using the Conference toolbar 1 Click the icon of the conference
72. Using a Database To register the database from the MGC Manager application 1 Open the MGC Manager application 2 On the Database menu click Database ODBC and then click Add Remove connection to the ODBC DataBase Directory Options Window Help Save Database Refresh Database Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC Refresh the database list Add Remove connection to ODBC ODBC Data Source Administrator 21x User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About Add User Data Sources Microsoft dBase Driver dbf dBase Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Remove Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls FoxPro Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Configure MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Visual FoxPro Database Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Visual FoxPro T ables Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver a gt An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine Cancel Aon Ha 6 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 3 Click the System DSN tab ODBC Data Source Administrator 4 Click the Add but
73. Windows techniques to select the desired Participant Template file The full path and name of the Participant Template file appear in the Pre Defined Participants File box and the participants defined in the Participant Template file appear in the Pre Defined Participants list Q MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 11 To assign the participant s to the Reservation template in the Pre Defined Participants list select the participant name s and then click the Add I button Multi selection of Participants is available using standard Windows conventions The selected participants appear in the Conference Participants list Repeat steps 9 to 11 to assign participants from other Template Groups and databases to the Reservation template 12 Define a new participant directly as follows a Click the New button b The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties x Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dialin z ISDN bi Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party fa User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 ip tepid 0 i Wty ih A het T Audio Only M vip JT Participant linked Cancel Help c In each field the system displays the default values as defined in the Part
74. a LAN server and they can be accessed by all the MGC Manager users on the network and by the WebCommander site via the Internet using the Web browser In addition operators can have a Chapter 6 Using a Database gy personal database installed on their computers Unless defined as shared the personal database cannot be accessed by other network users and can be used only from the specific operator workstation Access to the personal and public database is determined during the configuration stage This chapter describes the database configuration in the MGC Manager Important When both the MGC WebCommander and the MGC Manager applications use the same database the administrator tables defined in the MGC Web Server Manager apply to the MGC Database Manager and vice versa Therefore the various tables may include parameters that apply only to the WebCommander and others that apply only to the MGC Manager Users may access the database via the MGC Web Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager and perform changes in the administrator tables These changes will apply to both applications Registering the Access Database in ODBC Data Sources 6 4 During installation an Access file is installed on the local hard disk A central database may also be installed separately on the network server In both cases the database file must be registered in the ODBC of the operator workstation in order to access it The Access database can b
75. a file The file can be used to produce reports or can be exported to external billing programs The MCU can store details of up to 500 conferences When this number is exceeded the system overwrites conferences starting with the earliest conference To save the conferences information their data must be retrieved and archived to files The frequency with which the archiving should be performed depends on the volume of conferences run by the MCU The conference records are stored in the MCU in the directory c mcu cdr Each conference is a separate record in the MCU memory When a conference is archived it is archived as a separate file Each conference CDR file contains general information about the conference such as the Conference ID start time and duration as well as information about events occurring during the conference such as adding a new participant disconnecting a participant or extending the length of a conference 10 1 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility The CDR File CDR File Formats 10 2 Conference summary record Event code Event records The conference CDR records can be retrieved and archived in the following two formats Unformatted data Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records in raw data format The first record in each file contains general conference data The remaining records contain event data one record for each event Each record contains field values
76. be downloaded to the MCU for the same message type Repeat steps 8 to 14 for each additional category and message type for which audio files are to be downloaded Once all the audio files are downloaded to the MCU close the Add Message File dialog box and return to the IVR Properties dialog box In the IVR Properties dialog box click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting IVR Message Services The MGC system is shipped with a default IVR Service and audio files An IVR Message Service contains the audio message set for the menu driven scripts and music input from an external device background music You can create a new IVR Message Service when you want to customize audio messages and video slides or when you want to modify the IVR system behavior For example a special IVR Message Service can be set for each supported language or for different conference behaviors Different messages can be created for weekdays and holidays or special announcements Up to 30 IVR Services can be defined for a single MGC unit Defining a New IVR Message Service Before you define a new IVR Message Service ensure that the required audio LS and video files are prepared and converted into aca format files otherwise you will not be able to list or select them during the definition process To define a new IVR Message Service 1 2 3 Connect to the MGC unit MCU Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tre
77. be accessed by all the MGC Manager users on the network and from the WebCommander site over the Internet using the Web browser In addition operators can have personal databases installed on their computers Unless defined as shared the personal databases cannot be accessed by other network users and can be used only from a specific operator workstation Users upgrading from previous versions can convert the existing template files to the active database It is still possible however to work with the template files together with the database For more details on converting template files to database format see Chapter 8 Converting MGC Templates to Database Templates on page 8 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Logging into the User Tables of the Database The User Tables are used to store Reservation and Participant templates The tables are organized in Template Groups Participants Table Participant Template 1 Group 1 Participant Template 2 Participant Template 3 Participant Template 4 Group 2 Participant Template 5 Participant Template 6 Root Participant Template 7 Group 3 Se Participant Template 8 Participant Template 9 Template 9 Reservations Table Reservation Template 1 Reservation Template 2 Reservation Template 3 Reservation Template 4 esis Reservation Template 6 Group 1 Root Reservation Reservation Template 7 7 Reservation Template 8
78. between 1 lowest and 10 loudest Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB The participant type as follows 0 Defined participant The value in the formatted text file is default 2 Undefined participant The value in the formatted text file is Unreserved participant The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kops B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The video rate in units of kilobits per second A value of 4294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU A 53 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY Continued ee Co IP Address Call Signaling Port H 323 Party Alias Type SIP Party Address Type H 323 Party Alias IP Party Address A 54 Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The IP address of the participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The signaling port used for participant conne
79. between conferences The Participant s Properties Identification dialog boxes show how to define the ISDN links for each participant in a conference that uses Simple Cascading as described in the configuration example in Figure 1 5 Link In Properties Link Out Properties Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out Conference A Conference B 1 51 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 52 Monitoring You can monitor a Simple Cascading Conference using the Browser Status and Monitor panes of the MGC Manager main window The display shows separate information for each of the two linked conferences using an ISDN link as shown in Figure 1 6 MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help PARTICIPANTS QUEUE FILTER On Gag Gateway Sessions 0 B Participants Queue 0 EE Reservations 3 ey Meeting Rooms 2 Conference A Conference B Jan 25 2004 11 38 10 Jan 25 2004 15 38 00 3720 2 Jan 25 2004 11 38 37 Jan 25 2004 15 38 00 3721 2 Connection Type Audio _ video Sync eb conference B Product Management ID 3721 Link Out 3 Mike Ready 2 Connected D connected D gt Connected 2 Connected D connected Audio Ony D Connected M 9251995 9251995 P BS Dial in feo at 84
80. combined into one line in the formatted file 5 This appendix describes the fields and values in the unformatted CDR records The MCU sends the entire CDR file via API and the MGC Manager or external application does the processing and sorting The MGC Manager ignores events that it does not recognize that is events written in a higher version that do not exist in the current version Therefore to enable A 1 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File compatibility between versions instead of adding new fields to existing events new fields are added as separate events so as not to affect the events from older versions This allows users with lower versions to retrieve CDR files that were created in higher versions MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Summary Record The conference summary record the first record in the unformatted CDR file contains the following fields Table A 1 Conference Summary Record Fields Feld Deseription O The version of the CDR utility that created the file Conf ID The conference identification number as assigned by the system Reserved Start The time the conference was scheduled to start Time according to GMT time Reserved Duration The amount of time the conference was scheduled to last Actual Start Time The actual time that the conference started according to GMT time Actual Duration The actual conference duration Status The conference status code as fol
81. concurrently from the MGC Web Server Manager application as well as from the MGC Database Manager module of the MGC Manager application When that happens the information that you see in the MGC Database Manager window may not be updated with the latest changes performed by other users It is therefore recommended to periodically refresh the database to make sure that the latest data is displayed 6 70 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To refresh the database e On the Options menu click Refresh dB 6 71 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 72 Database Templates A template is a set of parameters that define a conference or participant and it is saved to a database for repeated use Participant and Reservation templates are organized in Template Groups This chapter describes the User Tables of the Database e Reservation templates e Participant templates Templates Overview A Reservation template is useful when you run a series of conferences that involve basically the same parameters such as participants transmission sites and phone connections A Reservation template contains the definitions of one conference These definitions can be partial or complete definitions of the conference A Reservation template is a conference definition stored in the database or in a Reservation Template file The database or a Reservation Template file can contain several Reservation templates A Participant template contains a
82. conference general meetings To create a Reservation Template similar to an existing Reservation Template 1 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database 2 Inthe Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the desired Reservation template 3 Right click the icon of the Reservation template you want to copy and then click Copy As ah weboffice_v1 j Start Immediately Start New Participant Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens 4 Click the General tab 8 49 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Type the name of the new Reservation template Make any other changes that are required for the new Reservation template When all the modifications have been made click OK in the Conference Properties dialog box The new Reservation template is added to the list of Reservation templates below the Conferences List or Reservation Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively
83. conference properties from the WebCommander Web site This password is assigned to the conference scheduled or started from the New Meeting window or from the MGC Personal Scheduler In Ad Hoc conferencing when the MCU is configured to use the WebCommander Server Manager as the External database application for authentication the chairperson password defined here overwrites the chairperson password defined in the Ad Hoc Profile 6 58 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 6 6 Creation amp Authentication parameters Continued eae ee Cae ET Ad Hoc Conferences Numeric ID Conference Information In Ad Hoc Conferencing the Numeric ID is used for authentication purposes When a participant connects to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue that is configured to access the WebCommander as the external database application the Numeric ID is used to verify whether the participant is authorized to start a new On Going Conference If the Numeric ID exists in the WebCommander database a new conference is started and this Numeric ID is assigned to the conference The Participant who has started the On Going Conference is automatically created and added to the conference If the Numeric ID does not exist in the WebCommander database the participant is disconnected from the MCU Enter the Contact Information for the conference This parameters overwrites the User Defined 1 field information in the Profile Participant
84. conferences If the audio and video files were not downloaded to the MCU prior to the definition of the AV Message Service using the Send File utility you can download them now Inthe AV Message Service dialog box click the Add New File button to download the files to the MCU The Install File dialog box opens Install File Sales 172 22 131 11 x Install Browse Proceed Ce e Click the Browse button to open the Select Source File dialog box and select the audio or video file in MGC format aca or acv and then click Open The name of the file appears in the Install field in the Install File dialog box Click Yes to proceed with file downloading to the MCU s hard disk The Done dialog box opens Click OK The system returns to the AV Message Service dialog box Click OK to save the new Message Service MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II A system message is displayed indicating that the MCU must be reset to be able to use the new AV Message Service The reset is necessary in order to download the video slide and the audio messages from the MCU s control unit to the MUX card s memory the video slide and to download the audio message to the Message extension on the Standard Audio card the audio messages MGC Manager x A You must reset the MCU Alpha 12 before the new settings will take effect 10 Click OK to confirm The new AV Message Service is added
85. conferences described in the configuration example in Figure 1 7 on page page 1 53 Identification Advanced Identification Advanced Name Name Link In IP Link Out IP onnection Type Interface Type affection Type Interface Type Dial in bd H323 bd Dial out fed H323 g Participant IP Signaling Port Participant IP Signaling Port 1720 172 22 140 201 1720 Alias Name Alias Type Atas Alias Type H323 ID bd H323 ID z User Defined UserDefned2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Gl 20 One a Gaede U fo ida clo cad 0 rid Neoware my U needy oe T Audio Only M vip I Audio Only M vip OK Cancel Apply OK Cancel Apply Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out Conference A Conference B If the IP card in the default IP Network Service is full and another IP Network Service is used perform the following steps e Define the dial out participant in the second conference manual dial out and complete the conference definition e Check the Participant Properties Advanced to find out the name of the IP Network Service being used Then find out the IP address of the card as defined in the IP Network Service e Define the first conference and the dial in participant Enter the IP address of the card used by the dial out p
86. define the Auto Extend parameters at the MCU level these settings apply to all the conferences that are run on this MCU To enable the Auto Extend option 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Right click the MCU icon select MCU Utils and the click Edit confer cfg The confer cfg window opens SysConfig confer cfg 172 22 131 11 E 15 x id m Section AUTO_EXTENSION Item Value ENABLE_AUTO_EXTENSION NO MAx_EXTENSION_TIME 30 EXTENSION_TIME_INTERVAL 5 ection m REMOVE Section Item Edit value Make sysenc file 3 Inthe Section pane click AUTO_EXTENSION 4 In the tem Value pane define the values of the following flags ENABLE_AUTO_EXTENSION YES NO default is NO enables or disables this option for all conferences running on this MCU This option must also be enabled defined at the conference level For details see To set a conference to automatically extend on page 1 43 1 42 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II MAXIMUM_EXTENSION_TIME value in minutes default is 30 the maximum allowed extension of the predefined conference duration For example if the conference was defined to last up to 3 hours and this flag is set to 45 minutes the conference can last up to 3 hours and 45 minutes EXTENSION_TIME_INTERVAL value in minutes default is 5 number of minutes that are added
87. defined in the Database Manager module of the MGC Manager or in the WebCommander Server Manager application i DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 0 5 x File Edit View Options Help m i TESE B AccordDB E EN g Conference Defaults U User Defined Defaults Q IMGC Manager Defaults LE Conference Defaults p4Participant Defaults 4 Participant Defaults U User Defined Defaults MGC Manager Defaults Labels D Permissions amp Users gt Groups There are four categories for which default sets may be defined User Defined Defaults a list of user defined field parameters for conferences and participants Conference Defaults a list of all the conference parameters Participant Defaults a list of all the participant parameters MGC Manager Defaults general system parameters that apply only to the MGC Manager These parameters determine the system behavior in specific events such as saving and linking participants to a conference and updating the start time of a conference 6 37 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 38 Defining User Defined Defaults To define a user defined default 1 2 Log in to the Database Manager Click on the plus icon next to the Defaults icon to display the defaults categories Expand the Defaults tree Right click the User Defined Defaults icon A pop up menu appears y Defined Derauits Add User Defined Default
88. details that you want to display in higher resolution For example when displaying still images presentations or capturing people Motion Optimized for motion The video pictures change frequently and display movement for example a sporting event where the camera is moved around people moving around etc 4CIF Guidelines 4CIF is enabled with the H 263 Video Protocol only The Video card is required 4CIF is available in Continuous Presence Classic and Quad Views modes 4CIF is transmitted from the MCU to the endpoints when all the following conditions are met ACIF is enabled at the MCU level in the system cfg file The conference line rate is equal or higher than the 4CIF threshold set in the system cfg file The endpoint can receive 4CIF The 4CIF Quality is set to Sharpness The layout is suitable for 4CIF as follows e Classic 2x1 1x2 2x2 3x3 e Quad Views 4x4 4CIF is available in Conference on Port COP conferences in both CP Classic and CP Quad View modes Depending on the conference line rate and video layout the video output resolution is automatically set to 4CIF 1 23 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 24 or CIF resolution based on the endpoint s capabilities If one of the endpoints in the conference cannot receive 4CIF CIF is used instead In H 239 People Content conferences the Content graphics is sent and received in the same resolution In a
89. dialog box appears 2 Select Reservation File from the Files of type drop down list 2 xt Look in My Templates Je 0 e E Friendly blend of tmpltes tlt E ResTemplatesFileS tlt ei ResTemplates video audio and operator confs tlt E Standard New Reservatior ei ResTemplatesFile2 tlt E ResTemplatesFile2A tlt E ResTemplatesFile3 tlt E ResTemplatesFile4 tlt Files of type Reservation Files t z Cancel 4 Participant Files usr All Files MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Use the standard Windows techniques to select the folder containing the Reservation template file Use the standard Windows techniques to select the Reservation template file Click Open The Reservation Template file window opens Double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conference List icon The list of Reservation templates defined in the Reservation Template file is displayed lol x p fea we Conferences List ies Polycom Audio Conference ag Polycom Operator Conference H Cieni Polycom Video Conference 8 17 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Converting MGC Templates to Database Templates 8 18 If you are upgrading an existing installation you may have several Reservation and Participant Template files in your system Convert these files to the new database structure to be able to share templates with th
90. e eee seeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes 2 47 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting an IVR Message Service as the Default Service 2 48 Modifying IVR Message Service Properties cece 2 49 Assigning IVR Services to Conferences 0 0 eeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 50 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service eee eeeees 2 52 Connecting to a Conference from an Entry Queue 2 58 Assigning an Entry Queue Service to an Entry Queue 2 59 Viewing the Audio Messages Status 0 0 0 cece eeceeseeseeeeeseeeeeeenees 2 60 Printing IVR DTME Codes 0 e ec eeeeceecesseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeaeeeeesesaeeseeaees 2 62 Default IVR Prompts and Messages cceesesseeseeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 2 64 Fine Tuning the SilenceIT Algorithm 0 ieee eee eeeeeeneceeeeees 2 71 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 22 ec05c Hoc ce odccus crises des sceeee 3 1 Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeee 3 2 Ad Hoc Conferencing with Authentication eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeees 3 3 Entry Queue Level Conference Initiation Validation with an External Database Application oes eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 3 4 Conference Access with External Database Authentication 3 6 Conference Access Validation All Participants Always 3 7 Conference Access Validation Chairperson Only Upon IREQUESE E E E amen anreaaenaay 3 9 Requirements for Ad Hoc Conferencing e ee eeeeeeeeseereteeeeees
91. example the name automatically assigned to an undefined participant such as lt conference name gt _ 000 Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Visual Name The new name assigned to the participant by the operator 81 characters A 55 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 56 Table A 31 Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF CODE FAILURE a Sg Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Wrong Dtmf Code The incorrect DTMF code entered by the participant or or an empty field if the participant did not press any key Right Data The correct DTMF code if known Failure State The type of DTMF failure as follows 2 The participant did not enter the correct conference password 6 The participant did not enter the correct chairperson password 12 The participant did not enter the correct conference Numeric ID Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK a Ss The name of the Recording Link participant Party ID The Recording Link participant s identification number as assigned by the system The type of recording operation as follows 0 Recording started 1 Recording stopped 2 Recording paused 3 Recording resumed 4 Recording ended 5 Recording failed Initiator Not supported Always contains the value 0 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II
92. f1 Min r Media Settings Audio Alg Auto hl Dual Stream Made None z lt lt Basic None H 239 P C Graphics F Aol Cal H 239 P C Hi tes Graphics Pro Motion Auto z IT Entry Tone Rgl People and Content Video Protocol fauto o F End Time Alert Visual Concert FX Video Fi t Fe I Exit Tone Roll H 320 Duo Video eR Auto Frame Rate Auto Z Talk Hold Time 15 sec Quality auto 7 Audio Mix Depth B Sites F Annex F AnnexP 7 Annex Complete the conference definition as for any standard Video Switching conference and click OK Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings DuoVideo A Tandberg DuoVideo capable endpoint accommodates two calls one for the participant conference and the second for a demo presentation on a second monitor The DuoVideo feature therefore requires two simultaneous ISDN H 320 dial in calls to operate two parallel conferences on the MCU These two conferences are independent and unrelated to each other the system does does not indicate otherwise The first conference operates as a standard conference in a Video Switching Transcoding or Continuous Presence mode The second conference is also standard but has distinct attributes it is a Video Switching or a Transcoding conference that operates in a DuoVideo mode Assigning a speaker for the first conference has no influence on who is to be the speaker of the second DuoVideo conference The speaker of the second conference is designated by
93. files 27 Select the appropriate audio file want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 s If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you Table 2 9 Roll Call Voice Messages Roll Call We Description Message Roll Call Record Requests participants to state their name for recording when they connect to the conference Note The recording is automatically terminated after two seconds Roll Call Verify Verification message added to the playback of the Record recorded name The name you have recorded is here the system plays the name Roll Call Confirm Requests the participant to confirm the recorded name Record or to record the name again Note This message is optional and is not played to the participant when the appropriate flag in the system cfg is set to NO Roll Call Enter to A voice message added to the playback of the recorded Conference name stating that the participant has joined the conference here the system plays the recorded name has joined the conference Roll Call Exit A voice message added to the playback of the recorded from Conference name stating that the participant has left the conference here the system plays the recorded name has left the conference 2 40 28 29 MGC Manag
94. for all types click the Save button on the toolbar Moving Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another 8 50 It is possible to move a Reservation template from one Reservation Template file or Reservation database to another You do this by using the Cut and Paste functions The Reservation template is copied from the source Reservation Template file or Reservation database to the target Reservation Template file or database After you complete this procedure the Conference definition is erased from the Source Template file or database and exists only in the target Reservation Template file or Reservation database To move a Reservation Template from one file or database to another 1 Z Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database In the Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the desired Reservation template A list of Reservation templates appears below the Conference List or Reservations Group icon 3 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Right click the Reservation template icon to be moved and then click Cut A dep weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Copy C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The MGC Manager dialog box ope
95. for an Attended conference In the Msg Service Name field select from the drop down list the name of the AV Message Service one of the four Message Services you have previously defined to be assigned to the conference If the Msg Service Name field is left blank the system uses the video slide and audio messages of the default Message Service For details on how to set a Message Service as default see Setting an AV Message Service as the Default Service on page 4 11 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 10 Select the conference participants from the Database or User Template file or define new participants as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties 11 If required set the Meet Me Per Conference parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Defining a Meet Me Conference 12 Click OK to complete the definition The conference is added to the On Going Conference Reservation or Template list 4 17 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Managing Greet and Guide Conferences Participants in Greet and Guide conferences can be in one of four stages Greeting Attended On Hold and Conferencing Attended Greet and Guide conferences are managed and monitored like standard Attended conferences using IVR Ser
96. for both IVR Services and Entry Queue Services they are downloaded to the MGC unit and defined for the IVR Message Service For a description of the conversion process refer to the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools e MGC Manager is shipped with a default IVR Service and a folder that includes all the voice messages that are required for the default IVR Service If you have installed the default IVR Service during the software installation procedure and do not want to define additional IVR Services or languages you can skip this section and the section describing the definition of a new IVR Service e The audio files must be converted into the MGC internal format aca before 2 15 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services To define the IVR Properties 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click Properties ug Product Management Minor ga MCU Configuration We Cards o3 Connections Bam EE New IVR Service New Entry Queue Service Ghrl P Girly H OD gt H th MPI Tih arm T Operators B Gateway Configuration ic Profiles op Recording Links F F The IVR Properties dialog box opens I R Properties xj Supported Languages
97. for which you want to manage the recording process 2 Click the relevant button on the conference toolbar as follows time The buttons that are displayed depend on the current status of the recording Ly Only two recording buttons are displayed in the conference toolbar at any one process Table 9 2 Conference Toolbar Recording Buttons Button Recording Operation Start or resume recording Stop recording Pause recording 9 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process The following are the default DTMF codes used to manage the recording process Table 9 3 DTMF Codes used to Manage the Recording Process Recording Operation DTMF Code Permission 9 13 Chapter 9 Recording Recording and Playback on External Recording Systems Using a Recording Port Participant This section describes recording and playback using the Prairie Systems However a similar process can be used to record conferences on other external recording systems Prairie Systems provide audio recording and playback services for conferencing that you can use with the MGC To connect to the Prairie Systems recording facility and make recordings a special Recording Port participant is added to the conference Conference recording can be initiated by an operator using the Dial out feature in MGC Manager or by a chairperson using DTMF codes The MCU then calls Prairie systems according to th
98. has control over the conference the chairperson can perform the following operations e Disconnect participants e Video Force select the endpoint to be seen by the other participants Only one participant can be selected This participant is displayed in the top left window In addition the chairperson or any conference participant can video force a certain participant in his her video layout Since the list of participants is displayed to the chairperson only this feature is usually linked to the chairperson The request from the Chair is accepted even if the entire conference is forced to see another party e Terminate the conference These operations are performed by the MCU subsequent to an appropriate request from the chairperson The control over the conference is granted to an endpoint by means of tokens An endpoint sends a chair request to the MCU If no other participant in the conference is holding the chair token the MCU assigns the chair token to the endpoint requesting it When another participant holds the chair token the MCU rejects the request The chairperson may release the chair token to let the MCU assign control to another endpoint Once the chair token is free the endpoint may request it again if no other endpoint has requested it The chair control token may be withdrawn by the MCU In that case the chair operations are stopped immediately In a cascading conference when a participant connected to a con
99. in conjunction with the Entry Queue Using a limited set of voice prompts the callers are routed to the appropriate conferences For more details about Entry Queues see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 The Entry Queue Service and the IVR Service must be used in Ad Hoc conferencing This allows callers to initiate an On Going conference without prior scheduling based on conference parameters taken from a Profile assigned to the Entry Queue The system also can verify the participant s right to start such a conference with an external database application MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The IVR service can also be configured to verify the participant s right to join a conference For more details see Chapter 3 IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application on page 3 21 LS Up to 30 IVR Services can be defined for a single MGC unit IVR and Entry Queue Stages Participants attending an VR enabled conference a conference to which an IVR Service is assigned or connecting to an Entry Queue can be in one of the following stages Greeting Participants connect to the Entry Queue or directly to an IVR enabled conference where they hear an audio Welcome message view the slide in video but not in Audio Only conferencing and are guided through their connection process using voice prompts In the Entry Queue participants are routed to the destination conference according to the confere
100. in the database click the Change the Language of SQL Server System Message to check box and select the desired language from the drop down list 6 25 Chapter 6 Using a Database 13 Click Finish A message window appears on the screen ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup 14 Click the Test Data Source button to make sure that the appropriate database was selected The message Test completed successfully appears SQL Server ODBC Data Source Test 15 Click OK to confirm The selected database is added to the System DSN list 16 Click OK to exit the ODBC 6 26 17 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When registering the database in the ODBC from within the MGC Manager application a confirmation message appears Select Yes to refresh the list of the databases available to the operator Select No to refresh the database list manually In that case the database will not be available to the user until the list is refreshed manually If you have selected Yes the system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Since the MGC database is not password protected select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes which are displayed by the system If you are registering the database from the ODBC Control Panel you have to refresh the database list manually in the MGC Manager application by sel
101. is the prefix of the MCU and the master conference name the alias in the example above is 1719MasterConference In the Master conference define a dial in participant as the link from conference Slave The alias that will be used to identify the dial in participant can be the name of the calling slave conference Slave1 In the Master conference define a dial in participant as the link from conference Slave2 The alias that will be used to identify the dial in participant can be the name of the calling slave conference Slave2 In the Master conference define a dial in participant as the link from conference Slave3 The alias that will be used to identify the dial in participant can be the name of the calling slave conference Slave3 1 59 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings gS Monitoring Monitoring of cascading conferences with an H 323 Enhanced Cascading link is done in the same way as with an ISDN link You can link several slave conferences to one master conference as in Star cascading topology For information on Star Cascading using the H 243 Standard see Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Ad Hoc Auto Cascading and Cascading Links 1 60 gy The Auto Cascade feature enables automatic cascading of Ad Hoc conferences over multiple MCUs For details see Defining the Conferencing Components to Implement Ad Hoc Conferencing on page 3 13 The definition of the Cascading Links can be
102. kbps E1 1920 kbps Link participant Properties Click on the desired Line Rate A check mark appears next to the selected Line Rate which appears in bold On the Template menu click Save when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file Alternatively click Save Database from the Database menu when the Reservation or Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar To modify the line rate of a H 323 Participant you need to access the participant s Advanced Properties dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Modifying the Participant Dial In Dial Out Definition gy You can toggle between the Dial In and Dial Out definition of a participant without accessing the Participant Properties dialog box To enable the interactive toggling between the participant s Dial In and Dial Out Connection Type the phone numbers for both Dial In and Dial Out must be defined during the definition of the participant parameters in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box If the Dial In phone numbers are not defined when switching to Dial In the system automatically allocates the appropriate phone numbers from the list of dialed in numbers defined in the Network Service To modify the participant Dial In Dial Out definition 1
103. link right click its icon or name and click Properties e f you defined several links you can select one of them as the default Right click the Recording Link s icon and click Set As Default The name of default link is bolded 9 5 Chapter 9 Recording Defining Recording Functions in an IVR Service In order to record a conference an IVR Service in which the recording messages and DTMF codes are activated must be assigned to the conference If a suitable IVR service is not defined on your MCU you must either create a new IVR Service or modify an existing one This section details the procedures relevant to defining the recording messages and DTMF codes in an IVR service For a complete description of the entire IVR Message Service setup procedure refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 2 To define recording functions for an existing IVR Service 1 Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to which you want to add recording functionality and then click Properties The IVR Message Service dialog box opens 2 Click the General tab and then scroll down the list of messages to the recording messages IVR Message Service x Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson Conference Password General Operator Assistance RollCall SilencelT DTMFcodes Chairperson Help Menu 1 Chairperson Help Menu 2 Participant Help Menu 1 Participant Help Menu 2 Invite Help Menu Voti
104. listing the current Groups to which the user has access rights WebOffice Group Assignment 3 j Conference Participant View MCU Conferences Root WebD fice Rw Rw None Add Assignment Reservation Templates V Read V write Participant Templates Read VV write Delete Assignment View MCU Conferences No X The list displays the groups already assigned to the User with the access rights the user has to each of these groups You may modify the user s access rights to a specific group by clicking the group and then checking the appropriate Read and Write properties To assign additional groups to the user click the Add Assignment button 6 61 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 62 To remove an assigned group select the group you wish to delete and then click the Delete Assignment button If you have selected to Add Assignment the Select a group to Assign to lt user gt dialog box opens Select a group to Assignto User xj Default Hea UserGroups eA Web iffice Reservation Templates Read I Write Participant Templates Read JT Write Cancel View MCU Conferences No pe Click the group to assign to the user If needed click the plus icon to expand the Groups tree until the desired group is shown Define the user ability to view create or modify reservation and Participant templates Click the Read check box to enable the user to view the templat
105. more details regarding linked and embedded participants see Chapter 7 Adding Participants to a Reservation Template on page 7 33 Linked Party Message When enabled the system displays a warning message when closing the Properties dialog box of a linked participant without saving the parameters to the database Conference Show Time in DB Conference Templates When Templates in DB enabled the system displays the Schedule tab in the Properties dialog box of a Reservation template defined in the database This enables the user to add the time that the conference should start This option can later be used to filter conferences that start on a specific day Note that the date and time are not used to automatically start the conference from the database template on the scheduled date Show Past Time As Current Time When enabled the system automatically updates the start date and time of an existing conference template to the current date even if the original start date and time are in the past Note that when filtering conferences according to the start date and time the conference retains the past date and time unless it is updated 6 Click OK to confirm the new set 6 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Managing the Defaults Sets The MGC Manager application is installed with an embedded Defaults set If no Defaults set is defined as the Global Defaults set the embedded Defaults set is active A D
106. names of the files are taken from the conference names Files created using the Retrieve function have the extension cdr Files created using the Retrieve Formatted function have the extension cdf You can exclude conferences by clearing the conference s checkbox Type the path of the destination folder in which you want the CDR files to be archived in the To box or click the Browse button to select the destination folder If you click the Browse button the Browse for Folder dialog box opens Select the directory to retrieve the files E B My Documents My Computer amp B 314 Floppy 4 E a Local Disk C Hl CD Drive D a Documents on accord pw O GS AccessDB on Accord fs Sw Systems Mig Of amp B My Network Places H MCMS Sim Select the destination folder in which you want the CDR files to be archived and then click OK Click OK in the Retrieve dialog box The files are saved in the selected location When the system has finished processing the file a confirmation message is displayed Click OK To refresh the conference list on the File menu select Refresh The conference icon in the conferences list changes from au to EA to indicate that the conference data was saved 10 11 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility Off Line Formatting Unformatted CDR text files that were created using the Retrieve function can be formatted later to create formatted reports
107. number assigned to the participant by the MCU Party Dialed The telephone number used by the MCU for dial out Number Table A 43 Event Fields for Event 4108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 3 ee ee RR rae Encryption Indicates the participant s encryption setting as follows 0 The participant is not encrypted 1 The participant is encrypted 2 Auto The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Table A 44 Event Fields for Events 110 111 OPERATOR ON HOLD PARTY OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY ia ee Operator Name The login name of the operator moving the participant back to the conference or putting the participant on hold Party Name The name of the participant being moved or put on hold Party ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant being moved or put on hold A 67 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 45 Event Fields for Event 113 CONFERENCE REMARKS el Cae Conf Remarks A remark that was entered by the operator in the conference general properties while the conference was ongoing Maximum 300 characters The remark is preceded by the operator name followed by a colon Table A 46 Event Fields for Event 3010 USER_DEFINED_INFORMATION Ca ne User Defined 1 The contents of the User
108. option the conference will be rejected at the end of the definition process when it is saved on the MCU Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services DTMF Enabled Cascading Conferences 2 12 The MCU can send several DTMF codes during cascaded conferences enabling the chairperson to control all the participants in the cascaded conference During a cascaded conference the chairperson can perform the following tasks using DTMF codes e Set the chairperson as the conference s exclusive speaker while muting all the other conference participants e Terminate the conference e Lock or unlock the conference e Secure a conference and release a secured conference e Place the conference on hold If the chairperson uses any other DTMF codes only the participants in the chairperson s local conference will be affected With DTMF enabled cascading MCUs can be networked together in two modes e MCU Cluster e MCU Rollover For more information on these modes see Cascading Conferences on page 1 47 For a detailed description of H 243 Cascading conferences see Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences on page 5 1 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference or to join an existing conference The external database contains a list of participants users with their a
109. or clerical errors Information in this document is subject to change without notice MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table of Contents Advanced Conference Settings 00 eeeeees 1 1 Duyal Stream Modes cscccies sbcsnesicceehsevsdanenseanvodesstaseavcensiniciticriecsneceaeaseites 1 2 H 239 People Content 3 P C Formats s s s 1 2 People and Content VO is cccscteisscocccessesssnvevsnstetcevensnsvessevetentcctenreshas 1 7 DUO VIMEO niesienia aeo eean e iea 1 8 Polycom Visual Concert PC ssssssoseeseseesesessssesessesrsersrssresesessesee 1 10 Polycom Visual Concert FX ssesssessrressnrsirreressirsirsserssirsseserssiess 1 13 Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD 1 16 Viewing the FECC LSD Conference Properties eee 1 20 Using 4CIF Video Resolution oo cece ceeeeeeeseeeeeeseesseeeeseeaeeeeeeees 1 23 ACIE Guidelines unnin iuie e RS 1 23 4CIF Global Setting at the MCU Level ee 1 24 Enabling 4CIF in a Continuous Presence Conference 1 25 Software Continuous Presence Settings eee eeeseeseeeeeeseeseeeeees 1 27 Defining Software CP Conferences ooo eee eeeeeeseeeeeneees 1 28 Monitoring Software CP Conference Participants 0 00 00 1 31 Media Encryption vicseatiseseis vedas chat svessetavicsa cats soxvecdesevescasedesexteseeoven peas 1 32 Enabling Encryption at the MCU Level eee eeeeeeeee 1 33 Enabling Encryption at the Conference Level ee 1 34 Enabling Enc
110. or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template icon to display the list of participants EOD Root Name Phone 1 aggregation Division te H 0 polycom Ei cffice2 Dial out Auto Auto aa Dc S ia main office_at atta Fee 3 Dial out Auto Auto a office 4 Dial in Auto Auto Gs office 5 Dial in Auto Auto BE office 3 te office 4 Ga office 5 WebOffice SB webotfice_at ia weboffice_v1 Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy or press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt The participant details are copied to the clipboard MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To copy the participant under a new name click Copy As ea j EH weboffice_v1 Ga To2_1 Cut Delete Dial Out Line Rates Link participant Properties Ctrl C Ctrl x Del Ctrl A The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Debbie Properties Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dial out H323 z Participant IP Signaling Port 172 22 169 72 fizz0 Alias Name Alias Type H323 ID iS Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 To Ceben Geo 0 i 0 E AEA A 1 T Audio Only E Label None IV Participant linked OK Cancel Apply Change the participant s name or any other par
111. or connect participants to their local MCU The MGC supports Star H 243 and Multi Hierarchy MIH H 243 Cascading 5 1 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Star Cascading H 243 In Star Cascading one conference is connected directly to other conferences that are not connected directly to each other The conferences can run on the same MCU which is usually used when running a very large conference whose number of participants exceeds the maximum number of participants allowed in one conference or on different MCUs Participant link Conference B Master Conference A Slave Conference C Slave Conference D Slave _ amp a Ba E REI Figure 5 1 Star Cascading A participant who dials from one MCU to another establishes the link between the conferences The same participant is defined in the Master conference and the Slave conference In one conference the participant connection type is defined as dial in and the dial in number is the number of the MCU where the participant is defined MCU A In the other conference the participant connection type is defined as dial out and the dial out number is the number of the first MCU A different participant is defined in the Master conference for each cascading link In the example MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II shown above Conference B which is the Master conference has five parti
112. or disconnected or deleted from the conference Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU A 59 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 60 Table A 38 Event Fields for Event 106 OPERATOR SET END TIME New End Time The new conference end time set by the operator in GMT time Operator Name The login name of the operator who changed the conference end time Table A 39 Event Fields for Events 107 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY Pe ae Operator Name The login name of the operator who moved the participant Party Name The name of the participant who was moved Party ID The identification number of the participant who was moved as assigned by the MCU Destination Conf The name of the conference to which the participant was Name moved Destination Conf ID The identification number of the conference to which the participant was moved as assigned by the MCU Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE e o e ooo Operator Name The login name of the operator who moved the participant to the conference Source Conf Name The name of the source conference Source Conf ID The identification number of the source conference as assigned by the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE
113. other conference is set as Slave after the messages are exchanged between the MCUs running both conferences the MCU running the Auto conference is set as Master If both conferences are set to Auto each MCU sends a random number The conference running on the MCU that sends the lowest number is set as the Master conference The terminal numbers as well as any existing names are set accordingly and are sent to all the participants in the collective conference If one conference does not support MIH the following scenarios may occur e The MIH enabled conference becomes the Master conference and the MIH disabled conference becomes the Slave In that case full H 243 cascading capabilities are established e The MIH enabled conference becomes the Slave while the MIH disabled conference becomes the Master In that case a conflict exists between the conferences and only simple cascading is enabled Master MIH disabled Slave MIH enabled All the operations available in Star cascading such as token management and chair operations are available in the Multi Hierarchy cascading 5 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When two branches of MCUs are connected or disconnected all the MCU numbers in these branches are reassigned When the Slave MCU gets a new MCU number the renumbering process ends During the renumbering process all the tokens are released and all the messages to the Master are deleted Monitoring Participan
114. participant under a different name A dep weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The participant is added to the target Reservation template The participant icon appears in the Reservation template s participants list An asterisk appears in the title bar in the Reservation Template file window or the Reservations in Database window to indicate that changes have been made Click Save from the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database from the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title of the window containing the Reservation template MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Copying a Participant from a Reservation Template to an On Going Conference You can add participants to an On Going conference by copying their properties from a Reservation template To copy a participant from a Reservation Template 1 2 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database In the Reservation Template file double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates I
115. protocol People Content is the Polycom proprietary protocol while H 239 is the industry standard When an endpoint can support both H 239 and People Content protocols H 239 is selected as the preferred communications protocol This feature provides the endpoint with the ability to send two alternating video streams people and content The People stream is based on the principle that in the conference I see you and you see me while the Content stream implies we both see the same content that is we use the same data stream Three selections are possible e Graphics e Hi res Graphics e Live Video For more information see Table 1 1 Content bitrate according to Content Resolution and Conference Line Rate on page 1 3 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The minimum line rate required for an H 239 People Content conference is 128 Kbps In an On Going Conference when the Content channel opens the required bit rate is taken from the video channel bit rate and may affect the quality of the transmitted video The bit rate allocated to the Content channel depends on the conference type and the conference line rate where the minimum is 64 Kbps and it increases in multiples of 64 Kbps Bit rate allocation is dynamic and when the Content channel closes the video bit rate is restored to its maximum Table 1 1 Content bitrate according to Content Resolution and Conference Line Rate COC Content Hi Res 64 0 64 128 192
116. relevant to dial in participants The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel A 41 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 42 Table A 19 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 1 ee Net Interface Type The type of network interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 1 ATM 2 H 323 3 MPI 4 T1 CAS 5 SIP H 243 Password The H 243 password or an empty field if there is no password Chair Not supported Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol used by the participant as follows 1 H 261 only 2 H 263 3 H 264 4 H 264 255 Auto Audio Volume The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB Undefined Type The participant type as follows 0 Defined participant The value in the formatted text file is default 2 Undefined participant The value in the formatted text file is Unreserved participant Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 19 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTI
117. select the database when the Participant Template file is active click the From Database button 8 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens x Database Name AccordDB p Fiter Name I Label None M Group V gt a If more than one database is configured in your system select the appropriate database from the Database Name list b If required filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and or Label check boxes and then entering the appropriate character string in the Name field and or selecting the appropriate label from the drop down list c The Template Group option is enabled by default displaying the highest Template group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged in user has access rights You can select another group from the Template Groups hierarchy from the drop down list Only Template Groups to which you have access rights are listed in the Group drop down list d Click OK A list of all the participants in the filtered category is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list and the name of the participant s group is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File field To add a participant from a different Participant Template file or to select the Participant Template file when the database is active click the Browse button The Open dialog box appears Use the standard Windows techniques to select the desired Parti
118. separated by commas This data can be transferred to an external program such as Microsoft Excel for billing purposes The following is a sample of an unformatted CDR file ro Product Management_c158 cdr Notepad o File Edit Format Help 1 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Q 0 1 28 255 3 255 355 255 o 0 2001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 7 5 150 3 0 255 1 1 61 1 504 1234 0 0 None 3 1 5 7 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 1 2352 312327900 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 weekly 01 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2557 0123 1234 Polycom Sales Targets 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Debbie 0 5 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2 0 355 5 0 1 4294967295 5887156742 1720 8 3 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 0 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Duke Knoop 1 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 2887157031 1720 8B 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 1 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Lynne 2 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2 9 255 5 0 1 4294967295 2887156919 1720 8 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Nadine 3 05 2 95 2 09S255 299 05 295 4 0 0 1 35 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2 9 255 5 0 1 4294967295 2887156848 1720 8 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 0 15 02 02 2004 09 43 16 0 Duke Knoop 1 0 0 128000 TA 172 22 138 155 TA 172 16 02 02 2004 09 43 17 0
119. system checks if a conference with this ID is running If an ongoing conference with that ID does not exist the MCU will create a new conference whose ID conference password and chairperson password are taken from the request Subscribe sent by the Office Communicator user as configured in the OC without input from the user The Entry Queue is designated as Ad Hoc for Microsoft Office Communicator SIP CX users by its assigned Profile and the conference parameters are taken from that Profile This done by manually adding in the system cfg in the SIP section the flag AD_HOC_PROFILE_ MSFT with the Profile name For example if the flag is set to AD_HOC_PROFILE_ MSFT OCMR the Entry Queue to which the Profile named OCMR is assigned will be designated as Ad Hoc for Microsoft Office Communicator SIP CX users and the conference parameters will be taken from this Profile The Profile line rate and video parameters must match the SIP endpoint capabilities as configured in Office Communicator As the system cfg flags must be written in capital letters the Profile name must also be defined using capital letters the MCU is case sensitive and it is not recommended to use spaces MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II SIP Factories The SIP Factory is a conferencing entity that enables SIP endpoints to create an arbitrary number of ad hoc conferences and automatically connect to the new conferences When a SIP endpoint calls the SIP Factor
120. the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 8 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Adding a Participant from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation Template An additional method of adding participants to a Reservation template is by copying the participant information from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to the Reservation template 1 In the MGC Manager Main window in the Browser area expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations tree to list the On Going Conferences or Reservations Double click the On Going Conference icon or the Reservation icon or click the plus icon next the respective icon to list its assigned participants Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy Participant 2 mm Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participan gt Cul 5 Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management d Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The Participant Properties are copied to the clipboard Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database and expand the Reservation templates to locate the template to which you wish to copy the participant 8 39 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 40 Right click the icon of the target Reservation template icon and then click Paste or Paste As to copy the
121. the Audio Only check box Click the Advanced tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Advanced dialog box opens Properties 9 Inthe Recording field select Dial up 10 Click OK to complete the participant definition The Recording Port participant is added to the list of participants for the conference with an icon indicating that it is a recording port 9 17 Chapter 9 Recording Recording Using Prairie Systems 3 To record a conference e When the conference starts activate the recording function by pressing the DTMF code representing blast dial out and the participant recording port ID at any time during the conference For example 259 where 25 is the DTMF code for dial out and 9 represents the first digit assigned to the participant in the Name field in the Properties Identification dialog box When recording is initiated the MCU calls Prairie Systems using the parameters defined for the recording port participant thus enabling the service When Prairie Systems begins recording the conference it first plays a voice message announcing that the conference is being recorded To stop recording e To stop recording use one of the following methods enter the DTMF code 25 terminate the conference from the conference disconnect the recording port When recording is terminated the chairperson can re activate a Prairie recording session usin
122. the System cfg oo ceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeetseeeseeeneeseeeeeeeees 9 8 Recording a Conference 0 cece ceeeseesecseeseesecseseeeesesesseeesesaeeeseaes 9 10 Enabling Recording for a Conference 0 eects eects 9 10 Managing the Recording Process oo eee cesses eeeeeeeseeeeeseees 9 11 Using the MGC Manager to Manage the Recording IPTOCESS onroro ao otia o E T OAT 9 12 Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process 9 13 Recording and Playback on External Recording Systems Using a Recording Port Participant ssisesisississoieisiiosieioiessarsiussgisisiass 9 14 Defining a Recording Port Participant 0 eee eee eee eeees 9 15 Recording Using Prairie Systems 0 0 eceeeeeceeseeeeeeeeees 9 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Playback Using Prairie Systems ieeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 9 18 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 0 00000s 10 1 Phe CDR FNE iienaa eea kE 10 2 CIDR File Formals ssiccaviesvcsscevesvatevsciveresceveccvarvesiveaveatensveneeveeaacedecs 10 2 CDR File Contents sonsreinoesi irinn n Er 10 3 Viewing Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information 10 5 Viewing the Conference Records 0 e cece eeeeeeseeseeeeeseeseeeeees 10 5 The CDR List Window eeeeseeceesesseeeneeneeeeeeseeeeeeseeeneeeeeeees 10 8 Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records 10 9 Off Line Formatting 0 0 secessscssssesseessssessecsessseneesecesensesees 10 12 Appendix A CDR Fields Unf
123. the converted files to the MCU for storage in the memory of the appropriate card For details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Greet and Guide Settings Workflow Greet and Guide conferences can be set only if the following procedures are completed beforehand During installation the Message extension and the Music card optional are installed in the MCU and the Audio card is configured accordingly For more details see the MGC Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 4 The welcome audio messages are recorded For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 The welcome video slide is created For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 The Audio message and the Video slide are converted into the MGC format For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 A new AV Message Service is defined For more details see Defining a New AV Message Service on page 4 6 The audio messages video slide and AV Message Services may be prepared in advance for different types of conferences and used repeatedly over time or they may be created when needed 4 5 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Defining a New AV Message Service 4 6 An AV Message Service contains the video slide audio messages set and if available music input from an external device A special AV Message Service can be set for different Attended conferenc
124. the icon of the desired Reservation template and then click New Participant E ResTemplatesFile2 tlt Oo x Conferences List aos 48 Audio Conference a ay a Operator Conference SEmi video Conference Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Copy Paste Paste As Delete Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Define the Participant Properties as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Complete the participant definition and click OK The participant is added to the Reservation template List the participants in the Reservation template to view the new participant On the Template menu click Save or click the Save button on the toolbar The participant is added to the Reservation template The participant s name appears in the Reservation template s list of participants The MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Reservations Template file window You can also define a new participant from the Reservations Properties Participants dialog box Adding a Participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database You can add a participant defined in a Participant Template file or Participant database to a Reservation template There are several methods of doing this To add a participant fro
125. the operator and forced This speaker is the presenter of the lecture presentation To define a Duo Video Presentation in a Video Switching conference Duo Video is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box Properties Product Management xj General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording r General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 384 kbps X Msg Service Type None kd In Out Msg Service Name eU T Encryption F Silence IT F YTX 1000 lt lt Basic Chair Control Nore sd Cascade Nowe Master Name None 7 E Eh T120 Rate Noe T Auto Termination FECCASD Rate None Before First Join E Min AfterLast Quit M H Min m Media Settings DE _ _ gt Audio Alg Auto hd Dual Stream Mode None hd None I Roll Cal H 239 P C Hi tes Graphics Pro Motion H 239 P C Live Video J Entry Tone Rol People and Content VO Video Protocol A Visual Concert PC I End Time Alert 1 yon I Erit Tone Kal H 220 Duo Video aona Frame Rate Talk Hold Time 15 Sec Quality Audio Mix Depth B H Stes Armen Fe Annexe I Annex MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Dual Stream Mode list select H 320 Duo Video if the conference is run in an ISDN environment H 323 Duo Video if the conference is run in an IP Only environment The annexes are auto
126. the user will be able to run conferences on all the MCU s defined in the MGC Web Server Select MCUs Click this button to designate the MCUs on which the user can run conferences Creation amp Click this button to expand this dialog box to reveal Authentication additional fields for creating and authenticating conferences and participants Note These additional fields are used when WebCommander is used as the external database application for conference initiation and conference access authentication 6 55 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 56 To select the MCUs for a user in the User Properties window select the Custom MCU check box and then click the Select MCUs button The MCUs Per User dialog box opens MCU s Per User x Selected MCUs MCUs in Selected In Order The MCUs list shows all currently defined MCUs that were not assigned to the user The Selected MCUs list shows the MCUs currently assigned to the user To assign MCUs to the user in the MCUs list click the MCU name s and then click the Add gt gt button Multi selection is available using standard Windows conventions The selected MCUs appear in the Selected MCUs list To cancel the assignment of MCUs to the user in the Selected MCUs list click the MCU name s and then click the Remove lt lt button Multi selection is available using standard Windows conventions The unassigned MCUs appear in the MCUs list Click OK to return to the
127. through the various stages of the Greet and Guide conference e Monitor and assist all the participants currently waiting in the Participants Queue regardless of their conference association Greet and Guide conferences run on a standard audio card If your MCU includes an Audio card you can use the IVR Service to perform the same functions MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Operator Conferences Lg An Operator conference is a video conference that allows the operator and one participant to talk without disturbing the On Going Conference The participant taking part in an Operator conference is moved from the Participants Queue or the On Going Conference to the Operator conference Operator conferences may be used for Greet and Guide conferences and IVR enabled conferences For more information about IVR enabled conferences see Chapter 2 For more information about Operator conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 8 Greet and Guide Stages Participants in a Greet and Guide conference can have one of the following statuses e Greeting the participant connects to the MCU enters the Welcome queue and receives a video slide and an audio message e Attended the participant is in a video conference with the operator e On Hold the participant is moved to the Participants Queue where the video slide is shown and a special audio message is played Usually this is the status of participa
128. to the user name that appears in the Owner field If no Owner is defined they are automatically assigned to the Root group Therefore only users who have access rights to the Root group usually administrators are able to view these conferences The templates can be moved to the appropriate group in the Groups tree in the MGC Manager Database Manager module using Copy and Paste drag amp drop is unavailable 6 65 Chapter 6 Using a Database 4 Right click the icon of the groups to which you want to add a sub group and then click Add New Group to DB eae per ault Set Users Rights Copy Delete Properties The Group Properties dialog box opens xi Name Poycom Cancel 5 Enter the group name and click OK The new group is added to the Groups tree Setting the Access Rights to a Group To view group Access Rights 1 Inthe Browser area right click the icon of the group whose access rights you want to view and then click Set Users Rights on the pop up menu Add New Group to dB Copy Delete Properties 6 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Set Users Rights dialog box opens x Set the user Access rights on the group User Conference Participant WwW Ri af R View MCU Conferences admin RW Without password oper None POLYCOM None user None user2 None WebOffice None None None None None None None None None None
129. 0 lt lt Basic T120 Rate None ba FECC LSD Rate None pa Chair Control 3 None Cascaes Master Name I Conference Lock T Mute Meet Me partie E ait T Auto Termination Before First Join 5 Min AfterLastQut M E Min Media Settings Audio Alg Auto x Dual Stream Mode None z lt lt Basic I Rall Cal Pro Motion Auto z F Enty Tone Roll Call announcement PAAA C 1 F EndTimeAletTone 5 Min I Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Rs a Frame Rate Auto Talk Hold Time 15 4 Sec Quality Auto Audio Mix Depth ABB eee Aesth ana Cancel Apply Help None is selected to disable the Chair Control option Auto enables the Chair Control option To enable the Chair Control select Auto from the drop down list When the Chair Control option is enabled any participant with an H 243 compliant terminal can request the control token during the conference The following operations cannot be performed during an On Going Conference e The chairperson cannot connect a new participant e The chairperson cannot reconnect a disconnected participant e Lecture Mode cannot be accessed in Continuous Presence mode 5 25 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Withdrawing the Chair Token during a Conference 5 26 During an On Going Conference in which the Chair Control option is enabled the Conference Properties On Go
130. 192 256 384 384 512 Mode Graphics Live Video 64 0 128 192 256 256 384 512 512 768 64 128 192 Two numbers indicate the bitrate available for Content stream without FECC first number and with FECC second number H 239 People Content is available in cascaded conferences only in a Star Cascading topology with Video Switching conferences For more information about Star Cascading see Chapter 5 Star Cascading H 243 on page 5 2 H 239 and People Content are supported with the following features e Highest Common e Entry Queues e H 264 e 4CIF e Encryption e FECC H 320 and H 323 H 239 People Content is not supported in e Software CP and Quad View conferences e H 320 Cascading conferences 1 3 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 4 MIH Cascading conferences Simple Cascading conferences T 120 conferences Double Gateway sessions H 239 is not supported in Gateway calls in version 6 x and earlier However you can set up a point to point call with H 239 in these versions by setting up a meeting room with H 239 enabled and both the minimum and maximum number of participants set to 2 To enable the H 239 standard at the MCU level The H 239 standard is enabled disabled in the system cfg file in the PEOPLE PLUS CONTENT section By default the H 239 flag is set to YES Set the H 239 flag to NO to disable H 239 When disabled the MCU supports only the People Content o
131. 3 POLYCOM gt MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Version 9 0 4 August 2010 DOC2234A Trademark Information Polycom the Polycom Triangles logo and the names and marks associated with Polycom s products are trademarks and or service marks of Polycom Inc and are registered and or common law marks in the United States and various other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Patent Information The accompanying product is protected by one or more U S and foreign patents and or pending patent applications held by Polycom Inc 2010 Polycom Inc All rights reserved Polycom Inc 4750 Willow Road Pleasanton CA 94588 2708 USA No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Polycom Inc Under the law reproducing includes translating into another language or format As between the parties Polycom Inc retains title to and ownership of all proprietary rights with respect to the software contained within its products The software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provision Therefore you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material e g a book or sound recording Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Polycom Inc is not responsible for printing
132. 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Domi o oo oo E ach th RNT T Audio Only T vip IV Save Participant Cancel Help Define the participants in the Cascading conference just as in any standard conference For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Define the participant who is used as a link between the two conferences Master and Slave and select Dial out in the Connection Type field Enter the number of the MCU running the Master conference in the Participant Phone Number field Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters 5 11 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences The conference Properties Settings dialog box opens i Default Conference Properties Product Management None O F Roll Call 9 Select Slave from the drop down menu in the Cascade field 10 Select the name of the participant who acts as the link to the master conference from the Master Name drop down list 11 Complete the conference definition 5 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining other Conferences Participating in the Cascade Conference There can be a number of Slave conferences Only the first conference is defined as the Master conference The other conferences are usually defined as Slave conferences In each Slave conference define one participant to be used
133. 3 11 Defining the Conferencing Components to Implement Ad Hoc Conferencing sas ieseiscsaxectatine cans cavereioraleasetesddanceuenravecsennetsccassanavascanseaieds 3 13 MCU Configuration to Access the External Database A PPHCAti OMe nesinnes aea aa R EEE 3 13 Entry Queue Service with Access to the External Database 3 16 IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application 3 21 PHOTUES sscccccesnuctsvasstessaccats ceescecssscavteausivvevsessevesveoatediestereadtoeus cvents 3 23 Defining Profiles ise assesteas cass sseqseasecssastecuesiuaseosbossasteateuna tbeees 3 23 Listing Profiles ssssisis civics cis tctetsseeacabnn ciotapensie svosasetnravaedbesoeds 3 25 Using Profiles sospiros ieina aniisi 3 26 Additional Participant Definitions for Ad Hoc Conferencing sa c6siscid ccsnceiecucontesahscesecoveceecods sasscaetede EEEIEE 3 26 Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue oo eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 3 27 Table of Contents Simplified Ad Hoc Conferencing with Video Invite 0 3 35 Ad Hoc Entry Queue for Microsoft Office Communicator SEP ACX osies ses vicastins cesenngaronseseecnn cus bls i a cuss cavencon eee 3 36 SIP FACtOries vs cets ecsectscdssaesscdsncveevsccdsstevacduatsacvuacdsatsatacdsasviacvassacvndss 3 37 Creating SIP Factories wo eeseeseceseeseceeceecsesseseeeeesseeseeeaes 3 37 Connecting to the SIP Factory wo eeesesseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaes 3 38 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences 4 1 Greet and Guide
134. 3 31 15 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator fe debbie Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed 2G test2 Feb 01 2004 03 10 25 00 00 57 Feb 01 2004 03 10 25 00 01 00 2 Terminated when end time passed P Polycom Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 00 13 26 Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator off 4 gt Connected to Prod Mgmt Num og 10 7 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility To disconnect from the MCU 1 Click the Disconnect icon 2 The MCU is disconnected and the CDR List window returns to a blank screen The CDR List Window 10 8 The Conferences list summarizes the information of each conference stored in the MCU s memory in a table format The following field are displayed Table 10 1 Conference Record Fields Co The name of the conference and an icon indicating whether or not the CDR record has been retrieved and archived to a file The following icons are used gE The CDR record has not been archived d The CDR record has been archived Start Time The actual time that the conference started Duration The actual conference duration Reserved The time the conference was scheduled to start Start Time Discrepancy between the scheduled and the actual start time may indicate that a communication problem occurred at the beginning of the conference Reserved The time the conference was scheduled to last Duration Discrepancy
135. 6 kbps 255 Opened dynamically The T120 bit rate as follows 0 None T120 was not used in the conference 2 H MLP 62 4 k 3 H MLP 64 k 4 H MLP 128 k 5 H MLP 192 k 6 H MLP 256 k 7 H MLP 320 k 8 H MLP 384 k 12 H MLP 14 4 k 13 var H MLP A 21 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START Continued His Co T120 Rate cont 17 MLP 4 k 18 MLP 6 4 k 19 variable MLP 20 MLP 14 4 k 21 MLP 22 4 k 22 MLP 30 4 k 23 MLP 38 4 k 24 MLP 46 4 k 25 MLP 16 k 26 MLP 24 k 27 MLP 32 k 28 MLP 40 k 29 MLP 62 4 k 30 MLP 64 k Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 ee ined Audio Tones The audio tones that were used in the conference as follows Bit 0 on Entry tone Bit 1 on Exit tone Bit 2 on End time alert tone Alert Tone Note This field is only relevant if the end time alert tone is enabled Indicates when the end time alert tone is to be played A value of x indicates that the alert tone is to be played x minutes before the conference end time A 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 a eal Talk Hold Time Audio Mix Depth Operator Conf Video Protocol Meet Me Per Conf Number of Network Services The minimum time that a speaker has to speak to become the video source The value i
136. 971111 Geb Dial out a a Dial out qi a BES Dial out ico Figure 1 6 Monitoring Cascading Conferences with an ISDN Link MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Simple Cascading with an H 323 Link You can use an H 323 participant definition as the link between two conferences In conference A you define one participant as a link from conference B This participant is defined as a dial in H 323 participant with the IP address of the IP card in MCU B from which the call originated The IP address of the IP card is defined in the IP Network Service as was set up in MCU B In conference B you define one participant as a link to conference A This participant is defined as a dial out H 323 participant with the IP address of the IP card in MCU A m Dial out FET ai 172 22 140 201 y lt AAN MCU A MCU B IP Card 172 22 140 201 IP Card 172 22 140 174 Conference A Conference B Participant Link In Participant Link Out Connection Type Dial in Connection Type Dial out IP Address 172 22 140 174 IP Address 172 22 140 201 IP Address of the card making the call IP Address of the card receiving from MCU B conference B the call on MCU A conference A Figure 1 7 Simple Cascading using an H 323 Link 1 53 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 54 To define the H 323 Link The Participant s Properties Identification dialog boxes show how to define the participants used as links in each of the
137. 9Rec EXT p2234p9876543p Each section of the string is explained below 0 9 Optional digit field Any digit between 0 and 9 that identifies the participant during a dial out sequence This digit is used as part of the DTMF code For example when a chairperson enters 259 where 25 is the DTMF code for blast dial out and 9 is the number that identifies the recording port participant This digit must be unique and no other participant can have an identical number Free text Optional text field may be omitted Brackets Brackets indicating a dial string Extension text prefix Ext ext or EXT Code indicating that a string consisting of a series of digits is to be used during dial up and connection to the Prairie system p Induces a pause of 1 second before transmitting the next digit or DTMF code There is no limit to the number of p s in a dial up string and they can be located anywhere in the dial up string Account prefix Account prefix consisting of a series of digits that are provided by Prairie Conference account ID Unique account ID for each conference The conference account ID can consist of one of these options a series of numbers n indicating the Numeric conference ID l indicating the conference Chairperson password b indicating the conference billing code Pound keys a suffix added to the string required by the Prairie system signaling end of transmission Select
138. AT and press lt Enter gt The message Started gathering signal statistics appears indicating that the data gathering process has started 7 Wait 15 seconds for the data gathering process to complete 2 71 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 72 8 In the command line enter AM lt slot gt lt unit gt GETCSTRMSTAT and press lt Enter gt ag Donkey COM Product Manager o x K File Options Window Help la x st lin Sending Level g lt 6 gt Remote Command Level g lt 6 gt Sending gt AM lt 6 gt lt 3 gt CALCSTRMSTAT Remote Command AM lt 6 gt lt 3 gt CALCSTRMSTAT 19 63 67 12 05 32 116 N 6660448786 T G600006b L 26 64963628 CHdlcEve CHdlcEvent Trace Msg len 27 i RESOURCE TYPE BOARD ID UNIT ID CONNECTION ID CARD_AUDIO_PLUS_15_UIDEO_TYP_4 6 a opcode ASCII_MSG_IND ascii_msg not farmiliar v gt DisConnect CAPs INS NUM 4 cmd gt X HZ MCMS 172 22 188 40 PortOut 5003 TCP a The signal statistics are retrieved and are displayed in the Donkey COM window Look for these parameters in the following format Average Energy lt Energy gt Total VADS lt Total Vads gt Consecutive VADS lt Consecutive Vads gt If many messages are displayed wait two minutes and repeat step 8 Record the Energy Total Vads and Consecutive Vads values and locate these values in Table 2 16 on page 2 72 accor
139. Authentication Participant Authentication PIN Code Participant Information Enter a personal code to be assigned to this user This PIN code is used to find the participant in the WebCommander database Users table in Ad Hoc conferencing when the IVR Service is configured to access the external database for conference entry password or chairperson password authentication Enter general information about the participant The information in this field replaces the information defined in the User Defined 1 field of the Participant properties when connecting to the conference Select whether this user will be set as VIP when connecting to the conference This field overwrites the VIP definition of the Participant properties for this user when connecting to the conference 6 59 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 60 8 Click OK to confirm and add the User to the database Viewing the Users List 1 Inthe Browser area click the User icon The Users list is displayed in the Status area amp DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 6 loj x File Edit View Options Help 5 AccordDB B A Defaults Administrator ACCORD U User Defined Defaults Administrator admini LE Conference Defaults Operator oper 14 Participant Defaults Administrator POLYCOM MGC Manager Defaults Moderator useri Labels Moderator QA user2 D Permissions i Administrator WebOffice gt Groups Data Base Name AccordDB Sys DSN C Progr 4
140. C Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Commands Shortcut Keys Converting Participant Templates into the Participant Database Participant templates can be converted into the Participant database by using either of two methods Copying the Participant from the Participant Template file window to the Participants in Database window Dragging and dropping the Participant Template icon from the Participant Template file window to the Participants in Database window To copy a participant from the Participant Template file to the Participants in Database window 1 Open the Participant Template file from which you want to copy the Participant template Log in to the database and open the Participants in Database window In the Participant Template file window right click the icon of the participant to copy and click Copy 8 21 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 4 Participant Template File1 usr lol x Name Participant Numb Network Connecti Channel Aggrega _ P Manic Dial in Gar New Participant FB Dial in far Copy As Dial in Gs I Ctre Dial in Cut Cri x Paste Cry Delete Del Dial Out cra Line Rates Properties In the Participants in Database window right click the Group to which you want to copy the participant and then click Paste lolx Root Name Channels Aggregati Default p H UserGroups WebOFfice
141. C Database Manager module or directly in the Reservations or Participants in Database windows The User Tables form the core of the MGC Manager application MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Database Configuration You are required to configure your network prior to proceeding with the Database configuration Reservation and Participant parameters may be stored in template files or in databases The template files are the MGC Manager proprietary tool to organize data Therefore data cannot be easily transferred from external databases to the template files Using Microsoft Access or SQL databases to organize data allows the data to be easily used and shared by external applications As with templates the Reservation and Participant database may be installed on the LAN server or on the local computer running the MGC Manager Internet users Access the MGC WebCom mander site via Internet Browser MGC Manager Application i M MGC Manager l gt Application Hosts the MGC Web Server MGC Web Server Manager application MGC WebCommander site MGC Manager Application Internet Server and LAN Database Server optional Figure 6 2 Data Flow Figure 6 2 describes the system structure for public databases that are used by all the users In this configuration several operator workstations running the MGC Manager application are connected to one or more MGC units The public databases are installed on
142. CU Rollover used for MCUs installed at the same location MCU Cluster In MCU Cluster mode the MCUs are installed at different locations states countries each MCU running its own conference When all of these conferences are cascaded between them they create one large conference that runs over a network of MCUs This configuration is used to save long distance charges by connecting each participant to their local MCU while only the links between the distributed conferences are billed as long distance calls 1 47 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 48 To enable unattended cascaded conferences to run the following setup items are required on each MCU e Select one MCU to be the main MCU to which the conferences in all other MCUs will connect e Define an Entry Queue Access enabled Meeting Room on each MCU The Entry Queue Access is used for live participants e Assign a dial in number for direct dial in to the Meeting Room on the main MCU This number will be used by the links to dial into the Meeting Room and connect to it e Set up a link for each Meeting Room on the MCUs other than the designated main MCU to the Meeting Room defined on the main MCU a dial out participant The dial out number defined for each of these participants is the dial in number assigned to the Meeting Room e Define the dial in participants for the Meeting Room on the main MCU one for each Meeting Room link Local Meeting Room
143. Cause Category Error in dialing additional channels in Error in dialing additional channels additional channels Bonding failure Bonding failure Full bitrate connection failure Bad H243 Connection Cap exchange failure in establishing call Bad H243 Connection Cap exchange failure in change mode Bad H243 Connection Unspecified Bad H243 Connection Not received end of initial communication Bad H243 Connection 141 Called party not registered party not Called party not registered Gatekeeper Failure Failure GOO e 1s rezscaroose ARC nso acer Falur iss rezscaroose broumo acer Falur st Halos At Gewese Galo Falur st recalls Benoem kso ae enaena re ies Heacal ols Beroe Kso at Heals Rene essabe HEESFatwe ies Heals Unoom aon Kesre a6 Heals CsedbyNOMS HEED Fate ae Hecate Satta rosae 86 Heals Gatosr ie Gace Falu ao Hezs alsoo Gakoen ARO HES Fave A 71 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 47 Disconnection Cause Values Continued H323 call close Remote has not sent H323 Failure capability H323 call close Audio channels not open H323 Failure H323 call close Need to wait T120 board H323 Failure H323 call close Bad remote cap H323 Failure H323 call close Capabilities not accepted by H323 Failure remote H323 failure H323 Failure H323 call close Remote stop responding H323 Failure H323 call close No matching switch keys alg H323 Failure H323 call cl
144. Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 5 18 An Example of Defining a Multi Hierarchy Cascading Conference Dial up T Dial up BARE FH a iff Ain 7087996 piji l 7087998 fl pi Wai Pitt ao gui ae tee y ee 7 MCU C MCU A Master Conference ConferenceA Dial up Participant Dial in Link 7087999 Connection Type Dial in Link In Dial in Number 7087996 Link In 2 Dial in Number 70879998 apa f ii Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Master i TY ili aa MCU D MCU B Slave Conference ConferenceB Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087996 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name Link Out MCU C Master Slave Conference ConferenceC Participant Dial in Link Connection Type Dial in Link In from conf D Dial in Number 7087999 Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087998 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name Link Out 2 Figure 5 4 MIH Cascading Flow MCU D Slave Conference ConferenceD Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087999 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name Link Out to Conf C MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Shown below is the Multi Hierarchy Cascading Conference as viewed in the MGC Manager Main window BARTTCIANT ocuere riuren PAN FiA ka Ez elu laielole Zine
145. DB lol x E A Root Name Phone 1P Channels aggregation _ D office Reservation t R ay Henry P Benny Dial in Auto Auto Ba J 8 ae New Participant Ake Ako Q Gy Melissa Gig Mels _ COPY AS Auto Auto Ba polycom Debo ea polyc Copy Ctrl C 2 Yes Q a Cut Ctrl x b Sarah ae Sarat paste Ctrl y Auto Auto fa Tanya f Tany Delete Del Auto Auto D Polycom Dial Out Ctrl a Line Rates gt E Weboffice weboffice_v2 The Participant Properties dialog box opens Change the settings in the Participant Properties dialog box as required For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Click OK to complete the participant definition and exit the Participant Properties dialog box An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window to indicate that changes have been made Click Save on the Template menu when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window This confirms that the modifications have been saved MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II
146. Defining a Recording Port Participant on page 9 15 for the parameter descriptions Table 9 1 Recording Link Properties Enter a name for the Recording Link Interface Type Select the type of connection between the recording system and the conferencing unit e ISDN only applicable to the Readi Recorder e T1 CAS only applicable to the ReadiRecorder e H 323 9 3 Chapter 9 Recording Table 9 1 Recording Link Properties Continued User Identifier For the RSS 2000 String sent to Enter 2 the Recording System For the ReadiRecorder A string sent from the MCU to the ReadiRecorder to identify the recording This number is checked against the numbers registered in the ReadiRecorder database Only registered identifier strings are allowed to initiate recordings This string will be used as the user identification number in the ReadiRecorder Web site Enter one of the following A string of digits in this case all the recordings using this link will be assigned this number n the recording will be assigned the conference Numeric ID c the recording will be assigned the chairperson password of the conference e The recording will be assigned the conference password b the recording will be assigned the conference billing code Note The string must be followed by a Pound key to signal the end of transmission ISDN T1CAS Enter the phone number to be dialled to connect to the Phone Numbers ReadiRecord
147. Detect e During the definition of the participant parameters in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box select the Auto Detect option Duke ISDN Properties E Identification Advanced Aggregation Number of Channels Auto 7 Auto Video Protocol Auto Recording None hd I Restrict Only M AGC I Enhanced Video For Standard Video Cards only Not required for Video Service Name z Sub Service Name Node Type Num type Terminal ad Taken from service bd IV Save Participant 0K E Apply When the Auto Detect option is selected the Number of Channels Video Protocol and Aggregation fields are disabled as these parameters are derived from the endpoint s capabilities at connection time and according to the conference settings The line rate that is defined for a conference is also the maximum line rate in which the participant can connect to that conference Dial in Auto Detect When the participant dials in to the MCU each channel is detected by the MCU and the system tries to connect the participant using the Bonding protocol If the connection that uses Bonding is successful the negotiation with the endpoint communicates the number of additional channels to be connected The participant s connection continues using the Bonding connection procedure If the Bonding connection fails the MCU tries to connect the endpoint using the H 221 standard
148. ECC LSD channel is closed 1 21 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Table 1 3 FECC LSD Options for an On Going Conference Continued FECC LSD Rate The current data transmission rate e Off Indicates that the LSD FECC channel is closed 6 4 Indicates that the LSD FECC channel is open and the rate is 6 4 Kbps 4 8 Indicates the rate of the LSD FECC channel that is open in an encrypted conference Note When the LSD FECC option is set to Dynamic the FECC LSD Rate field displays Off or the rate Withdraw FECC Click this button to withdraw the LSD token from LSD Token the current holder and return it to the MCU 3 Click the Withdraw FECC LSD Token button to withdraw the FECC LSD token from the current endpoint holder and release it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints 4 Click OK 1 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Using 4CIF Video Resolution High Quality 4CIF video resolution is available in Continuous Presence conferences running at 512 Kbps or higher line rates In this mode the endpoints transmit CIF or QCIF and receive 4CIF images from the MCU In full screen layout 1x1 endpoints that can send 4CIF images will send 4CIF to the MCU when they are the speakers In Continuous Presence conferences you can select the quality of the display depending on the video transmission Sharpness Optimized for details The video picture does not change frequently but it includes
149. GC Database Manager applications and perform various tasks Only users with the permission to configure the database may define or modify Permissions Users enables the definition of the MGC WebCommander and the MGC Web Database Manager users Users are assigned the appropriate permissions that define their access rights to the system functions In addition it enables you to assign access rights to the various groups defined in the Groups table Only users with the permission to configure the database can manage the Users table Groups enables the definition of groups to which users are assigned The Conference templates and Participant templates are also assigned to a group and can be viewed modified deleted or used to start a conference only by users who have access rights to that group The Groups enhance the system security giving users access only to data that they are allowed to view The Database Manager Toolbar The following buttons appear in the Database Manager toolbar fe eet Copies the selected record from a Database Copy Manager table to the clipboard B Pastes an entry from the clipboard to the selected Paste table 6 35 Chapter 6 Using a Database a 6 36 Small Icons Details Up one level a Refresh Database List 5l Refresh Database Lists each of the table entries using a small icon and the entry name The list is displayed horizontally Lists each of the table entri
150. I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Advanced fields for T1 CAS are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties 9 Click OK to add the Participant template to the Conference Participants list of the Reservation template You can define the dentification and Advanced properties for both ISDN ATM and H 323 of the same participant if the endpoint supports both interface types First select the appropriate nterface Type then define the dentification and Advanced fields and click OK Open the Participant Properties Identification dialog box again and select another Interface Type Then define the Identification and Advanced fields Both definitions will be stored in the system s memory 10 Repeat steps 3 to 9 to define additional Participant templates 11 Continue the definition of the conference properties 12 Save the Reservation and Participant databases by clicking Save Cp Database from the Database menu or click the Save button im on the toolbar 13 On the Database menu click Refresh Database to update the Participants in Database window and view the Participant templates you have added during the Reservation template definition MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a New Participant Template Directly in the Database To define a new Participant template directly in the database 1 5 Log in to the database Fo
151. I Create Login Record Cancel The Login Name field displays the login name that was previously used The first time you log in or whenever the registry is empty the login used to log in to Windows will be automatically referenced when accessing the database MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 2 If required type your Login Name The following default login names and passwords are defined in the database Table 7 1 Database Passwords tee Rem Pon These users differ in the functions they are allowed to perform applies mainly to the Database Manager and the WebCommander applications the Template Groups to which they are assigned and the information they can access For a description of the default permissions see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 6 Logging into the Database Manager 3 Enter your password in the Password field and select the Create Login Record checkbox if you want the Login process to be automated The Create Login Record option allows you to define your login Name and Password for the session The name and password you enter here become the defaults for the session You will not be asked to enter them each time you connect to an MCU 4 Click OK The Database Login dialog box closes 5 On the Database menu select Open D B Reservation Template or Open D B Participant Template and then select the database you want 7 5 Chapter 7 Database Templates to wo
152. ID Conference ID Password Password is optional For Example 92578485 24006 1234 MCU Prefix as Password optional registered in the Cascade enabled Conference ID gatekeeper EQ ID Click the Advanced tab and in the Node Type field select MCU Default Participant Properties Default Participant 172 22 189 28 5 7788941 001 1234 Click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Auto Cascaded Conference Links The links between Auto Cascaded conferences can be monitored in both the MGC Manager and the MGC WebCommander The important links to monitor are the dial out link participants Figure 1 11 shows an example of monitoring an Auto Cascaded conference in the MGC Manager Name status Connection Network Participant Numb Connection Type ilcascade Alpha 122 ID 31554 1 Connected Single Participant gi rag Ui LinkToSlave_172 22 188 120_0_01 Connected ISDN 4114200 ae Dial out SEilcascade Alpha 120 ID 9403 1 Connected Single Participant 2 oe U LinkToMaster_01 D Connected ISDN M 200 200 P 11 fiw Dial in Figure 1 11 Monitoring an Auto Cascade conference The Link Participant Names The dial out link participant name will be as follows LinkTo ConferenceType Master Slave _ Target MCU IP _ Primary or Secondary connection 0 1 _ Link Number 01 99 For example the master conference link to slave3 may be called LinkToSl
153. II Extending the Conference Duration The conference duration can be automatically extended without operator intervention When the Auto Extend option is enabled for a conference the conference predefined end time is continually postponed as long as participants are connected and MCU resources are available When the Auto Extend option is enabled for a conference x minutes before the end of the conference where x is the number of minutes defined for End of Conference Alert parameter in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box the system checks if at least one participant is connected to the conference If a single participant is still connected the system automatically extends the conference by y minutes where the y value is defined in the EXTENSION_TIME_INTERVAL_FLAG in the AUTO_EXTENSION section of the confer cfg file After an additional interval of x minutes the system checks the connection status of the participants again If no participant is connected to the conference the system terminates the conference immediately If at least one participant is connected the system again extends the conference by additional y minutes This process continues up to x minutes before the maximum extended time defined in the confer cfg is reached At that point the End Of Conference Alert audio tone is played and the conference status icon changes The conference ends when the maximum extension time is reached The E
154. IVR Service is configured to prompt for the conference password or not checked at all if the Conference IVR Service is configured to prompt only for the chairperson password External Database i kee ke oner penan t T A 1 P74 la Password Conf gt onference tis D P ID 1001 M Conference Chairperson 2 oe g Identifier key ti O o id MCU Prefix in bl em ha Gatekeeper 925 FoS E E conference os Sonferenis a 5 Chairperson standard Conf IVR participant 9251000 r s con y E ere o Entry m cS Queue i RA Name DefaultEQ Numeric ID 1000 iD E or Profile Parameters New Conference ID 1300 Figure 3 3 Conference Access Chairperson Password validation with external database application Joining the conference entails the following steps e When the conference is started either in the Ad Hoc flow or in the standard method all participants connecting to the conference are moved to the conference IVR queue where they are prompted for the conference password e Ifthe conference IVR Service is configured to prompt for the Conference password the participant is requested to enter the conference password In this flow the conference password is not validated with the external database application only with the MCU Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Ifthe wrong password is entered and the Operator s Assistance option is enable the part
155. MGC Manager you define the properties of the video conference The properties of the contents transmission are defined internally and cannot be modified by the MGC Manager operator e Annexes N P and F are optional and are additions to the Video Format when using the H 263 video protocol improving the video quality For Annex definitions see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings e ViewStation PC endpoints connecting to a conference that was set to Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings In a dual video conference with Visual Concert PC settings the ViewStation FX endpoints use a resolution of 4CIF 704 x 480 NTSC 704 x 576 PAL Video Content Video Content as Jp s e e of Visual as Polycom MCU es Visual Concert FX Concert FX fount al Figure 1 2 VCFX Configuration Scheme To enable the Visual Concert FX dual stream mode for a video conference 1 Inthe Conference Properties General dialog box define the parameters of a standard Video Switching conference 2 Click the Settings tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management In the Dual Stream Mode list click Visual Concert FX When you select Visual Concert FX the Annex check boxes N P and F are enabled in the Media Settings Advanced pane Optional To select the Annexes
156. MGC Web Manager ver 7 0 gt 2 MGC Manager ver 7 0 p Help N g MGC Manager ver 6 0 a y z z Run 3 Shut Down F The SQL Server Enterprise Manager window opens Click the plus icon next to the Microsoft SQL Server to expand the list Click the plus icon next to the SQL Server Group to expand the list Click the plus icon next to the lt PC Name gt to expand the list 6 11 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 Right click the Database folder icon and then click All Tasks Restore Database from the pop up menu ti SQL Server Enterprise Manager Console Root Microsoft SQL Servers SQL Server Group F3 WEB SER ER SQL2000 Akin gt amp jm x C Console Root iy J Con EEA Microsoft SQL Servers EH hofmanS hofman4 0 SQL Server Group T F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 Windows NT S TLoad2000 TalP 46 Backup number 9 6 Inthe Restore as database box enter a name to identify the database 7 Make sure that the From device radio button is selected 6 12 gy MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 8 Click the Select Devices button The Choose Restore Devices dialog box opens Choose Restore Destination x Select the file name or backup device to use for the restore operation Backup devices can be created for files that you use frequently C web db tammy updated to V55 a C Backup device l E Cancel 9 Inthe File N
157. NUE 1 Continued a Bonding Phone Number Video Rate IP Address Call Signaling Port H 323 Party Alias Type SIP Party Address Type Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The video rate in units of kilobits per second A value of 4294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The IP address of the participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The signaling port used for participant connection A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU Note This field is only relevant to IP participants For H 323 participants the alias type as follows 7 E164 8 H 323 ID 11 URL ID alias type 12 Transport ID 13 Email ID 14 Participant number A 43 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 19 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 1 Continued i e ee H 323 P
158. No to cancel the operation so you can back up the database first The updating time will depend on the size of the database At the end of the process the Update Database Results dialog box listing the fields that were updated is displayed 6 Click OK to return to the Update Database dialog box Click Close to close the Update Database dialog box and exit the update process have not yet updated the database you can do it at a later time using the Add When you open the MGC Manager for the first time after an upgrade if you ls Remove Connection to the ODBC from the Database menu 6 33 Chapter 6 Using a Database Displaying the Database Tables 6 34 Once you are logged into the system you can display the various database tables Users defined as Operator Moderator or User can only view and modify private sets of defaults User Defined Conference Participant and MGC Manager Users defined as Administrators can view and modify private as well as global default sets sets that apply and can be used by all users In addition the administrator can add modify entries to all the administrative tables To display the database tables Click the plus icon next to the icon of the database whose tables you wish to display The database tree is displayed Database name Browser area Status area i7 DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 6 File Edit View Options Help a Defaults E Conference Defaults U User Defined Def
159. OK 9 7 Chapter 9 Recording Modifying the System cfg The following system cfg flags are relevant when recording via a Recording Link and should be modified when required system unless absolutely necessary Section Required Description Flags and Default Values Value p A AUDIO PLUS PLUS a a PARTY_HEARS Not applicable to the MUSIC YES RSS 2000 Enabling this flag allows the first participant in an audio only conference to hear music while waiting for the next participants to join However if recording is configured to start mmediately that is when the first participant joins the conference this first participant will not hear the IVR message The recording has started unless this flag is disabled Ly Modifying the system cfg requires that system reset is performed Do not reset the GENERAL ENABLE _DTMF_ Sa For the ReadiRecorder YES Required in a special playback service configuration which allows POTS playback via the conferencing MCU For the RSS 2000 Set to YES to use DTMF codes via a Gateway to the RSS 2000 9 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Section Required eer H323 GK FLAGS H323_ENABLE_CONFERENCE YES For the RSS 2000 _DIALIN_FLAG NO Set the flag to YES to enable the enhanced cascading mode in which Aliases conference name and participant name may be used for H 323 cascading conferences 9 9 Chapter 9 Recording Recording a Conference E
160. Office Reservation iat Office Reservation pc AM Gs David bs Herman a Jean s Marvin s Ron sa Steve Polycom MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Adding Participants to an Existing Reservation Template Reservation templates can contain two types of participants linked participants and embedded participants Linked participants are only applicable to database Reservation templates When adding a Linked participant a pointer to the Participant template is added to the reservation without copying its data into the reservation When modifying the properties of a Linked participant in one reservation or template its properties are also modified in all the reservations to which the participant is linked and in the Participant template if the changes were made in the reservation Participants who are embedded in a reservation do not appear as an entry in the Participant database and cannot be viewed in the Participants in Database window They can only be viewed as part of the reservation in the Reservations window of the database These participants can be copied from one reservation to another However the participants retain their embedded characteristics and are considered as unique participants Therefore when modifying the properties of an embedded participant only that participant is affected and not all occurrences in other reservations The MGC Manager enables you to add
161. PI CHANNEL DISCONNECTED es er Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 23 Event Fields for Event 14 MPI CHANNEL DISCONNECTED EE Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Disconnect Initiator Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 15 24 H323 CALL SETUP SIP CALL SETUP aS N Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Connect Initiator Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Min Rate The minimum line rate used by the participant Value range 0 1920000 Max Rate The maximum line rate achieved by the participant Value range 0 1920000 Source Party The IP address of the calling participant Address A string of up to 255 characters A 47 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 48 Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 15 24 H323 CALL SETUP SIP CALL SETUP Continued Ee Destination Party The IP address of the called participant Address A string of up to 255 characters Endpoin
162. Participant check box The participant will be linked to the reservation and the parameters will be added to the Database when the new Reservation template is saved to the database The Participant template is automatically assigned to the same group as the Reservation template If the participant is not added to the database the participant will be an embedded participant h Click OK to complete the Participant properties definition The new participant is added to the Conference Participants list of the Reservation template Setting Video Sources 13 Click the Video Sources tab to select the Video Layout for the conference This option is applicable to Continuous Presence conferences and is used to enable the Lecture mode For more details on Lecture Mode MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 10 This dialog box is hidden when defining an Audio Only conference or when Audio Look amp Feel is selected 7 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Default Conference Properties I Layout Border T Speaker Notation a JT Timer ra A In Continuous Presence conferences the Video Sources dialog box is used to determine what the participants see on their screens 14 Select the appropriate Video Layout and other properties as required Meet Me Per Conference One or two phone numbers can be assigned to the conference Participa
163. Per Cont Recording r General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B x Msg Service Type None x Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name F Con e Gh Part J Encryption I Silence IT I vTx 1000 Ronee PARA I Conference Lock en POHE None zi TT Mute Meet M Cascade None z I Start Cont id F OnHold Master Name None v I Terminate Afte s 7 Enable Invite 7120 Rate None E IT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None x Before FistJoin 5 Min After Last Quit 1 Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 PC lt lt Basic Roll Gall Pro Mation Auto Se IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Video Protocol H23 F IV End Time Alert Tone 5 2 Min s Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Maou ui Frame Rate 30 pic sec Z Talk Hold Time 15 2 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth 3 Eees SIm a bec L 3 Inthe Dual Stream Mode list click Visual Concert PC When you select Visual Concert PC the Annex check boxes N P and F are enabled in the Media Settings Advanced pane 4 Optional To select the Annexes Ifonly the Basic parameters are displayed click the Advanced button Select the type of Annex to use with Visual Concert PC 5 Complete the conference definition and click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II using the H 263 video protocol improving the video quality For Annex definitions see Defining Adva
164. Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The changes you made in the Reservation template are saved To modify an individual participant s information L In the Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window double click the Conferences List or Group icon to expand the list of Reservation templates Double click the icon of the Reservation template to modify The list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose information you need to change and then click Properties Alternatively double click on the participant icon The Participant Properties dialog box opens Modify the settings in the Participant Properties dialog box as needed For a detailed description of the participant properties see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Click OK in the Participant Properties dialog box to complete the modification of the participant properties Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 8 55 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Deleting a Reserv
165. S FLAGS section add the flag NOISE_LINE_DETECTION and enter the value found in step 9 Setting the flag value to 0 disables the SilenceIT mechanism For more details about flag definition and system cfg see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Click OK Reset the MCU 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The MGC Ad Hoc conferencing feature enables participants to start ongoing conferences on the fly without prior definition when dialing an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue The created conference parameters are taken from the Profile assigned to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue As opposed to Meeting Rooms that are individual predefined conferences saved on the MCU Ad Hoc conferences use one Profile to start many conferences Ad Hoc conferencing is available in two modes Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication Any participant can dial into an Entry Queue and initiate a new conference if the conference does not exist This mode is usually used for the organization s internal Ad Hoc conferencing Ad Hoc conferencing with external database authentication In this mode the participant s right to start a new conference is validated against a database The external database application can also be used to validate the participant s right to join an ongoing conference Conference access authentication using the external database application can be done As part of the Ad Hoc conferencing f
166. SERVED PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 2 on page A 44 Additional information about an OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY event For a description of the fields see Table A 19 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 1 on page A 42 Additional information about an OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY event For a description of the fields see Table A 20 Event Fields for Events 2011 2102 2106 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 2 on page A 44 A 15 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued 2108 3001 3010 3108 4001 A 16 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 1 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 2 USER_DEFINED _INFORMATION OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 2 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 3 Additional information about an OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE event For a description of the fields see Table A 41 Event Fields for Event 2108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 1 on page A 66 Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event This event contains web reservation information For a description of the fields see Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 3001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 2 on page A 28 Participant user defi
167. Secure OFF Requires Chairperson xl v Add Message File eral Re The General dialog box lists additional events that can occur before or during a conference You can assign an audio file to an event and the 2 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II message in the file will be played when the event occurs If no audio file is assigned to an event no message will be played when the event occurs If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 The following types of messages and prompts can be enabled Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Lock ON Indicates that the conference is now locked to unidentified dial in participants This message is played to all conference participants Lock OFF Indicates that the conference is now unlocked to dial in participants This message is played to all conference participants Billing Number Requests the participant to enter a code for billing purposes Added to Q amp A Indicates that a participant was added to the Q amp A queue Note This message is only played to the participant that was added to the Q amp A queue Removed from Indicates that a participant was removed from the Q amp A Q amp A queue Note This message is played only to t
168. TMF Delimiter pooo Bact Next gt Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the Entry Queue Service Fill in the following parameters Table 2 12 Entry Queue Global Parameters COE Entry Queue Mandatory Enter the name of the Entry Queue Service Name Service Language for Select the language in which the Audio Messages and IVR prompts will be heard The languages are defined in the IVR Properties dialog box see To define the IVR Properties on page 2 16 External Server You can configure the Entry Queue to use an external database application to verify the participant s right to initiate a new conference This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing authentication For a detailed description see Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Select one of the following options to verify the conference Numeric ID and permission to start a new conference e None to disable this option e Conference Numeric ID to verify the conference Numeric ID with an external database application 2 53 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 12 Entry Queue Global Parameters Continued ee Number of User Enter the number of times the participant is able to Input Retries respond to each menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the IVR system or waits for the operator s assistance Timeout for User Ent
169. Tables are organized in Groups The Groups increase the system security as they limit the access to conferences and participant data to authorized users only The Groups are part of the administrative tables Participants Table Participant Template 1 Group 1 Participant Template 2 Participant Template 3 Participant Template 4 Group 2 Participant Template 5 Participant Template 6 Participant Template 7 Participant Template 8 Root Group 3 Participant Template 9 Figure 6 3 Participants Table organized in Groups 6 63 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 64 Reservations Table Reservation Template 1 Reservation Template 2 Reservation Template 3 Reservation Template 4 Reservation Template 5 Reservation Template 6 Reservation Template 7 Root Group 3 Reservation Template 8 Reservation Template 9 Reservation Template 10 Figure 6 4 Reservations Table organized in Groups In the Groups table you define the various groups and their hierarchy Users are assigned access rights to specific groups and can add or modify Participant or Reservation templates only in their assigned groups One user may be assigned to many groups and one group may be assigned many users New Reservation and Participant templates are created within the selected group and they are automatically assigned to that group Although the Participants table and the Reservation
170. Template file the appropriate file must first be opened To open a Participant Template file 1 On the Template menu click Open or click the Open button B on the toolbar The Open dialog box is displayed Use the standard Windows techniques to navigate to the folder containing the Participant Template file 8 7 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 3 Select Participants Files from the Files of Type drop down list The available Participant Template files are displayed in the Open window Ce x j Participants 1 ES PartyTemplatesFile3 la PartyTemplatesFileS E PartyTemplatesFile6 la UserTemplatesFile1 DO Files of type Participant Files usr Cancel ip A Reservation Files tlt Participant Files usr 4 Select the required Participant Template file and then click the Open button The Participant Template file window opens displaying the list of Participant templates currently defined in the Participant Template file lm Participants a Name _ Particpant Nunbers UIP AdcressSIPAckess Network Connection Type Channels Aggregati SIP Dial out Banany 122 22 132 116 H323 Dial in as Sam 100 ISDN Dial in MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Reservation Template Files Figure 8 2 Reservation Template File and Reservation Template Creation Flow shows the steps required to create Reservation templates that are stored in a Reservation Template file Before cre
171. The SilencelT feature is part of the IVR Service used to automatically mute audio participants who placed their phone lines on hold during an On Going Conference causing all other conference participants to hear the background music When the audio participant is muted an IVR message may be played to the conference informing the other participants that one of the participants was muted due to a noisy line When muted participants return to the conference they hear a message informing them that their line was detected as noisy and muted At this point the participant can press lt 9 gt to listen to a menu offering one of the following options e Return to the conference unmuted default e Return to the conference muted e Reduce the level of the SilenceIT Sensitivity and return to the conference unmuted Disable the SilenceIT feature for this conference and return to the conference unmuted SilenceIT IVR messages are described in Table 2 11 on page 2 44 SilenceIT guidelines e SilenceIT is supported for Audio Only participants in IVR enabled Audio Only and Video conferences e SilenceIT is not supported when the participant is moved to the Operator conference Attended status e SilenceIT is not supported in recording ports e SilenceIT is not supported in cascading conferences Enabling SilencelT In some cases the SilenceIT algorithm is not sensitive enough to the noise level causing speech to be muted or not mutin
172. The number of times that the synchronization of the Lost Counter MCU video unit was lost Remote Video Sync The number of times that the synchronization of the Lost Counter participant video was lost Mux Board ID The slot number of the MUX card handling the participant call Mux Unit ID The number of the unit on the MUX card handling the participant call Audio Codec Board The slot number of the Audio card handling the participant call Audio Codec Unit The number of the unit on the Audio card handling the participant call ID ID ID Audio Bridge Unit The number of the unit on the Audio card acting as the ID Audio Bridge Video Board ID The slot number of the Video card handling the participant call Video Unit ID The number of the unit on the Video card handling the participant call T 120 Board ID The slot number of the Data card handling the participant call T 120 Unit ID The number of the unit on the Data card handling the participant call Audio Bridge Board The slot number of the Audio card on which the audio bridge handling the participant call is installed A 37 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 38 Table A 16 Event Fields for Event 2007 EVENT PARTY DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 Continued ec S S o T 120 MCS Board The slot number of the Data card containing the T 120 ID bridge handling the participant call T 120 MCS Unit ID The number of the unit on theT 120 bridge handling the partici
173. Therefore to move from the Entry Queue to a destination Video Switching conference the destination conference line rate and video settings must be identical to the Entry Queue settings otherwise the endpoint will experience connection failure If the participants are moved from a Video Switching Entry Queue to Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference they retain the video settings of the Entry Queue hence not using the endpoint s best capabilities To use the endpoint s highest capabilities set a different Video Switching Entry Queue for each combination of line rate and video settings used by most endpoints or define a Transcoding or Continuous Presence Entry Queue using video resources Select this option to define a Transcoding Continuous Presence Entry Queue When participants connect to this Entry Queue they use the MCU s video resources Participants connecting to this Entry Queue maintain their highest capabilities when moved to a Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference If the target conference is a Video Switching conference the audio video and line rates of the Entry Queue and the target conference must match or the endpoints will not be able to connect to the target conference 3 31 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 32 Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued cS a Target Conference Settings Audio Alg Video Fo
174. This voice menu is played when the participant requests to change the conference chairperson password This message details the steps required to complete the procedure Change Requests the participant to enter a new conference Conference password when the participant is attempting to Password modify the conference password Change Requests the participant to enter a new chairperson Chairperson password when the participant is attempting to Password modify the chairperson password Confirm Password Requests the participant to re enter the new Change password Change Password A message played when the participant enters an Failure invalid password usually when that password is already in use Change Password A message played when the conference password Successful was successfully changed 2 35 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Self Mute A confirmation message that is played when participants request to mute their line Self Unmute A confirmation message that is played when participants request to unmute their line Chairperson Help A help menu which is played upon a request from the Menu 1 chairperson listing the operations their respective DTMF codes that can be performed by the chairperson The playback can be stopped any time The voice message that can be recorded for one Help file is limited to 30 seconds You can have two audio files p
175. To mute all participants except yourself press star five General The available touch tone keypad PRTCHP ACA Participant Help actions are as follows Menu e To exit this menu press any key To request private assistance press star zero To mute your line press star six To unmute your line press pound six To increase your volume press star nine To decrease your volume press pound nine To ask a question press star two two To cancel your question press pound two two 2 68 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued General The available touch tone keypad INVITHP ACA Audio Invite Help actions are as follows menu To exit this menu press any key To obtain an outside line and dial out to an invitee press star four To admit an invitee to the conference and invite another participant press star one To disconnect the invitee and invite another participant press star two To admit an invitee to the conference and return to the conference press star three To disconnect the invitee and return to the conference press star four General Voting The available touch tone keypad VOTEHLP ACA Help menu actions are as follows To exit this menu press any key To vote press star eight one To end the voting session and get the results press pound eight one To start a new voting session press star eight two
176. User Properties dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 6 Click the Creation amp Authentication button to display additional parameters User Properties 6 57 Chapter 6 Using a Database 7 Define the following parameters Table 6 6 Creation amp Authentication parameters non mn Conference Creation Billing Code Enter the billing code that will be added to the conference parameters when starting a new On Going Conference from the New Meeting window or from the MGC Personal Scheduler Outlook s Add on application In Ad Hoc conferencing when the MCU is configured to use the WebCommander Server Manager as the External database application for authentication the billing code defined here overwrites the billing code defined in the Ad Hoc Profile Entry Password Enter the conference entry password that the participants must enter to connect to the conference This password is assigned to the conference scheduled or started from the New Meeting window or from the MGC Personal Scheduler In Ad Hoc conferencing when the MCU is configured to use the WebCommander Server Manager as the External database application for authentication the conference entry password defined here overwrites the conference entry password defined in the Ad Hoc Profile Web Chairperson Enter the chairperson password the participant must Password use to connect to the conference as chairperson or to view the
177. Volume II Modifying the Line Rate Set in the Participant Template You can modify the line rate defined for an ISDN or ATM Participant template without accessing the Participant Properties dialog box This option is available only for disconnected participants To modify the participant s Line Rate 1 Open the Reservation or Participant Template file or the Reservation or Participant Database In the Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon In the Reservations in Database window or the Participants in Database window expand the Groups icon until you locate the desired group For a Reservation template double click the Reservation template icon or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template A list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose Line Rate definition you want to modify and then click the Line Rate option to display the list of available line rates 8 43 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 44 The currently selected Line Rate appears in bold and a check mark is displayed next to it Q r rt SM Copy As Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Dial Out Ctri A Line Rates a v Auto 2x64 kbps La 18 056 kbps 1B 64 kbps 2B 2x56 kbps 2B 2x64 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps 336 kbps 384 kbps 512 kbps 768 kbps T1 1472
178. X V Automatic Connection Cancel 3 Define the following parameters Table 3 5 SIP Factory Properties C Enter the SIP Factory name This name will be used as part of the URI dialed by the SIP endpoint to initiate the conference together with the domain name Profile Select the conference Profile from the list of Profiles defined in the MCU The new conference will be created using the parameters defined in the Profile Automatic Select this check box to immediately accept the Connection conference creator endpoint to the conference If the check box is cleared the endpoint will be redirected to the conference and then connected 4 Click OK The new SIP Factory is added to the list Connecting to the SIP Factory The conference initiator dials the SIP Factory URI and connects to an Ad hoc conference The conference initiator uses REFER to join other participants to the conference 3 38 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences This chapter describes the following Greet and Guide features and terms e Operations that can be performed in the Greet and Guide mode e Greet and Guide Statuses describes various participant statuses during a Greet and Guide conference e Greet and Guide Setting workflow describes briefly the steps required to setup and manage Greet and Guide conferences e Step by step instructions for setting up Message Services and Attended conferences e Moni
179. You cannot CNFFULL ACA number of join at this time participants exceeded General Add me Please wait and you will be QAADD ACA to Q amp A queue prompted to ask your question confirmation General Remove You have been removed from the QAREM ACA me from Q amp A Question and Answer queue queue confirmation General Next It is now your turn to speak please QAASK ACA participant in Q amp A ask your question queue announcement grant permission to ask General Recording The conference is being recorded RCRDCONF ACA indication General Recording The conference recording has RCRDFAIL ACA failure indication failed General The available touch tone keypad LDRHP1A ACA Chairperson Help actions are as follows Menu1 To exit this menu press any key To request private assistance press star zero To request operator s assistance for the conference press Zero zero To mute your line press star six To unmute your line press pound six 2 67 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued General The available touch tone keypad LDRHP2 ACA Chairperson Help actions are as follows Menu2 e To lock the conference to dial in continuation participants press star seven To unlock the conference press pound seven To increase your volume press star nine To decrease your volume press pound nine
180. a is printed using the printer s current settings If Clipboard is selected the conference template data is copied to the clipboard so you can paste it to a text processing application To view a printed sample of conference parameters refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 6 Printing Conference Data 8 59 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Adding a Participant from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Participant Template file or Participant database 8 60 In the MGC Manager Main window in the Browser area expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations tree to list the On Going Conferences or Reservations Double click the On Going Conference icon or the Reservation icon or click the plus icon next the respective icon to list its assigned participants Right click the icon of the participant to copy to the Participant Template file or Participant database and then click Copy Participant Disconnect Participant Ctrl T 2 Moye B p Copy Participant Ctrl C Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management b Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn Off AGC Properties Open the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window In the Participant Template file window right click on a clear area anywhere in the template window In the Participants in Database window right click the Group icon to which to paste the Participant templat
181. ae ee Connect Initiator Call Type Net Spec Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown The call type as follows 1 VOICE_VAL normal voice call 2 MODEM_VAL 3 1 khz audio 4 56K_VAL 56k data call unknown type 8 64K_VAL 64k data call unknown type 10 64K_REST_VAL 64k restricted data call 20 384K_VAL 384k data call unknown type 40 384K _REST_VAL 384k restricted data not supported at PRI 4000 MULTIRATE_DATA multirate service data call unknown type 8000 1536K_VAL 1536k data call unknown type 10000 56K_UNREST 56k data call unrestricted 20000 ALAW_VOICE Voice call outside of North America A law 40000 ALAW_MODEM 3 1kHz audio call outside of North America A law The Network Service program as follows 0 None 0x1 ATT_ISDN OxF1 NTI PRIVATE 3 ATI_LMEGACOM OxF3 NTI_OUTWATS 4 NTI_FX 5 NTI_TIE_TRUNK 6 ATT_ACCUNET 8 ATT_1800 16 NTILTRO A 31 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 32 Table A 10 Event Fields for Event 3 NET CHANNEL CONNECTED Continued a Cel PRF Mode Calling Participant Information Called Participant Information The value of the preferred exclusive field for B channel selection the PRF mode as follows 0 None 1 Preferred 2 Exclusive For more details refer to the Q 931 standard The calling participant information For a de
182. alog box e Copy a linked participant from another Reservation template On Going Conference or reservation to a Reservation template When adding a participant from database X to a Reservation template defined in database Y the participant will be embedded and not linked Adding an Embedded Participant To add an embedded participant to the Reservation template use one of the following methods e Define the new participant during the Reservation template definition selecting New in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box without saving the participant properties to the database MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Add a participant to the Reservation template from a Participant Template file in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box Copy an embedded participant from one Reservation template to another in the database Reservations window or from one Reservation to another Drag and drop a Participant template icon from a Participant Template file onto the Reservation template icon in the Reservations in database window Defining Participants in the Database Participants can be defined during the conference definition and added to the database or they can be added directly to the database Defining a New Participant during the Reservation Template Definition To define a new participant during the Reservation template definition This procedure can be performed when defining a Reservation tem
183. ame box enter the name and path of the SQL database file AccordSQLDB installed with the MGC Manager application to be restored in the SQL Server Manager The database file is found in the MGC Manager Database folder Alternatively click the Browse button By to select the database file from the file browser One SQL database may be used by both the MGC WebCommander application and the MGC Manager application providing the same database is selected for both applications If the MGC Manager is installed first select the database configured in the MGC Manager ODBC If the WebCommander Server Manager application is installed first select the database configured here as the database for the MGC Manager application In both cases the database may be installed on a network server other than the one used for the Web Server 10 Click OK to confirm The system returns to the Choose Restore Device dialog box displaying the path and name of the database file to be restored 11 Click OK to confirm The system returns to the Restore database General dialog box 6 13 Chapter 6 Using a Database 12 Click the Options tab to verify that the appropriate path of the SQL server is selected If it is incorrect type the correct path Restore database x General Options 7 Prompt before restoring each backup I Force restore over existing database Restore database files as Bead from media Logical file name _ Move to
184. ame field Fill in the rest of the General tab fields as described in the MGC Manager s User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters 4 Click the Participants tab to add participants to the Master Conference 5 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens i x Identification Advanced Name Master Conference Conneeti F Interface Type fisDN x Partean aller ID fg70aaq MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meetme pe Bonding Phone Number MCU Conference Ss User Detirec User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 t font ted ted ep eo oie oh a 1 I Audio Only M vIP IV Save Participant Cancel Help Define the participants in the Cascading conference just as in any standard conference For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Define the participant who is used as a link between the two conferences Master and Slave and select the appropriate connection type in the Connection Type field It is recommended to define the slave participants as Dial in Select the MCU Conference option in the Meet Me per field if the Connection Type is set to Dial In If the Interface Type is set to ISDN and the Connection Type is Dial in the MCU Number field is active Enter the MCU number
185. ameters and then click OK The participant s details are copied to the clipboard under the new name In the Reservation database the On Going Conferences or Reservations list right click the icon of the destination conference 7 23 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 24 A pop up menu appears fal Sales1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Defe anding Print Template Cut Ctri X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties Click Paste The participant s details are copied to the destination conference or reservation under the same name Alternatively click Paste As The Participant Properties dialog box opens If you have selected Paste As type the desired name that you wish to save the participant as and then click OK The participant s details are copied to the new conference or Reservation template under the new name To copy the participant properties from a Participant template 1 2 Open the Participants in Database window Expand the Template Groups tree until you locate the participant you wish to copy Right click the icon of the participant you wish to copy and then click Copy or press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt The participant is copied to the clipboard MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Alternatively click Copy As to modify the participant name and other properties era webo
186. ample of a multi hierarchy configuration l l RA Participant Participant E3 a Conference A link Conference B link Conference C SE Slave Master Slave CE SSS SS E Sa eel EEE TER ee ee een eae ee eres acne Participant l _ l ners e I Slave I E Ts e Ne om I I _ aii I 1 l I l GS a A R i l i Conference B A 1 l kA l Master l l ewe sae i S is f Participant 1 l link eS il X Conference Slave EEE Ea Conference C Slave Se Figure 5 2 Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading In the configuration above there are multiple Master Slave relationships since some conferences act like masters to certain conferences while slaves to others On the overall conference level there is only one Master 1 In addition there are conferences that act as both Master and Slave 2 and 3 These conferences 2 and 3 are Slaves to the conference Master 1 but they are Masters to the end slaves MIH Cascading conferences allow e Full management of extremely large distributed conferences e Full Chair Control for all conferences and participants MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When defining the properties of conferences taking part in a multi hierarchy cascading conference it is important to correctly define the hierarchy tree by selecting the appropriate cascading opti
187. anager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties If the Operator conference template is defined in the Reservation template file you can only select a participant from a Participant Template file If the Operator is defined in the database you can only select a participant from the Participant database 7 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 11 The conference can be set to Dial Out Manually when checked This means that the operator will have to manually connect to the conference to run it 12 Click OK The name of the new Operator Reservation template accompanied by an icon is added to the Template Group H E Root Office Reservation 4 Cit Office Reservation awe Polycom Gi ul io Particpant 4 13 Select Save Database from the Database menu Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar to save the new Operator template Setting an Operator Reservation Template as the Default Attending Operator Conference You can define an Operator Reservation template as the default Operator Reservation template Once the template is saved to the database the default Operator Reservation template can be launched directly from the Participants Queue pop up menu enabling fast access to the participants waiting in the Welcome queue Only one Operator Reservation template can be set as the default To set an operator conference template as the default Attending Opera
188. and then click New Res Operator Template New Res Template Print Al Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P New Group Delete Group Q The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties General Scheduler Settings Participants MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II F Meet Me Per Conf Name Default Conference Duration 2 00 Billing Conf Entry Password Web Chairperson Password Numeric ID User Detined 1 User Detined 2 User Defined 3 Conference Type p Media r Supported Network Video Session C Standard Audio JP yi C Meeting Room Video Audio ce IF ISDN Operator ERA Continuous Presence Remarks PC O Update Remark Remarks History x 4 Type the conference name This name is used to identify the template It is recommended to use the operator name as the conference name The conference is automatically set to a Transcoding conference supporting all available network connections These parameters cannot be modified in an Operator conference When starting an On Going Operator conference from this template the template name is automatically replaced with the operator s login name 5 Define the remaining parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters 7 27 Chapter 7 Database Templates
189. articipant e Connect the dial out participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Monitoring of cascading conferences with an H 323 link is done in the same way as with an ISDN link Figure 1 8 shows information for each of the two linked conferences using an H 323 link MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help L Financial Management Normal H RA mu Configuration te n nces 1 conference A Jan 26 2004 14 26 45 Jan26 2004 16 26 45 728 2 3199 On Ep conference a 8 Link In IP B vite On Going Gateway Sessions 0 B Participants Queue 0 HEE Reservations 36 3 G Mestna Roos Marketing Management Normal E MCU Configuration gaS On Going Conferences 1 conference B 8 Link Out IP g Mar Media h F conference A Financial Management ID 728 2 Connected Link In IP D Connected 172 22 140 174 BS Dial in di St ok 120 120 o Audio Mike De Connected 172 22 133 67 E Dial out ct Th ok 128 122 o Audio Et conference B Marketing Management ID 564 2 Connected Link Out IP WD Connected 172 22 140 201 Bes Dial out ct T ok 120 120 o Audio y Mary Connected 172 22 131 78 ge Dial out Th ok 1238 128 o Audio al I wj Ready Tow 4 Figure 1 8 Monitoring Cascading Conferences with an H 323 Lin
190. articipant database The system displays the definition to which the participant can toggle either Link participant or Unlink participant depending on the current definition of the participant 8 63 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The participant icon changes according to the selected option Linked participant icons Audio Only B Q Audio and Video B Embedded participant icons Q Audio Only amp amp 2 Audio and Video b Deleting Participants from a Participant Template file or Participant Database If a participant definition in a Participant Template file or Participant database is no longer needed delete the participant to save disk space To restore a deleted participant you have to redefine his her parameters To delete a Participant template 1 Open the Participant Template file or the Participants in Database window 8 64 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 2 Right click the icon of the participant to delete and then click Delete Participants in AccordDB Root Name Phone 1P Connection Type Channels aggregation _ t n Dial in a ay Joe New Participant By Melissa Ra Meliss COPY As ch polycom Debo Ra polyc CORY Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x E gt Office Reservation Q g Sarah Ba Sarat paste Ctrl y 2 Delete Del ay Tanya ga Tany D Polycom Dial Out Ctr E weboffice Line Rates gt weboffice_v2 Properties
191. arty Alias For SIP participants the address type as follows Type SIP Party 1 SIP URI Address Type 2 Tel URL cont H 323 Party Alias Note This field is only relevant to IP participants SIP Party Address For H 323 participants the alias name The alias name may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants the SIP address The address may contain up to 80 characters Table A 20 Event Fields for Events 2011 2102 2106 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 2 ce Encryption Indicates the participant s encryption setting as follows 0 The participant is not encrypted 1 The participant is encrypted 2 Auto The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU A 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 21 Event Fields for Event 11 ATM CHANNEL CONNECTED on a nr Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the systems connect The initial channel is always 1 Channels Number Note This field is only relevant only to multirate calls The total number of channels bein
192. as a link to the Master conference in each Slave conference It is recommended to define these participants as dial out participants entering the number of the MCU running the Master conference in the Participant Phone Number field In Star cascading if more than two conferences are defined and they are set as Auto cascading a multi hierarchy configuration may be established at the end of the cascading negotiations between the three MCUs running the conferences If the multi hierarchy MIH flag in the CHAIR FECC section of the system cfg file is set to NO the conference will not start as scheduled H 239 People Content in Cascading Conferences H 239 People Content is available only in a Star Cascading topology with Video Switching cascaded conferences In this mode one conference must be defined as the Master conference that all the other conferences slave link to it Start by defining the Master conference with links for all the slave conferences and then define each of the slave conferences adding the appropriate link to the Master conference PEOPLE PLUS CONTENT section of the system cfg is set to YES e H 239 can only be implemented when the H239 flag in the e All the conferences in the Star Cascading topology must have the same settings for the conference line rate audio algorithm video parameters video protocol video format video frame rate annexes and ProMotion and other conferencing features such as Enc
193. ased on the selected Profile reserve the conference to start at a later time and perform other actions The selected Profile can be used to start a conference only on the MCU where it is stored To use the Profile parameters on a different MCU Copy and Paste the Profile into the desired MCU To modify the Profile Properties 1 Right click the Profile icon and then click Properties T Polycom Sales Start Immediately Start At New Participant F8 Copy Profile Paste P Paste Participant 4s Gtrl4 P articipant Gtr y Delete Del Print Profile The Profile Conference Properties General dialog box opens 2 Modify the Profile parameters You may also add participants to the Profile 3 Click OK to save the changes and exit the Profile definition Additional Participant Definitions for Ad Hoc Conferencing The Profiles can contain participant definitions used mainly to define recording ports and links between cascading conferences These participants should be defined in the Profile if they are used on regular basis Ad Hoc Recording Port The recording port is defined in the Profile in the Participants tab in the same way as it is defined in a standard conference Using the same Profile for all Ad Hoc conferences will result with the same recording port and account for all conferences based on that Profile MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II For more details on how to define a recording p
194. ate is to copy an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation Template file or Reservation database This is useful when the same conference is being used repeatedly 1 In the MGC Manager Main window in the Browser area expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations tree to list the On Going Conferences or Reservations MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Right click the icon of the conference or reservation to copy and then click Copy Conf fal Greet amp Guide Attended Wait Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant Lock Conference Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties Open the target Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window In the target Reservation Template file window right click the Conferences List icon In Reservations in Database window expand the Groups list until you locate the destination group and right click the Group icon Click Paste H f Polycom New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print All New Group Delete Group The conference is copied from the clipboard to the target Reservation Template file or Reservation database A new icon is added under the Conference List or Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the 8 53 Chapter 8 Templates Handling
195. ating a Reservation template you need to create a new Reservation Template file or open an existing Reservation Template file to which the new Reservation template is to be added To open an existing Reservation Template file see Opening a Reservation Template File on page 8 16 Create a new Reservation Template File l Add a new Reservation Template to the Reservation Template File Define the Conference parameters in the Reservation Template Assign the participants to the Reservation Template Optional Save the Reservation Template File Figure 8 2 Reservation Template File and Reservation Template Creation Flow 8 9 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Creating a New Reservation Template File This section describes how to create a new Reservation Template file You can create as many Reservation Template files as desired To create a new Reservation Template file 1 On the Template menu click New Template DataBase Directory Optior Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Save Ghrits Save As Convert into Database Recent File The New dialog box opens EM i is xt Reservation Template File Participant Template File Cancel 2 Highlight the Reservation Template File option and then click OK A new window appears on the desktop The new Reservation Template file window contains one item named Conferences List E ResTemplatesFile2 lolx Conferences List 3 MGC
196. ation Template 8 56 If a Reservation template is no longer needed delete it to save disk space To delete a Reservation template from a Reservation Template file or Reservation database 1 2 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database In the Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the desired Reservation template A list of Reservation templates appears below the Conference List or Reservations Group icon Right click the Reservation template icon to delete and then click Delete pha pee rates s weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste Delete Properties A confirmation dialog box is displayed Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel the operation If you clicked Yes the Reservation template is deleted The Reservation template icon and name are removed from the Reservations list Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Printing the T
197. audio H323 call close No port left for audio left for audio Resource Deficiency Resource Deficiency H323 call close No port left for video Resource Deficiency A 69 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 47 Disconnection Cause Values Continued Value Call Disconnection Cause Remote device capabilities do not support Security Failure encryption A common key exchange algorithm could not Security Failure be established between the MCU and the remote device A common encryption algorithm could not be Security Failure established between the MCU and the remote device Remote device did not open the encryption Security Failure signaling channel Remote device key exchange algorithm Security Failure message was not received by the MCU Remote device encryption algorithm message Security Failure was not received by the MCU faa The encryption setup process did not end on Security Failure time Remote device cannot encrypt Security Failure The remote device failed to start encryption Security Failure system The remote devices selected encryption Security Failure algorithm does not match the local selected encryption algorithm 60 Encryption key exchange failed Security Failure Long delay between channels Bonding failure No answer from remote participant Bonding failure A 70 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 47 Disconnection Cause Values Continued Call Disconnection
198. aults Amec Manager Defaults Conference Defaults Participant Defaults g Participant Defaults U User Defined Defaults MGC Manager Defaults 5 Labels FA Permissions Users amp gt 4 Groups 3e Root ea Default e WebOffice Tables displayed only when an administrator is logged in The tree categories that represent the database tables change according to the Permission assigned to the user who logged into the database Users with any permissions other than Administrator can only view and modify the Default tables they own Users with the Administrator permission can view and modify all the database tables MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The following modes are available in the database tree Defaults enables users to define conference participant and general system default parameters Users with permissions to modify the database Database Configuration option is checked in the Permissions dialog box can define default settings to be used by all the MGC Database Manager users Users without the permissions to modify the database tables can define private default sets for their exclusive use Labels used to define labels The labels may be assigned to conferences and participants mainly for sorting purposes Only users with the permission to configure the database may manage the Labels table Permissions used to define the access rights to various modules of the MGC WebCommander and the M
199. ave_11 11 11 11_0_03 Dial in link participants will have a visual name of the following format after they are moved from the Entry Queue to the conference LinkTo ConferenceType Master Slave _ Link Number 01 99 For example the dial in link from a slave conference may have the visual name LinkToMaster_01 1 65 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Video Layout Display in Cascaded Conferences When cascading two conferences each of the two conferences inherited the video layout of the other conference in one of their windows The cascaded link can be automatically set to Full Screen 1x1 in CP forcing the speaker in the cascaded conference B to display in full window in the video layout of conference A When an operator changes the layout in conference B the automatic setting of CP 1x1 layout is cancelled and the new layout forced is implemented Conference A Conference B Conf Without CP 1x1 layout setting of cascaded link link With CP 1x1 layout setting of cascaded Video layout of Conf B in Video layout of Conf A in window of Conf A window of Conf B Figure 1 12 Video Layouts in CP Cascaded Conferences CP Full Screen 1x1 Layout setting of Cascading Link is supported in CP conferences in the following modes e Classic and Quad Views Video Sessions including Auto Layout Presentation Mode and Lecture Mode 1 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To enable the automati
200. base click the From Database button 7 15 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 16 The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens x Database Name AccordDB ha p Filter Name l Labet None Si Group V v a If more than one database is configured in your system select the appropriate database from the Database Name list b Filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and or Label check boxes and then entering the appropriate character string in the Name field and or selecting the appropriate label from the drop down list c The Template Group option is enabled by default displaying the highest Template Group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged in user has access rights You can select another group from the Template Groups hierarchy from the drop down list Only Template Groups to which you have access rights are listed in the Group drop down list d Click OK A list of all the participants in the filtered category is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list and the name of the participant s Group is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File box When assigning participants from a database other than the one to which you are adding the current Reservation template the participants will be embedded in the conference and not linked 10 To display the list of participants stored in a Participant Template file click the Browse button The Open dialog box appears Use the standard
201. bers In a dial in connection the MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU In a dial out connection the MCU phone number is the MCU CLI number as seen by the participant Note This field is not relevant to IP participants No one or more fields one field for each participant and MCU phone number The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The method by which the destination conference is identified as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number or IP address or alias 2 Calling phone number or IP address or alias Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel A 63 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 64 Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued a a Net Interface Type The type of network interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 1 ATM 2 H 323 3 MPI 4 T1 CAS 5 SIP H243 Password The H 243 password or an empty field if there is no password Chair Not supported Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol as follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 3 H 264 4 H 264 255 Aut
202. between the scheduled and the actual duration may indicate that the conference duration was prolonged or shortened GMT Offset The time zone difference between your site and Greenwich Mean Time MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 10 1 Conference Record Fields Continued ae ee Status The conference status The following statuses may be displayed Ongoing conference Terminated by operator Terminated when end time passed Auto termination everybody quit The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the conference for a predefined time period or all the participants disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty for a predefined time period Terminated by participant The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes Conference never started since end time exceeded at startup Could not become an ongoing conference due to a problem Completed by MCU reset Unknown error File Indicates whether the conference record was retrieved and Retrieved archived Yes No Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records To retrieve and archive CDR records 1 Inthe CDR List window select the conference whose information you would like to retrieve and archive To retrieve and archive multiple CDR records simultaneously use standard Windows multi selection methods 10 9 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 2 Right click one of the highlighted
203. ble Operator Assistance on Failure lt Back Cancel Help 11 Fill in the appropriate parameters For a detailed description of these parameters see Chapter 2 IVR Properties Operator Assistance Messages on page 2 39 12 Complete the definition of the Entry Queue Service as described in Chapter 2 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service on page 2 52 3 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application This component is necessary only for conferences that require password verification with an external database application In this case an external database application is queried by the MCU to verify whether a participant is allowed to access the conference The MGC WebCommander Server may be used as an external database application designed to communicate with the MCU and perform queries in Users tables participants Access to an external database application is configured at the conference level in the IVR Service To define access to the External Database application 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand its tree and then double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to it to display the MCU Configuration options a On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions Q re Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 g Meeting Rooms Entry Qu
204. bled and view the Welcome slide in video conferences only Note Selecting this option results in the Attended status where the operator s assistance is necessary to connect participants to conferences 2 27 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 28 To download an audio file for an IVR message click Add Message File The Install File dialog box opens Install File Prod Mgmt 172 22 138416 xj att Install fI Browse Proceed E a Click the Browse button to select the audio file aca to download The Select Source File dialog box opens Look in 3 Local Disk C z 0ce Accord Official Manuals Backup word Captures_V 4 TJ ADOBEAPP C Catalog Numbers Alpha 03 Comet Cl Alpha 17 C Conrfig Msi Audio _Bridge C corel Captures _ 3 0 CorelDRAW8S xi Files of type z Cancel 4 b Select the appropriate audio file of type aca using the standard Windows conventions and then click the Open button The name of the selected file appears in the nstall field in the Install File dialog box c Inthe Jnstall File dialog box click Yes to download the file to the MCU memory The Done dialog box opens d Click OK to confirm and return to the Welcome Message dialog box The new audio file can now be selected from the list of audio messages In the Welcome Message dialog box click Next MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Chairperson dia
205. bout a PARTY DISCONNECTED DISCONNECTED event CONTINUE 1 For a description of the fields see Table A 16 Event Fields for Event 2007 EVENT PARTY DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 on page A 37 2010 RESERVED Additional information about a PARTY RESERVED PARTY event CONTINUE 1 For a description of the fields see Table A 19 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 1 on page A 42 2011 RESERVED Additional information about a PARTY RESERVED PARTY event CONTINUE 2 For a description of the fields see Table A 20 Event Fields for Events 2011 2102 2106 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 2 on page A 44 A 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued 2101 2102 2105 2106 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 2 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 2 Additional information about an OPERATOR ADD PARTY event For a description of the fields see Table A 19 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 RESERVED PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR ADD PARTY CONTINUE 1 OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY CONTINUE 1 on page A 42 Additional information about an OPERATOR ADD PARTY event For a description of the fields see Table A 20 Event Fields for Events 2011 2102 2106 RE
206. c CP 1x1 layout setting of the cascaded link Define the participant as a Casceded Link by setting the Node Type to MCU in the Participants Properties Advanced dialog box Set the system cfg flag ENABLE_AUTO_1xl1_LAYOUT_FOR_CASCADED_LINK to YES When Auto Cascading functionality is enabled in the Entry Queue the Profile and Ad Hoc conference must have the same properties Limitations Cascaded Links are not supported in the following modes Conferences set to the Same Layout mode COP and Software CP conferences Connecting using MPI protocol When a Gateway identifies itself as an MCU endpoints behind the gateway connect in a CP Cascade 1x1 layout When the MCU functions as a gateway the he system cfg flag ENABLE_AUTO_1x1_LAYOUT_FOR_CASCADED_LINK must be set to NO The MGC Manager and WebCommander monitoring is per MCU There is no GUI to display cascaded conferences across multiple MCUs as one conference The following chairperson actions are implemented per MCU Voting Question and Answers Replay Roll Call Change password and Operator assistance For H 263 4CIF and H 264 Continuous Presence conferences the link will be defined as H 263 CIF The Auto Cascade feature is not supported with H 239 People Content 1 67 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Configuring Large Video Switching Conferences 1 68 Lg The default standard Audio card configuration allows the card to support onl
207. cation to Graphics bitrate If you use older PictureTel endpoints select People and Content VO in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box not H 239 People Content In conferences where there are older and newer endpoints use People and Content VO for the conference and set the newer endpoints to use H 239 People Content People and Content VO People and Content VO is a Polycom proprietary technology used for connecting older PictureTel endpoints and only in Video Switching conferences Select this option only when using older endpoints To select People and Content V0 in a Video Switching conference People and Content VO is selected in the Conference Properties Settings MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II dialog box In the Media Settings pane in the Dual Stream Mode list select People and Content V0 x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording r General Settings J Restricted F Line Rate 384 kbps z Msg Service Type None x Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name T Conference On Fot I Eneyption IT SilencelT I vTx 1000 Base i I Conference Loc Criced None zl T Mute Meet Me parties Cascade None z I Start Conf airperson F Gr Hold Master Name None 7 E Temir hairperson Exits Enable Invite 7120 Rate None 7 T Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None z wem e After Last Qui
208. ce Paste 4s Gtrl P Past Girly Messages Status Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The IVR Messages Status dialog box opens listing the VR messages audio files that are currently stored on the Audio card sorted according to their duration The list also displays the file s name and its download status The Messages Occupancy pane shows The maximum number of audio messages for each category that can be stored on the Audio card as configured in the system cfg file The number of audio files in each duration category that are currently stored on the Audio card I R Messages Status gt Download Status Ok Message Type Message Name Status 32 Sec LDRHLP14 ACA Downloaded 32 Sec LDRHLP2 ACA Downloaded 32 Sec PRTCPHLP ACA Downloaded 32 Sec INVITHLP ACA Downloaded 32 Sec VOTEHLP ACA Downloaded 16 Sec PINCHANG ACA Downloaded 8 Sec OPERHELP ACA Downloaded 8 Sec CONFPASS ACA Downloaded 8 Sec ENTRYOPT ACA Downloaded 8 Sec LEDRPASS ACA Downloaded 8 Sec RERECRD ACA Downloaded 8 Sec BILLING ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWPIN ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWCHAIR ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWCNFRM ACA Downloaded M 4 gt m Messages Occupancy 2Sec 4Sec __ 8 Sec Maximum number of audio messages for each category Currently stored files 4 Click the Close button to exit the dialog box 2 61 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Service
209. ce To achieve better video quality participant video rate is 384 Kbps set the conference Line Rate to T1 384 x 4 1536 Kbps 1 29 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 10 Define the other Settings parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Vol I Chapter 4 Defining the Settings Parameters Click the Participants tab to add participants to the conference or skip this step for dial in participants Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens In the Video Layout area select the desired Video Layout in the Video Source dialog box Only two Video Layouts are available for selection 1x2 and 2x2 x Video Layout Eg ching Conti 5 Presen ae Background I Speake Notation M Auto Select Auto Select v Audio Muted Participants Lecture Mode I Same Layout None v Lecturer name I Timer Interval 15 Sec Auto S v Select Unforced Participants bai E EA x E te LS Lecture Mode is disabled in Software CP conferences 11 1 30 Complete the On Going Conference definition and click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Software CP Conference Participants The properties of IP participants in an On Going Software CP conference can be view in the Participant Properties Connection Info tab For a detailed description of all connect
210. ce started For a description of the fields see Table A 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START on page A 18 Note There is one CONFERENCE START event per conference It is always the first event in the file after the conference summary record It contains conference details but not participant details The conference ended For a description of the fields see Table A 9 Event Fields for Event 2 CONFERENCE END on page A 30 Note There is one CONFERENCE END event per conference and it is always the last event in the file A network channel connected For a description of the fields see Table A 10 Event Fields for Event 3 NET CHANNEL CONNECTED on page A 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued NET CHANNEL A network channel disconnected DISCONNECTED For a description of the fields see Table A 13 Event Fields for Events 4 12 NET CHANNEL DISCONNECTED ATM CHANNEL DISCONNECTED on page A 34 PARTY A participant connected to the conference CONNECTED For a description of the fields see Table A 14 Event Fields for Event 5 PARTY CONNECTED on page A 34 PARTY A participant disconnected from the DISCONNECTED conference For a description of the fields see Table A 15 Event Fields for Event 7 PARTY DISCONNECTED on page A 36 MODE communication mode made by the participant during the conference For a description of th
211. cipant If you select H323 or SIP as the Interface Type the Identification and Advanced fields change The Identification tab fields for ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP Interface Types are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Identification tab fields for the T1 CAS Interface Type are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties Click the Advanced tab to define additional parameters This step is optional as the default settings can apply to most participants and will not require changing MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Advanced dialog box opens x Identification Advanced Aggregation Number of Channels auo x Video Protocol Jato xl Recording None he Encryption Auto z T Auto Detect I Restrict Only Tl AGC J Enhanced Video For Standard Video Cards only Not required for Video Service Name Sub Service Name Node Type Num type Terminal E Taken from service z Cancel Help 9 Define the Advanced parameters These parameters change according to the network Interface Type selected in the Identification dialog box 10 Click OK to add the Participant template to the database window You can define the dentification and Advanced properties for both ISDN ATM and H 323 network of the same participant i
212. cipant Template file When a different Participant Template file is selected its full path and name appear in the Pre Defined Participants File field and the participants defined in the Participant Template file appear in the Pre Defined Participants list In the Pre Defined Participants field click the name of the Participant you want to add to the Reservation template 8 33 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 34 10 The participant s name is highlighted Click the Add button The selected name appears in the Conference Participants list Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all the participants you want to include from the current Pre Defined Participants list If you want to use participants from other sources of Participant templates repeat steps 5 to 8 for each Participant Template file and Participant database group Click OK The participant is added to the Reservation template The participant s name appears in the Reservation template s list of participants template stored in the same database are Linked participants LS Participants that are added from the Participant database to a Reservation 11 An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Reservation Template file or the Reservations in Database window containing the Reservation template to indicate that changes have been made On the Template menu click Save when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or on the Database me
213. cipant icon The participant is on hold not taking part in any conference When placed on hold the participant hears background music Once connected to the conference the standard icons see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 are used to indicate the participant status In addition to the icons the following indications may appear in the Status column in the Status and Monitor panes of the MGC Manager s main window Table 4 3 Status column indications om eee Welcome Waiting Indicates that the participant is connected to the MCU Connected and is currently waiting in the Welcome queue Attended Faulty Indicates that the participant is taking part in an Operator Connected conference and is being assisted by the operator Hold Connected Indicates that the participant is on hold not taking part in any conference While on hold the participant views the Welcome Video Slide and hears the On Hold audio message assigned in the Messages Service 4 21 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Participant Queues 4 22 In the Participants Queue window the system lists the participants who require the operator s assistance or are on hold in all conferences regardless of which conference they belong to The Participants Queue is mainly intended for Attended conferences The Participants Queue window facilitates the operator s work by providing special tool bars comman
214. cipants Copy participants from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation template Drag and drop a Participant Template icon from the Participants in Database window on to a Reservation icon in the Reservations in Database window The participant will be added as a linked participant Adding a New Participant to an Existing Conference You can add a new participant to an existing Reservation template directly This involves entering all the participant s information To add a new participant to an existing Reservation template directly in the Reservation database 1 2 Open the Reservation database In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group in which the Reservation template in which you wish to add the participant is stored Expand the Group icon to list the Reservation templates that are assigned to this group MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 4 Right click the icon of the desired Reservation template and then click New Participant Reservations in AccordDB 0 x Polycom Name Phone IP _ lt Cimi Office Reservation t Start Immediatly Ga Alice 5 a 2 SA All New Participant Lo j 2 Barbara Copy As to Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Gs Marvin Ga Ron Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens 5 Define th
215. cipants two endpoints and three connections to slave conferences Each of the slave conferences has one participant who acts as a link to the Master conference When the participants connect to the conference the MCU assigns a terminal number to each of the participants The number is composed of the conference number and a sequential number between 1 and 199 Ina Cascading conference the Master conference is always numbered as 1 while the Slave conference is assigned a number greater than 1 For example in Star Cascading on page 5 2 the Conference B is assigned the number 1 and Conference A Conference C and Conference D are assigned a number between 2 and 4 according to the order in which the Slave conferences connect to Master conference The first participant who connects to the home conference is numbered as 1 the second as 2 etc The MCU assigns numbers to all the terminals even audio only terminals If the endpoint supports H 243 it can also be identified by a name The participant who acts as a link between the Master conference and a Slave conference is identified as the link and is always numbered as 0 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading H 243 The H 243 Multi Hierarchy cascading is similar to H 243 Star Cascading However instead of being limited to two levels a Master and multiple Slaves MIH cascading allows for multiple levels of Master Slave relationships Below is an ex
216. cipants from a Reservation Template 8 46 If a Reservation template contains participants who are no longer needed delete them to save disk space To delete a participant from a Reservation template 1 2 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database In the Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group containing the desired Reservation template Double click the icon of the Reservation template whose participant you want to delete A list of participants appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant to be removed and then click Delete Pa Slice Copy As Ctrl C Delete Dial Out Ctri Line Rates gt Link participant Properties The participant is deleted The participant s icon is removed from the participants list Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar Copying Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another It is possible to copy a Reservation template from one Reservati
217. cipants to a Reservation Template oe 7 33 Adding a Linked Participant 2 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 34 Adding an Embedded Participant 0 ee eee eeeeeeees 7 34 Defining Participants in the Database occ cence 7 35 Defining a New Participant during the Reservation Template Definition sc etccahecssesseessncecudevnestoucanatiocnbsves ii 7 35 Defining a New Participant Template Directly in the Database vscccccetestessssssccestscusivavtecceusvavtoaneesessicecseeentodtestesneveaes 7 39 Saving the Database oo eee ceceeeseeseceeesesseseeeeeeeeeseeeeaees 7 42 vi MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Opening Additional User Tables eee eeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeees 7 43 Deleting a Reservation Template from the Database 7 43 Adding a Template Group to the Database eee 7 44 Refreshing the Database oo eee ee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeetseeeeeaees 7 46 Closing the Database Tables oo eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaseeetaeeaeeeeens 7 47 Templates Handling csccecsstadevnnserece rr een tenes 8 1 MGC Templates iscsi stsssigess svscaeas tosissasnsavas cients ias iiine 8 1 Participant Template Files ieee eee ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeaseeeeaes 8 2 Creating a New Participant Template File oe 8 2 Adding Participants to a Participant Template File 8 4 Defining a Participant Directly oo eee ee eeeseeeeeeeees 8 5 Opening a Participant Template File 0 eee 8 7 Reservation Template Files 0 cece eeeecssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes
218. conference The participants stay in the Participants Queue until the operator transfers them to the Operator conference for assistance From the Operator conference the participant may be transferred directly to the conference or put on hold until all other participants in the conference have been assisted In a Welcome No Wait conference upon connection to the MCU the participant enters the Greeting stage In this stage the participants are transferred to the Participants Queue where they view the video slide and hear the audio message After a predefined period participants are automatically transferred to the appropriate conference Home conference The welcome video slide audio message and the waiting period in the queue are defined in the AV Message Service assigned to the conference An Attended or a Welcome conference is set using the same options as for the following standard conferences Setting an On Going Conference directly Setting a Reservation directly Defining a Reservation template To define the Greet and Guide specific parameters 1 Open the Conference Properties General dialog box using one of the following three methods Inthe MGC Manager main window right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference Inthe MGC Manager main window right click the Reservations icon and then click New Reservation MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Inthe Reservations in
219. conference records CDR List Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 Mzinzi File Connection View Help Poawom 22n le Jan 26 2004 02 20 27 00 04 55 Jan 26 2004 02 20 26 02 00 00 2 Te Jan 26 2004 02 10 04 00 02 40 Jan 26 2004 02 10 04 02 00 00 2 Te Jan 26 2004 02 10 01 01 50 48 Jan 26 2004 02 10 01 02 00 00 2 Te Jan 26 2004 02 09 58 01 50 49 Jan 26 2004 02 09 58 02 00 00 2 Te 00 10 40 Jan 26 2004 01 58 44 02 00 00 2 Te 00 11 11 Jan 26 2004 01 58 04 02 00 00 2 Te 00 14 29 Jan 26 2004 01 50 00 12 00 00 2 Te Ba produet Management Jan 26 2004 12 26 52 00 10 35 Jan 26 2004 12 26 52 02 00 00 2 Te conference ted Jan 26 2004 12 25 27 01 38 56 Jan 26 2004 12 25 26 02 00 00 2 Te conference B Jan 26 2004 12 24 01 01 40 17 Jan 26 2004 12 24 00 02 00 00 2 Te conference a Jan 26 2004 12 17 41 01 46 32 Jan 26 2004 12 17 41 02 00 00 2 Tis 4 For Help press F1 Num 4 3 Select one of the following options Retrieve To retrieve and archive the conference information as unformatted data Retrieve Formatted To retrieve and archive the conference data as formatted text The Retrieve dialog box opens C AConference Data archive sales33_c21 cdr 4122 _c20 cdr WSales_Video_cl1 cdr K OK Cancel 10 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The dialog box displays a list of the destination files to which the selected conferences will be archived The
220. connected to the On Going Conference and they can request operator assistance or perform various operations via DTMF codes An IVR Service must be assigned to the On Going conference during the conference setup In attended conferences the operator controls the transition to the Attended or On Hold stages and from these stages to the Conferencing stage If the IVR Entry Queue Service is not set to attended mode On Hold for Operator Assistance the participant is automatically moved from the Entry Queue or the conference IVR queue Greeting stage to the conference Conferencing stage If an Entry Queue is used in conjunction with a conference to which an IVR Service is assigned the caller is automatically transferred from the Entry Queue to the conference IVR queue if this Entry Queue is set to the unattended mode If not set otherwise the participant is then automatically moved from the conference IVR queue to the conference Several operators can run VR enabled conferences simultaneously Conference Access Dial in participants can access the conference directly via the IVR system or via an Entry Queue For detailed description of the various conference access methods see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Joining an On Going Conference on page 4 70 Conference IVR Access Participants dial the conference dial in numbers and are connected to the conference IVR Service Using touch tone signals from the
221. cted via the LAN to the ViewStation endpoint that will broadcast the data to all conference participants The data stream can be received by both ViewStation and ViewStation FX endpoints Data Source Computer running Visual Concert Figure 1 1 Visual Concert PC Configuration Scheme To be able to broadcast data you must first configure the link between the computer deployed as the data source and the ViewStation PC that will broadcast the data stream to all other endpoints MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To activate the Visual Concert PC application 1 Run the Visual Concert PC application The Polycom Visual Concert PC dialog box opens Polycom Visual Concert PC x IP Address of YiewStation v Meeting Password In the ZP Address of ViewStation box enter the IP address of the ViewStation to broadcast the data stream to all other endpoints In the Meeting Password box enter the password defined for the endpoint Click OK The data stream can now be broadcasted Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To select the Visual Concert PC dual stream mode for a video conference 1 In the Conference Properties General dialog box define a standard Video Switching conference 2 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me
222. ction A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU Note This field is only relevant to IP participants For H 323 participants the alias type as follows 7 E164 8 H 323 ID 11 URLID alias type 12 Transport ID 13 Email ID 14 Participant number For SIP participants the address type as follows 1 SIP URI 2 Tel URL Note This field is only relevant to IP participants For H 323 participants the alias name The alias name may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants the SIP address The address may contain up to 80 characters MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 28 Event Fields for Event 1001 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY CONTINUE 1 Ce Encryption Indicates the participants encryption setting as follows 0 The participant is not encrypted 1 The participant is encrypted 2 Auto The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Table A 29 Event Fields for Event 20 BILLING CODE ie Ra ee Party Name The name of the participant who added the billing code Party ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant who added the billing code Billing Data The billing code that was added 32 characters Table A 30 Event Fields for Event 21 SET PARTY VISUAL NAME a aa Party Name The original name of the participant for
223. d Press two to change chairperson password Press nine to exit the menu 2 65 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued General Enter Please enter the new conference NEWPIN ACA new conference password Press the pound key password when complete General Enter Please enter the new chairperson NEWCHAIR ACA new chairperson password Press the pound key password when complete General Re enter Please re enter the new password NEWCNFRM ACA new password Press the pound key when complete General New The new password is invalid NEWINVLD ACA password invalid General The password has been NEWOK ACA Successful successfully changed password change General The conference is now locked LOCKED ACA Conference locked General The conference is now unlocked UNLOCKED ACA Conference is unlocked General The conference you are trying to CUFLOCKD ACA Destination join is locked conference is locked General Billing Please enter the Billing code Press BILLINGACA code request the pound key when complete during On Going Conference General Self mute You are now muted SELFMUTE ACA indication General Self You are no longer muted MUTEEND ACA unmute indication 2 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued General Max The conference is full
224. d el a Conference Maple_Room Conference ID 1001 ot Conference SXES ey with this ID a a2 Entry Queue Name DefaultEQ Numeric ID 1000 a ons Profile Parameters 7 Qa o MCU Prefix in Gatekeeper 925 aS New Conference ID 1300 Figure 3 1 Ad Hoc Conference Initiation without Authentication MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To enable this workflow the following components must be defined in the system e An Entry Queue IVR Service with the appropriate audio file requesting the Conference ID e An Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue with an assigned Profile Ad Hoc Conferencing with Authentication The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference The external database contains a list of participants with their assigned parameters Depending on system configuration controlled by a system cfg flag the MCU sends the validation query to the external database application without checking if the conference is already running or the query is sent only after checking if the conference is already running If the external database application finds a match the participant is granted the permission to start a new conference To work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference the Entry Queue IVR Service must be configured to use the external database application for authentica
225. d buttons and options to easily move the participants from the Participants Queue window to their destination conference For more information about the Participant Queue see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 The Participant s Queue Window H 243 Conferences The MGC unit supports conferences with the following capabilities H 243 Cascading Enables operators to combine separate conferences into one large conference H 243 Chair Control Allows an endpoint to control the conference using the H 243 Chair Control as described in the standard The chairperson can disconnect participants video force Continuous Presence layouts and terminate the conference Multi Hierachy MIH MIH cascading allows for multiple levels of Master Slave relationships H 243 Cascading Conferences Cascading enables operators to run two or more conferences as one oy conference The conferences can be run on the same or different MCUs For Simple Cascading Conferences see Chapter 1 Simple Cascading on page 1 50 The Cascading mode enables running very large conferences with more than 30 participants when using the standard Audio card in order to overcome the maximum participant per conference limit The conferences that are part of a Cascading conference may be run On the same MCU to overcome the maximum number of participants per conference 30 participants On separate MCUs to utilize additional resources
226. d Guide Conference To view participant statuses in a Greet and Guide Conference 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to display its options 3 Double click or click the plus icon next to the On Going Conferences icon The list of On Going Conferences is displayed S Product Management Normal HEA mcu Configuration Eis On Going Conferences 2 aa ACCORD 5 asdf On Going Gateway Sessions Q d Participants Queue 0 H Reservations 0 H E Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 7 4 Double click or click the plus icon next to the conference whose participants you want to list 4 19 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences The list of participants is displayed MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 loj x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help eis os a for Ti aevel oeae S ve Connection Network Phone IP_ Connection _ Audio g ACCORD 3 Donna Z9 wan D gt connected 172 2213339 Beh pia out Qil 5 oo wait De connected 172 22 192 112 eb dia out qi p Duke DO Polycom a Nadine Polycom H S Re E amp Meeting Rooms Name Status Connection Network Phone IP Connection Type Audio _ Video Ss accoro Prod Mgmt 1D 3794 0 Connected Empty B oaot Qi H Polycom Prod Mgmt ID 3795
227. d by the standard participant when two help menu messages are recorded for the participant operation This file is played after the file assigned to the Participant Help Menu 1 Invite Help Menu The audio file listing DTMF codes available to the participant chairperson during the Invite session Voting Help Menu The audio file listing DTMF codes available to the participant chairperson who controls the voting session depending on the configuration in the DTMF codes dialog box Maximum Indicates the participant cannot join the destination Participants conference as the maximum allowed number of Exceeded participants will be exceeded Recording in Indicates that the conference is currently being Progress recorded Recording Failed Indicates that recording of the conference failed and was cancelled 17 To assign the appropriate audio file if one was downloaded to the message type click the appropriate table entry The Message Type appears at the bottom of the table and the list of message files is enabled 18 Select the audio file to be assigned to the event 19 Repeat steps 17 and 18 to select the audio files for all the messages to be played during the conference 2 37 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 20 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens Operator Assistance x IV Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message opethelp aca z Add Message File Disconnectio
228. d number plan as follows 0 Unknown 1 ISDN default 2 Telephony 9 Private Called Phone The telephone number used for dial out Number A 33 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 34 Table A 13 Event Fields for Events 4 12 NET CHANNEL DISCONNECTED ATM CHANNEL DISCONNECTED i ee Party Name The participant name Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is anumber assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Disconnect Initiator Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Coding Standard The disconnection cause code standard For values and explanations see the Q 931 Standard Location The disconnection cause location For values and explanations see the Q 931 Standard Cause Value The disconnection cause value For values and explanations see the Q 931 Standard Table A 14 Event Fields for Event 5 PARTY CONNECTED fs Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Party State The participant status as follows 1 Connected 8 Secondary the participant could not connect the video channels and is connected via audio only MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 14 Event Fields f
229. database they are able to view and change a Template Group but are not be able to save the changes in the database If users have Read and Write permission they are able to view make changes and save changes to the database If the users have no Read or Write permission they will not be able to access the respective database windows For more information about assigning Read Write permissions see Defining a New User on page 6 53 Chapter 7 Database Templates Reservation Templates Setting up a conference to start some time in the future is referred to as scheduling a conference reservation Setting up such a conference to start immediately is referred to as defining an On Going Conference Regardless of whether you are scheduling a conference reservation or defining an On Going Conference use one of the following techniques to set up the conference Define a conference reservation or an On Going Conference directly by assigning values for each property of the conference The reservation definition is erased when the conference finishes Use a Reservation template defined in the database or in a Reservation Template file Defining Reservation Templates in the Database Reservation templates can be added to a database using the following methods Defining the Reservation template directly from the Reservation in Database window For more details see Defining a New a Reservation Template on page 7 10
230. ded the files prior to the AV Message Service definition you can do it now using the Add New File option For instructions see step 8 on page page 4 8 6 Inthe Name box enter the service name 7 Define the following parameters Table 4 1 Message Service options Lee ee Video File Select the name of the video file that is displayed when the participant connects to an Attended conference to which this message service is assigned This video slide is displayed when the participant is in the Greeting or On Hold stages Audio Select the name of the audio message file that is played when the participant is in the Greeting stage of a Welcome No Wait or Attended Wait conference Audio on Hold Select the name of the audio message file that is played when the participant is placed on hold If the same file is used for the Greeting and On Hold stages the same file must be selected in both fields 4 7 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences 4 8 Table 4 1 Message Service options Continued Co ee al Set Music Select this check box to play music from an external device while the participant is on hold This option is relevant only if the music extension is installed in the MCU Welcome period Define the length of time in minutes that the welcome slide is to be displayed before the participant automatically connects in to the conference This option is relevant only for Welcome No Wait
231. defined fields for a participant User Defined 2 These fields enable operators to enter general User Defined 3 information about the participant such as the User Defined 4 participant s e mail address The maximum length of each field is 80 characters Indicates whether the participant is a VIP participant or a standard participant as follows 0 The participant is a standard participant 1 The participant is a VIP participant A 68 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Disconnection Cause Values Q For an explanation of the disconnection causes refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 47 Disconnection Cause Values fiom 1 pno Parag 2 Desomedsyecpaair Operar Deemon s pesones coco Re Day e rae woo e morom none emeetan Net port deficiency Resource Deficiency w MUX port deficiency Resource Deficiency ao Audio port deficiency Resource Deficiency 12 Video port deficiency Resource Deficiency 15 Audio message port deficiency message port Audio message port deficiency Resource Deficiency Resource Deficiency cae gate does not respond V Gate No Response H323 deficiency H323 deficiency Resource Deficiency Resource Deficiency se o port T423 port deficiency Resource Deficiency Resource Deficiency H323 call close Gatekeeper connection ID Resource Deficiency failed H323 call close H323 call close No port left for
232. deo Protocol Auto z I Encryption F Annex N F Annex P I Annex F Video Switching i Line Rate 2B X T Restricted Transcoding Continuous Presence ES Dialin Number Dialin Number 2 Define the following parameters for Ad Hoc Conferencing Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile pone 2rd Enter the name of the Entry Queue using up to 18 characters MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued a eee Numeric ID It is recommended to let the MCU assign the Numeric ID The assignment is done once when the Entry Queue is saved on the MCU To define the Numeric ID manually enter the Numeric ID using the number of digits as configured in the system cfg the range is 0 16 digits The default number of digits is four If the Numeric ID is already in use in another Entry Queue or a conference an error message will be displayed Note e If the MCU is configured to support only automatic assignment of Numeric Conference IDs then this field is disabled and the system automatically assigns a Numeric Conference ID after you save the Entry Queue on the MCU Entry Queue Enter the name of the Entry Queue Service to be used Message to play audio and prompts and to display the video Service slide to participants waiting in the Entry Queue Leave this field blank if you want to use the default Entry Queue S
233. dge ID on the Audio card handling the participant audio channel or 65535 if there is no audio resource forcing The slot number of the Video card handling the participant video channel or 65535 if there is no video resource forcing The unit number Bridge ID on the Video card handling the participant video channel or 65535 if there is no video resource forcing The slot number of the Data card handling the participant data channel or 65535 if there is no data resource forcing The unit number Bridge ID on the Data card handling the participant data channel or 65535 if there is no data resource forcing The Message Service type as follows 0 None no Greet amp Guide 1 Welcome No Wait 2 Attended Wait 3 IVR Note This field is only relevant if the Message Service type is not None The name of the Message Service assigned to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 le Cae Lecture Mode Indicates the type of Lecture Mode as follows 0 None 1 Lecture Mode 2 Lecture Show 3 Presentation Mode Lecturer Name Note This field is only relevant if the Lecture Mode is Lecture Mode or Lecture Show The name of the participant selected as the conference lecturer Time Interval Note This field is only relevant if automatic switching between participants is enabled The number of seconds a participant is to be
234. dicates whether or not the participant is an Audio Only participant as follows 0 The participant is not an Audio Only participant 1 The participant is an Audio Only participant 255 Unknown Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The network sub service name An empty field means that MCU selects the default sub service MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued ee See eee Number of Party Phone Numbers Number of MCU Phone Numbers Party and MCU Phone Numbers Ident Method Meet Method Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The number of participant phone numbers In a dial in connection the participant phone number is the CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection participant phone numbers are the phone numbers dialed by the MCU for each participant channel Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The number of MCU phone num
235. ding to the Noise Environment whether the call was placed from a quiet room or a noisy environment such as a cellular phone Retrieve the corresponding parameter value Table 2 16 Noisy Line Tuning Table Noise Consecutive Parameter Environment WARS VADs Value 91 lt E lt 128 i V lt 50 Or 182 lt E lt 256 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 16 Noisy Line Tuning Table Noise fee Parameter 76 lt E lt 91 Quiet Vv lt 50 V lt 50 Or 152 lt E lt 182 67 lt E lt 76 Quiet Vv lt 50 V lt 50 Or 134 lt E lt 152 0 lt E lt 67 Quiet V lt 50 Or 128 lt E lt 134 91 lt E lt 128 Noisy V lt 50 Or 182 lt E lt 256 76 lt E lt 91 Noisy V lt 50 Or 152 lt E lt 182 67 lt E lt 76 Noisy V lt 50 Or 134 lt E lt 152 0 lt E lt 67 Noisy V lt 50 Or 128 lt E lt 134 E gt 1000 700 lt V 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 650 lt V lt 700 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 600 lt V lt 650 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 500 lt V lt 600 150 lt V lt 200 E gt 1000 700 lt V 200 lt V lt 250 E gt 1000 650 lt V lt 700 200 lt V lt 250 2 73 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 74 10 11 12 13 Table 2 16 Noisy Line Tuning Table Noise Consecutive Parameter E gt 1000 600 lt V lt 650 200 lt V lt 250 15 E gt 1000 500 lt V lt 600 200 lt V lt 250 16 By default the SilenceIT mechanism is disabled To enable it right click the MCU icon and then click MCU Utils gt Edit system cfg In the AUDIO PLU
236. displayed in the lecturer window before switching to the next participant Timer Mode Note This field is only relevant when Lecture Mode is enabled Indicates whether automatic switching between participants is enabled or disabled as follows 0 Automatic switching between participants is disabled 1 Automatic switching between participants is enabled Audio Activated Note This field is only relevant when Lecture Mode is enabled and the Lecturer name is set to Auto Select Indicates if the automatic switching between lecturers is audio activated as follows 0 Automatic switching between lecturers is not audio activated 1 Automatic switching between lecturers is audio activated Lecturer ID Not supported Always contains the value 4294967295 A 27 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 28 Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 3001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 2 ie een Web Reserved Indicates whether or not the reservation was set up from the web as follows 0 The reservation was not set up from the web 1 The reservation was set up from the web User ID of the Note This field is only relevant to web reservations Reservation Establisher The user ID of the person making the reservation or 0 if the reservation was not set up from the web Database ID of the Note This field is only relevant to web reservations Reservation Establisher The ID of the database from which the reservation was made
237. e Participants in AccordDB Root Name Phone IP 5 Office Reservation H 1 weboffice 5 weboffice_v2 Paste As New Group Delete Group MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 6 Click Paste The new Participant template is added to the Participant Template file or Participant database An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window to indicate that changes have been made 7 Click Save on the Template menu when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click on the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window This confirms that the modifications have been saved Modifying a Participant Definition in a Participant Template file or Participant Database You may modify the properties of a Participant template stored in the Participant Template file or in the Participant database To modify the properties of a participant 1 Open the Participant Template file or the Participants in Database window 8 61 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 62 Right click the icon of the participant to modify and then click Properties or double click the participant s name Participants in Accord
238. e A 19 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 20 Table A 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START Continued ie Picture Format CIF Frame Rate QCIF Frame Rate LSD Rate The video format as follows 2 4CIF 4 VGA 5 NTSC 6 SVGA 7 XGA 20 QCIF 21 CIF 255 Auto The CIF frame rate as follows 22 30 frames per second 23 15 frames per second 24 10 frames per second 25 7 5 frames per second 255 Auto The QCIF frame rate as follows 22 30 frames per second 23 15 frames per second 24 10 frames per second 25 7 5 frames per second 255 Auto The LSD rate as follows The values are identical to those in the H221 table 0 none 1 300 bps 2 1200 bps 3 4800 bps 4 6400 bps 5 8000 bps 6 9600 bps 7 14 4 kbps 8 16 kbps 9 24 kbps 10 32 kbps MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START Continued ee a ee ee LSD Rate cont HSD Rate T120 Rate 11 40 kbps 12 48 kbps 13 56 kbps 14 62 4 kbps 15 64 kbps 31 Variable LSD 255 Opened dynamically The HSD rate as follows The values are identical to those in the H221 table Note The MCU does not currently support HSD 0 none 1 variable HSD 17 64 kbps 18 128 kbps 19 192 kbps 20 256 kbps 21 320 kbps 22 384 kbps 23 512 kbps 24 768 kbps 25 1152 kbps 26 153
239. e New Res Operator Template Print Paste Ctrl V Ctrl P New Group Delete Group The Reservation template is copied from the clipboard to the target Reservation Template file window or to the relevant group in the Reservations in Database window A new Reservation icon is added to the list of Reservations under the Conferences List or Reservation Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Basing a Reservation Template on another Reservation Template When defining a new Reservation template you can base it on an existing Reservation template that is similar to the one you want to create For example Company X has a general managerial staff meeting every Tuesday and a sales managerial staff meeting every Thursday All the meetings are via multipoint video conferencing Moreover all the participants of the sales managerial staff meeting must attend the general staff meeting To make your task easier you first define a Reservation template for one conference for example the sales managerial staff meetings Next you copy the Reservation template and make whatever modifications you need to for the second
240. e In CP conferences when you select the H 263 video protocol you can select the quality of video transmitted from the conference to the endpoints The Quality option is used if the endpoints are capable of receiving 4CIF The Quality option is available when the line rate is 512 Kbps or above To enable 4CIF Conferences 4CIF and the Quality option are enabled in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box 1 2 3 If required in the Media Settings area click the Advanced button In the Video Protocol list select H 263 In the Quality list select one of the following options Auto Select this option to allow the system to select Motion or Sharpness based on the endpoint s capability Motion Select this option to optimize the video display for motion Sharpness Select this option to optimize the video display for details Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings I Restricted f Line Rate 28 E Msg Service Type None z Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name o I Conference On Port T Encryption I Silence IT F vTXx 1000 AA I Cont Lock Chair Control None X Fh belt HeT Cascade None X Fsi F On Hold Master Name None v Fr I Enable Invite 7120 Rate None X I Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None x
241. e on page 9 6 e Recording related system configuration flags certain flags must be configured in the system cfg file For details see Modifying the System cfg on page 9 8 Defining a Recording Link A Recording Link is the connection between the conferencing MCU and the ReadiRecorder You can configure different Recording Links for specific connection types ISDN or IP and then use them repeatedly to record conferences To define a new Recording Link 1 Expand the MCU Configuration Right click the Recording Links icon and then click New Recording Link nv F3 Alpha 03 Normal H Ba MCU Configuration iE Cards aa Connections H A IVR Msg Services AV Message Services H E Network Services H a Operators H Eo Gateway Configuration H i Profiles og Recording Links x3 New Recording Link On Going Gateway Sessions 0 9 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Recording Link dialog box opens Recording Link Name User Identifier String sent to Interface Type Recording system ISDN ISDN 7 T1 CAS H323 Phones Numbers Alias Recording Service Name es IP Address Alias Type Service Name faa Cancel 2 Define the following parameters The parameter descriptions below relate to the ReadiRecorder and RSS 2000 recording systems If you are setting up a Recording Link for use with a different type of external recording system refer to
242. e Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click New IVR Service aR MCUs Network io Product Management Minor Ba MCU Configuration H E Cards a3 Connections EE RIVR Msc ices fs Ctrl P Messages Status Properties Hg P H w MPI Hih am Operators H EN Gateway Configuration H T Profiles og Recording Links 2 23 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The Global dialog box opens where you can define the general parameters of the IVR Service xl IVR Service Name Demo IVR Language for IVR ENGLISH 7 External Server Authentication Never i Number of User Input Retries Timeout for User Input i DTMF Delimiter ee E 4 Define the following parameters Table 2 3 IVR Properties Global IVR Service Mandatory Enter the name of the IVR Message Name Service Language for VR Select the language in which the Audio Messages and prompts will be heard Message languages are defined in the VR Properties dialog box see To define the IVR Properties on page 2 16 External Server You can configure the IVR service to use an external Authentication database application such as WebOffice or WebCommander to verify a participant s right to join the conference This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing authentication Select one of the following options to determine if the system should request authentication from an external server e Nev
243. e WebCommander application You can convert Participant or Reservation Template files or individual templates to the new database structure To convert an existing Template file to the new database format 1 2 Log in to the User Tables database Open the required table either Participant or Reservation For more details see Chapter 7 Logging into the User Tables of the Database on page 7 3 Open the appropriate Template file either Participant or Reservation according to the table opened in step 2 On the Template menu click Convert Into Database The Convert Template into Database dialog box opens Convert Template into Database x Template Name Browse Database Name AccordDB v Properties Label None Group Root X Carcel In the Template Name field enter the name of the Template file and path if needed to be converted or click the Browse button to select the Template file If you click the Browse button the Open dialog box appears MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II By default the File Type is set tlt Reservation template files If required select usr to open the list of Participant Template files 6 Select the Template file to be converted and then click OK The selected file appears in the Template Name box 7 The Database Name field presents a list of all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password If
244. e Description SilencelT Participant Detected Informs all participants that the cont as Noisy line of a specified participant has been detected as noisy and has been muted Conference ID Requests the participant chairperson to use the required Conference ID to connect to the conference 10 Click Download File to download the appropriate audio file to the 11 12 Polycom MCU memory The Install File dialog box opens Install File Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 x EF ee Install fI _Browse Proceed Ce e Click the Browse button to select the audio file aca to download The Select Source File dialog box opens Look in Local Disk C z e 0ce Accord Official Manuals Backup word Q Captures_V4 ADOBEAPP C Catalog Numbers C Alpha 03 Comet Alpha 17 L Config Msi Audio_Bridge a Corel C Captures_ 3 0 Cicorelbraws File name Files of type X Cancel 4 Select the appropriate audio file of type aca using the standard Windows conventions and then click the Open button The name of the selected file appears in the Install field in the Install File dialog box 2 21 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 22 13 14 15 16 17 In the Install File dialog box click Yes to download the file to the MCU memory The system returns to the Add Message File dialog box Repeat steps 10 to 13 for each additional audio message to
245. e Groups icon until the desired group is located 8 35 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 36 6 Right click the icon of the Reservation template icon to add the participant and then click Paste A dep weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Ctrl x Cut Paste A Delete Del Properties The participant is added to the Reservation template The participant icon appears in the Reservation template s participants list On the Template menu click Save when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or on the Database menu click Save Database when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar To copy a participant from a Participant database to a Reservation Template in a Reservation database using drag and drop 1 Open the Participants in Database window and the Reservations in Database window In the Reservation in Database window expand the Group hierarchy to locate the Reservation template to which you want to copy the Participant template In the Participants in Database window expand the Group hierarchy to locate the group from which you want to copy the Participant template In the Participants in Database window click the icon of the Participant template you want to copy and drag it to the target Rese
246. e control over the remote sites to another participant In the Status pane the appropriate On Going MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Browser pane or the Monitor pane right click the Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Click the Ongoing State tab to view the conference status The Conference Properties Ongoing State dialog box opens weekly Properties Product Management x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Recording Conference Status Empty I One Participant At Most I7 Not Full I Faulty Connection FECC LSD Token Holder MCU Name Product Management FECC LSD Rate Off N Withdraw FECC LSD Token A I7 Resources Deficiency x jz Down Speed Chair Control Chair Token Holder Recording None MCU Name Product Management Audio Source er Withdraw Chair Token None 7 Exclusive Speaker Content None x Content Token Holder Current Cascade Mode pe None Withdraw Content Token Refresh Video OK F Cancel Apply Help The FECC LSD pane shows the current FECC LSD information for this conference Table 1 3 FECC LSD Options for an On Going Conference Field Option FECC LSD Token Holder The name of the participant currently holding the FECC LSD token None indicates that the F
247. e fields see Table A 17 Event Fields for Event 8 REMOTE COM MODE on page A 38 RESERVED Information about a reserved participant PARTY that is a participant who was added to the conference before the conference started For a description of the fields see Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY on page A 38 Note There is one event for each participant defined before the conference started E REMOTE COM Information about a change in the A 7 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued ATM CHANNEL An ATM channel connected CONNECTED For a description of the fields see Table A 21 Event Fields for Event 11 ATM CHANNEL CONNECTED on page A 45 ATM CHANNEL An ATM channel disconnected DISCONNECTED For a description of the fields see Table A 13 Event Fields for Events 4 12 NET CHANNEL DISCONNECTED ATM CHANNEL DISCONNECTED on page A 34 MPI CHANNEL An MPI channel connected CONNECTED For a description of the fields see Table A 22 Event Fields for Event 13 MPI CHANNEL CONNECTED on page A 45 DISCONNECTED For a description of the fields see Table A 23 Event Fields for Event 14 MPI CHANNEL DISCONNECTED on page A 46 H323 CALL The call setup of an H 323 participant SETUP For a description of the fields see Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 15 24 H323
248. e from four different participants into one outgoing CIF stream a s z 4xQCIF 32 o P 2E e 1xCIF E g ___ gt cE g s on 3 a e O e o oc 5 o S g gt ox na In Software CP conferences only two types of Video Layout formats are available for selection 2x1 and 2x2 If the conference includes fewer than 5 participants one of the layout windows is disabled Software CP video characteristics are e Video Protocol is set to H 261 e CIF frame rate is selected at the conference level Maximum CIF frame rate is 30 FPS the highest possible frame rate for QCIF e Video forcing can be performed in the same manner as in a standard Continuous Presence conference e Participant video muting is available conference enables separate conferences to merge into a single large conference This conference combination provides an added advantage by allowing a mix of IP participants in a Software CP conference and IP and ISDN participants in a CP conference When using this conference format identical Line Rates defined in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box are required for both conferences 5 Cascading between a Software CP conference and a Continuous Presence CP 1 27 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Defining Software CP Conferences To define a new On Going Software CP conference 1 In the MGC Manager main window right click
249. e or set an On Going Conference the Schedule dialog box will be enabled All the fields show the default values set in the Res Defaults in the Database Manager application Type the Reservation template name in the Name field Define the parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters 4 Click the Settings tab The Settings dialog box opens Fill in the Conference Properties Settings parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference Settings 8 13 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 5 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties x General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Conf Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name Name Stan_ISDN_Dial in Wanda 4 gt 4 gt Search New IV Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants 3 Max Participants 255 Pre Defined Participants File AccordDB Group My Group I Dial Out Manually Browse From database From directory Cancel Apply Help To define and add a new participant to the Reservation template click the New button The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Define the participant s parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participan
250. e parameters defined for the recording port participant The chairperson can start and stop conference recording using DTMF codes systems For details see http www prairiesys com PSI 01 0300 html Ly The customer must obtain an account with Prairie in order to use their In the U S call 1 800 888 3151 Polycom customers who require Prairie systems recording services to record conferences on the MCU need to obtain the following information From Prairie Systems The account prefix number The dial in number of the Prairie recording system The dial in number of the Prairie playback system e From the Conferencing Service A unique conference account number for each conference 9 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a Recording Port Participant To define a dial out recording port 1 Define a new ISDN Participant xi 2 Inthe Name field enter a name tor the recording port participant In the Connection Type field select Dial out 4 Inthe Participant Phone Numbers field enter the dial in number of the Prairie recording system 5 In the Interface Type field make sure that ISDN is selected 9 15 Chapter 9 Recording 9 16 In the Extension Identifier String field enter a string in the following format Optional digit field 0 9 Free text Rec Extension EXT p Account Prefix 2234 p Account ID 9876543 p Pound keys For example
251. e parameters in the Participant Properties dialog box For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties You can add either an embedded participant in which case the participant is not saved separately in the database or a linked participant in which case a Participant template is created 6 When you have completed the participant definition click OK The Participant Properties dialog box closes The participant is added to the template An asterisk appears in the title of the window containing the Reservation template to indicate changes have been made 7 On the Database menu click Save Database or click the Save button on the toolbar The participant is added to the Reservation template The asterisk is removed from the Reservations in Database s window title bar If the list of participants is not currently displayed click the plus next to the conference template name to display the participants 8 29 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 30 To add a new participant to an existing Reservation template directly in the Reservation Template file 1 Open the Reservation Template file as described in Opening a Reservation Template File on page 8 16 In the Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon or click the icon next to the Conference List icon to expand the list of Reservation templates Right click
252. e prefix Video Invite for example Video Invite 1 Video Invite 2 etc x f Entry Queue Settings n Name C Video invite 28D Entry Queue Service CP Numeric ID I Cascade F vx 1000 Target Conference Settings IV AdHoc AudioAl auto I Profile CP M Video Format fAuto v Target Conferences T Audio Only Frame Rate Auto T IP Only Video Protocol H263 M T Encryption I Annex N I Amer Miama Video Switching 3 Line Rate 158 X I Restricted Transcoding C Continuous Presence Dial in Number 1 Dial in Number 2 Conca Although the Entry Queue Service assigned to this Entry Queue includes the prompt requesting the Target Conference Numeric ID this prompt is skipped when the Entry Queue Service is assigned to an Entry Queue 3 35 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication gS When the Video Invite Entry Queue is defined the profile assigned to it must be enabled for the Video Invite feature In the new conferences that are created using the Video Invite Entry Queue the Video Invite feature is automatically enabled if the appropriate IVR Service is assigned to the conference Profile and the Enable Invite option is selected in the Profile Ad Hoc Entry Queue for Microsoft Office Communicator SIP CX 3 36 sy When Microsoft Office Communicator SIP CX users connect to an Ad Hoc Entry Queue and enter the target conference Numeric ID the
253. e registered either from the ODBC Control Panel or within the MGC Manager application To register the database in the ODBC Control panel 1 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II On the Start menu click Control Panel FB crant sop pros _ My Documents L My Recent Documents gt g Calculator 2 My Pictures E Adobe Reader 6 0 L My music ce My Computer My Network Places Recess and comect To L Printers and Faxes E mail Help and Support Microsoft Outlook 2 p search Ow tog of O shut Down The Control Panel window opens E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Oa A E Folders fo XxX 9 Address Ie Control Panel z Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and n Installs and troubleshoots hardware Configure administrative settings for your computer E Automatic Updates Setup Windows to automatically deliver important upda 2 Date and Time Set the date time and time zone for your computer s lDiskShare Configuration DiskShare Configuration SA Display Change the appearance of your desktop such as the b Folder Options Customize the display of files and folders change file as fronts Add change and manage fonts on your computer T Game Controllers Add remove and configure game controller hardware s W internet Options Configure your Internet display and connection settings p Java Plug in Java Plug in
254. e the conference Conference Locked Indicates that the conference is locked This message is played to participants who attempt to join a locked conference informing them that they cannot join Mute All ON Indicates that all participants are muted This message is played to the conference to inform all participants that they are muted with the exception of the conference speaker Note This message is played only when the Mute All Except Me Exclusive Speaker option is activated 2 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Mute All OFF Indicates that all participants are unmuted This message is played to the conference to inform all participants that they are unmuted when Mute All Except Me was deactivated Chairperson Exit Indicates that the chairperson left the conference This message is played to the conference when the chairperson leaves the conference this causes the conference to automatically terminate Note This message is played only when the Terminate After Chairperson exits option is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box End Time Alert Indicates that a conference is about to end This message is only played when the conference is about to end and it cannot be extended Note This message is played only when the End Time Alert option is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box Change Passwords
255. e viewed using any text editor such as Notepad CDR File Contents The general conference section or record contains information such as the conference name and ID and the conference starting date and time The event sections or records contain an event type heading or event type code followed by event data For example an event type may be that a participant connects to the conference and the event data will list the date and time the participant connects to the conference the participant name and ID and the participant capabilities used to connect to the conference 10 3 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 10 4 The unformatted and formatted text files contain basically the same information The following differences should be noted between the contents of the unformatted and formatted text files e In many cases a formatted text file field contains a textual value whereas the equivalent unformatted file field contains a numeric value that represents the textual value e For reading clarity in a few instances a single field in the unformatted file is converted to multiple fields in the formatted text file and in other cases multiple fields in the unformatted file are combined into one field in the formatted file Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File contains a full list of the events fields and values that appear in the unformatted file This appendix can be referred to for information regarding t
256. eaes 6 70 Refreshing the Database 0 eee eceeseceeeeeeseeeeeeeeesesaseesesetaeeseeaes 6 70 Database Templates 2 000 e cece eee ee eee eee 7 1 Templates OVERVIEW siicsiissesseuiisdene cis tupadeeentbaabossstavbedenentbaaes covtavsaduanvends 7 1 Logging into the User Tables of the Database oo eee 7 3 Reservation Templates sesisicsctessindsseestasiedavecesiensaasscaupteacesebeasani ecissessdeats 7 8 Defining a Reservation Template in the Database ee 7 9 Defining a New a Reservation Template 0 0 eee 7 10 Conference Parameters 00 0 cece eseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeseees 7 11 Conference General Parameters 0 0 cce cece eeeeseeeeeeeeees 7 12 Setting the Scheduler Parameters 000 eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 13 Defining the Settings Parameters 0 0 eee eee eee 7 14 Assigning Participants to the Conference ee 7 15 Setting Video SOULCES ool ee eee cee ceecseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeaeees 7 18 Meet Me Per Conference 0 eee seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 19 Recording sss iomann ania eaii iE N 7 20 Starting a Conference from a Reservation Template 7 21 Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template 0 0 0 0 7 21 Defining an Operator Reservation Template 0 eee 7 26 Setting an Operator Reservation Template as the Default Attending Operator Conference oo eeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeseeseseeesetaeeeeeeee 7 31 Participant Templates oo eee eeceececeseeseeseeeeeeesseseeseeeessesseeeaes 7 33 Adding Parti
257. ecting Refresh the Database List from the Database ODBC under the Database menu The system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes that are displayed by the system 6 27 Chapter 6 Using a Database Database Manager The MGC Database Manager is the application that enables the user to access the Administrative tables and modify their entries define new permissions add new Groups define users and define the user access rights to the various groups In addition the MGC Manager operators access the User tables via the Database Manager When both the MGC WebCommander to manage scheduling and monitoring of conferences via the Web and the MGC Manager applications use the same database the Administrative tables defined in the MGC Web Server Manager apply to both the MGC Web Server Manager and the MGC Database Manager Therefore the various tables may include parameters that apply only to the WebCommander and others that apply only to the MGC Manager Users may access the database via the MGC Web Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager and perform changes in the Administrative tables These changes will apply to both applications The access to the Database Manager is password protected The remainder of this chapter describes the basics of using the database Administrative
258. ed Cascading Enables use of DTMF codes in Cascaded conferences Enhanced Cascading Enables setup of links in Cascaded conferences using aliases Large Video Switching Conferences In systems that do not include Audio cards allows configuring of standard Audio cards to include 30 participants in a single Video Switching conference Auto Rate Detection Allows automatic detection of the line rate and aggregation mode of incoming ISDN calls without prior definition 1 1 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings These conference settings are described in this chapter In addition you can define H 243 Cascading conferences as described in Chapter 5 and Greet and Guide conferences as described in Chapter 4 Dual Stream Modes With Dual Streams an endpoint sends two video streams video and data Video streams are handled differently by different endpoints The MGC Manager provides the following video streaming options for different types of endpoints e Graphics for standard graphics e Hi res Graphics for high quality display or highly detailed graphics e Live Video for video clips or live video display e People and Content VO for PictureTel endpoints e Duo Video for Tandberg endpoints e Polycom Visual Concert PC FX for Polycom ViewStation PC FX endpoints H 239 People Content 3 P C Formats 1 2 H 239 and People Content are very similar in function but differ in the type of signalling used for each
259. ed once the conference is running On Going Conference To enable encryption at the conference level Inthe Conference Properties Settings dialog box select the Encryption check box Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B x MegSewcsi spe iva X Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name I Conference On Port T SilenceIT f TX 1000 Advanced gt gt m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 X Dual Stream Mode Nonel i Advanced gt gt 1 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Enabling Encryption for Entry Queues To be able to join a conference from an Entry Queue as an encrypted participant encryption must be enabled for the Entry Queue All non encrypted participants connecting to an encrypted Entry Queue that is encryption enabled are disconnected from the MCU Encrypted participants can be moved from an encrypted Entry Queue to the destination conference depending on the destination conference settings and the setting of the participant level flag in the system cfg file If the target conference is encrypted and the participant level flag is set to YES encrypted and non encrypted participants from both encrypted and non encrypted Entry Queues can join the target conference If the target conference is encrypted and the partic
260. ed to organize data The data in these files cannot be easily exchanged between external databases and the MGC Manager template files Microsoft Access or SQL databases can be used to organize the conference and participant data so that the MGC Manager users can easily share data with external applications Participant Template files were referred to as User Template files in previous versions MGC Templates The Reservation Template file is a shell containing the various Reservation templates Usually Reservation templates that have common characteristics are grouped together in the same Reservation Template file Some examples of common characteristics might be that all Reservation templates in the Reservation Templates file relate to the same company or that all the conferences are dial out The Participant Template file is a shell containing the various participants Usually participants who have a common characteristics are grouped together in the same Participant Template file For example all the participants that belong to a certain company You can create as many Participant Template files as needed Reservation templates MGC proprietary templates may be converted into MS Access or SQL database format 8 1 Chapter 8 Templates Handling This chapter describes the procedures to create the Reservation Template and Participant Template files MGC proprietary templates their conversion to MS Access or SQL database format and
261. ee the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings 3 33 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued iS eer ee eee Line Rate Select the maximum line rate at which the endpoint will connect to the Entry Queue and the target conference For a Video Switching Entry Queue select the highest line rate common to all participants For Transcoding and Continuous Presence Entry Queues set the line rate to the highest line rate that can be used by the participants in the conference If the target conference is Video Switching the Entry Queue line rate must be the line rate that is set for the target conference to enable the participant to move from the Entry Queue to the target conference Restricted Select this option to enable participants using Restricted lines the Line Rate for each channel is 56 Kbps instead of 64 Kbps to connect to the Entry Queue and be moved to a Video Switching conference set as Restricted lines Service Name Enter the name of the ISDN Network Service or the T1 CAS Network Service to be used by participants to connect to the conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Services list the system is case sensitive Dial in number Enter the first dial in number to be assigned to the 1 Entry Queue This number must be part of the dial in numbers range defined f
262. efaults set may be set as a Private or a Global Defaults set A Global Defaults set is a default set that applies to all the database users A Private Defaults set applies only to users to whom it is specifically allocated as the private Defaults set and will be used instead of the Global Defaults set Only one Defaults set may be defined as the Private Defaults set Selecting another Defaults set as the Private Defaults Set automatically cancels the current Private Set One set may be defined as both a Global and a Private Defaults set The selection of the Global and Private Defaults set is done separately for each Defaults category If more than one database is installed the system loads the Private defaults from the database designated as Private and the Global Defaults from the database designated as Global Therefore you must define the database from which you want to load the Private Defaults set as Private and the database from which you want to load the Global default set as Global You may define the same database as both Global and Private In that case the Global Defaults set and the Private Defaults set will be taken from the same database Using the right click pop up menu you can also delete a new Defaults set or change the Defaults set parameters 6 47 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 48 To define a Defaults set as the Global Defaults set LS Only the administrator can define a Defaults set as the Global Defaults set
263. elds Unformatted File The CDR Call Detail Records utility is used to retrieve conference information to a file The CDR utility can retrieve conference information to a file in both formatted and unformatted formats Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records The first record in each file contains information about the conference in general such as the conference name and start time The remaining records each contain information about one event that occurred during the conference such as a participant connecting to the conference or the operator extending the length of the conference The first field in each record identifies the event type and this is followed by values containing information about the event The fields are separated by commas Formatted files contain the same information as unformatted files but with the field values replaced by descriptions Formatted files are divided into sections each containing information about one conference event The first line in each section is a title describing the type of event and this is followed by multiple lines each containing information about the event either in the form of a descriptive field name and value or just a descriptive field value Although the formatted files contain the same information in a few instances a single field in the unformatted file is converted to multiple lines in the formatted file and in other cases multiple fields in the unformatted file are
264. emplate Information The MGC Manager enables you to print the template information to a text file printer or clipboard to be imported to an external application In addition you can define the date starting time and duration that should be defined to set a conference reservation based on this template It allows you to use the printed data for scheduling conferences for the next day week month etc You can also print the name of the operator that should schedule the conference To print the Template information 1 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database that contains the conference to be printed 2 Double click the Conferences List or Groups icon to expand the list of Reservation templates 3 Right click the Reservation template icon to print and then click Print Template sab weboffice_v1 E Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Defaulk Atte g Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrlt Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties 8 57 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Scheduler dialog box opens Scheduler xi Oper Name rr Report To File Date C Printer C ClipBoard i February 2004 gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Sat StattingT ime 25 26 2 28 29 30 31 r r E 6 3 55 PM 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 n 22 23 24 2 2 27 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 200 E Cancel OK 4 Define the following parameters Table 8 1 Pri
265. empty you can download a new slide now by clicking the Add Slide button The nstall File dialog box opens The downloading process is similar to the downloading of audio files see step 8 on page 2 28 Alternatively select None if no video Welcome slide is to be displayed The required video slide must first be converted to the Polycom s internal format acv This process is described in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 14 Click Finish to complete the Entry Queue Service definition The new Entry Queue Service is added to the VR Message Services list 2 57 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Connecting to a Conference from an Entry Queue The IVR Service is assigned to specific conferences A different IVR Service can be assigned to each conference or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences If an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the caller must respond through the touch tone keypad to the voice prompts defined in the IVR Service in order to connect to the conference When the conference is accessed through an Entry Queue and an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the connection to the conference is done in two stages In the first stage the participants connect to the Entry Queue where they are routed to their destination conference according to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration In the second stage the participant connection to the confere
266. en there are problems releasing the chair token from one participant for the use of other participants Using a Database The database includes various data tables used by the MGC Manager operators and WebCommander users who access the database via the local network or via a Web browser The database is divided into two modules Administrative Tables and User Tables User Tables ha Administrative Tables Labels Table MCUs Table Access via MGC gt Access via MGC Manager or MGC Patapan EEE Permissions Database Manager WebCommander lt Table or MGC Web Server site using the Web Reservations Users Tab Manager browser Table Groups Table Database Figure 6 1 Database Structure Administrative Tables the configuration tables that enable the administrator and users who have the appropriate access rights to define system Defaults Permissions Users Groups and labels In addition the administrator can perform maintenance and configuration tasks relating to the database itself The configuration is performed through the MGC Database Manager application Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 2 User Tables The User Tables module includes the Participant and Reservation templates that are organized in Groups Users can only manage templates assigned to Groups to which they have access rights The Groups and their access rights are defined in the MG
267. endpoint requests the data token at 4800 the FECC LSD rate of the entire conference is set to 4800 The LSD4800 flag is by default set to YES and must be added to the system cfg file before its value can be changed e The FECC LSD 4800 rate must be enabled in the system cfg file to enable encrypted participants to join an FECC enabled conference e Ifthe FECC LSD field is set to 6 4 when an endpoint requests the data token at 4800 the request is rejected by the MCU e If the FECC LSD 4800 rate is enabled in the system cfg flag Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings In a Cascading conference only the FECC LSD 6 4 fixed rate option is available In this type of conference when a participant connected to the slave MCU invokes a request for the data token the slave MCU checks if another participant possesses the data token If yes the request is rejected If no the request is transferred to the master MCU which opens the FECC LSD channel of all the conference participants For more details on scheduling Cascading conferences see Cascading Conferences on page 1 47 or Chapter 5 H 243 Cascading Conferences on page 5 1 Viewing the FECC LSD Conference Properties 1 20 Once the conference has started and it is set to FECC LSD 6 4 the FECC LSD channel automatically opens If the conference is set to Dynamic the FECC LSD channel opens only if and when a participant requests the Far End Camera Con
268. er to disable this option The participant s right to join the conference will not be verified with an external database application 2 24 5 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 3 IVR Properties Global Continued External Server Authentication cont Number of User Input Retries Timeout for User Input DTMF Delimiter Click Next e Always Any participant request to join the conference will be validated using an external database application Upon Request to verify the chairperson password with an external database application The validation process occurs only when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key pound or star All other participants are connected to the conference as standard undefined participants Enter the number of times the participant will be able to respond to each menu prompt before being disconnected from the IVR system or being moved to the participant s queue for the operator s assistance The default value is 3 You can define up to 5 retries Enter the duration in seconds that the system will wait for the participant s input before announcing an input error The default value is 5 seconds The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star
269. er This should be one of the dial in ISDN T1 CAS numbers assigned to the Recording Service in the only Readi Recorder Service Name Enter the name of the Network Service to be used by the conferencing MCU when dialing to the recording system If left blank the default Network Service according to the selected network connection will be used 9 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 9 1 Recording Link Properties Continued Alias and For the ReadiRecorder Recording The Prefix of the Network Service defined in the Service Name ReadiRecorder and the Recording Service Name H 323 only For the RSS 2000 Only relevant if the RSS 2000 is registered in the Gatekeeper The H 323 Prefix of the RSS 2000 as registered in the Gatekeeper Participant IP Enter the IP address of the recording system H 323 only Note Fill in either the IP Address field or the Alias and Recording Service Name and Alias Type fields Alias Type Select one of the following alias types H 323 only e H323 ID E164 URL ID Email ID Transport ID e Party Number Note It is recommended to use H323 ID or E164 as the alias type Audio Only Clear this check box to enable video recording H 323 only 3 Click OK The link you defined is listed in the MCU Configuration under the Recording Links icon You can now assign the link to the conferences that you want to record e You can modify the parameters of a link but not its name To modify a
270. er User s Guide Volume II Table 2 9 Roll Call Voice Messages Continued Rojca Description Message p Roll Call Start Played when Roll Call is requested by the chairperson Names Review introducing the names of the conference participants in the order they joined the conference Roll Call End Played at the end of Roll Call to indicate that the listing Names Review of participant names is concluded Click Next In Audio Look amp Feel the SilencelT dialog box opens skip to The SilencelT dialog box opens in step 31 In the Unified mode the Video Services dialog box opens x I Enable Video Services M Click amp View Video Welcome Slide faLPs ACY z Add Slide lt Back Cancel Help Select the Enable Video Services check box to define a video IVR Service and to enable the Click amp View application Alternatively if no video services are part of this IVR Service click Next to skip the definition of the Video Services For a detailed description of Click amp View see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 11 2 41 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 30 Define the following parameters Table 2 10 IVR Properties Video Services Click amp View Video Welcome Slide Select this option to enable endpoints to run the Click amp View application Note For operation Click amp View requires the Audio and Video cards and endpoints to be DTMF enab
271. er mode where local Meeting Rooms connect to the main Meeting Room The PBX is configured to forward the calls from one MCU to another when all the ports on one MCU are used In all MCUs in the network the Meeting Rooms have the same configuration and each one of them includes a link to the main Meeting Room on the Master MCU must be defined as both Meet Me Per Conference and Entry Queue Access the participants connect via the Entry Queue while the cascade links connect directly This applies to MCU Cluster and MCU Rollover cascading modes i s To allocate dial in numbers to the main Meeting Room on the Master MCU it Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences DTMF codes can be used in a cascaded conference if the MCU is capable of sending the DTMF codes to several MCUs These codes enable the chairperson to control all the participants in the cascaded conference Using DTMF codes the chairperson can perform the following operations in a cascaded conference e Set the chairperson as the conference s exclusive speaker while muting all other conference participants e Terminate the conference e Lock or unlock the conference to dial in participants e Secure or release a secured conference e Place the conference on hold If the chairperson uses any other DTMF codes only the participants in the chairperson s local conference are affected 1 49 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Simple Ca
272. er the duration in seconds that the system waits for Input input from the participant before it is considered as an input error DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star used for Ad Hoc conferencing For a detailed description refer to the MGC The external server configuration that is defined within the Entry Queue Service is Ls Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 5 Click Next The Welcome Message dialog box opens Welcome Message x IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message IWELCMPNS ACE Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help 2 54 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II This dialog box contains a limited set of options that are identical to those defined in the VR Welcome Message dialog box If the Entry Queue Service will be used in conjunction with an IVR Service and the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference the participant will hear the Welcome message twice once in the Entry Queue and the second time in the IVR queue In such a case you can select the Welcome Message in the Entry Queue Service and disable it in the IVR Se
273. erencing Components to Implement Ad Hoc Conferencing This section describes the procedures for configuring the conferencing components necessary to implement Ad Hoc Conferencing MCU Configuration to Access the External Database Application When the MCU is working with an external database application access to the external database must be configured in the system cfg file To set the external database flags in the system configuration file In the MGC Manager application right click on the MCU icon 1 2 Click the MCU Utils option and then click Edit system cfg The SysConfig dialog box opens In the Section pane double click the EXTERNAL DB option The External DB flags are displayed in the Item Value pane SysConfig system cfg 172 22 188 40 S joe Section IP AUDIO H320 AUDIO CHAIR FECC 7120 FREE SERVICES CUSTOMER PERMISSIONS y GREET AND GUIDE IVR AUDIO PLUS FLAGS VIDEO PLUS FLAGS PEOPLE PLUS CONTENT 71 CAS PARAMETERS NET8_PARAMETERS ENCRYPTION H264 RESOURCE_REPORT_LOG MUX P kl f Item Value GE ADD Section Sub section Item m REMOVE Section Sub section Item Edit value Set value Make sysenc file 3 13 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 4 In the Item Value pane click the ENABLE_EXTERNAL_DB_ACCESS item The item s value is placed in the Edit value
274. erencing flow where the participants must be authorized before they can enter the conference created in the Ad Hoc flow e Independent of Ad Hoc conferencing where conference access is validated for all conferences running on the MCU regardless of the method in which the conference was started Conference access authentication can be implemented for all participants joining the conference or for chairpersons only MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Conference Access Validation All Participants Always Once the conference is created either via an Ad Hoc Entry Queue or a standard ongoing conference the right to join the conference is authenticated with the external database application for all participants connecting to the conference MCU ad a External fs Database D Corect i Password it Ongoing eee Conference Conference i 4 Conference Q 1D ae ID 1001 MCU Prefix in i Gatekeeper 925 FE aa Conf IVR a p a NaN n Going 9251000 7 e y ory Entry a KS Queue Name DefaultEQ Numeric ID 1000 iG Profile Parameters New Conference ID 1300 Figure 3 2 Conference Access Conference Password validation with External Database Application Joining the conference entails the following steps e When the conference is started either in the Ad Hoc flow or in the standard method all participants connecting to the conference are moved to the conference IVR q
275. erencing using a Profile Continued ee ee eee Video Protocol Annexes Select the video compression protocol for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings Auto select this option to let the system automatically select the appropriate compression method for connecting the participant to the target conference H261 the video compression standard mandatory to all codecs H263 A compression standard that provides improved video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps This standard is not supported by all endpoints If H 263 is selected in Video Switching conferences all the participants must be connected using this protocol Participants whose endpoint does not support H 263 are connected as secondary H264 a video compression standard that improves video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps H 264 is supported with the following Continuous Presence options Conference on Port COP Personal Layout and Click amp View H 264 is supported in the People channel in the same way as in a standard VSW conference The Content channel only uses H 263 Annexes are additions to the Video Format when using H 263 Video Protocol increasing the quality of the video display Select the Annexes for the Entry Queue if these annexes are used in target conferences Annexes N P and F are enabled only when defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and the Video Protocol is set to H 263 For more details on Annexes s
276. ernal Database Authentication To enable this workflow the following components must be defined in the system e A conference Profile with the new conference properties e An Entry Queue Service configured with the appropriate Numeric ID Request messages and with enabled access to the external database for authentication e An Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue with an assigned Profile e An external database application with a database containing Numeric IDs associated with participants and their relevant properties e The MCU must be configured to access the external database For more information see MCU Configuration to Access the External Database Application on page 3 13 Conference Access with External Database Authentication The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to join an existing conference The external database contains a list of participants with their assigned parameters The conference password or chairperson password entered by the participant is compared against the database If the system finds a match the participant is granted the permission to access the conference To work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to join the conference the conference IVR Service must be configured to use the external database application for authentication Conference access authentication can be performed as e Part of the Ad Hoc conf
277. ervice if an Entry Queue Service was set as default Note Select a Numeric ID enabled Entry Queue Service The system is case sensitive The same Entry Queue Service can be used for Audio Only and Video participants Cascade This check box should be cleared for Ad Hoc Entry Queues VTX 1000 Select this check box to create a VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queue Participants connecting to VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queues are initially assigned wide band resources If the endpoint is not identified as VTX the wide band resources are subsequently released 3 29 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 30 Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued eS ee eee Select this check box to enable Ad Hoc conferencing When selected and an Ad Hoc conference needs to be created the Target Conference properties are taken from the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue Note e You cannot select the Ad Hoc option if Profiles are not defined in the system The Entry Queue can be used also for standard conferencing In that case participants can be moved to target conferences with properties identical to the Target Conference Setting Properties defined in the Entry Queue Select the Profile to be used for the definition of the target conference The Profiles list includes all the profiles currently saved on the MCU For more information about Profiles see Profiles
278. es Setting an IVR Message Service as the Default Service The first IVR Service that was defined in the system is automatically set as the default IVR Service However if several services are defined for the MCU you can choose another service as the default IVR Service This default IVR Service will be used in conferences where the IVR Service function is enabled but no specific IVR Service was selected To select the default IVR Service 1 List the IVR Services defined in the system 2 Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to set as default and then click Set As Default BE IVR Msg Services iB sees Set s Defaul Delete Del Copy Print IVR Data Properties H By IVR Msg Services WE ATTENDED els Attended EQ gis Deb_EQ SHE Deb_IVR BE Demo IvR Default IVR Service lly Sg EQ60 HE reo The selected IVR Message Service appears in bold both name and icon indicating that it is the current default service 2 48 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Modifying IVR Message Service Properties You can change one or several properties of a defined IVR Service To modify the properties of an IVR Service 1 List the IVR Services defined in the system For details see Viewing IVR Message Services on page 2 47 Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to modify and then click Properties Alternatively just double click the IVR Service icon aa IVR Msg Services EE attended
279. es assigned to the group without modifying them or adding new templates to the group Click the Write check box to enable the user to view add remove and modify templates assigned to the group When checking this option the Read check box is automatically selected Leaving the Read and Write check boxes cleared means that the user will not be able to view modify or create new participant or Reservation templates In the View MCU Conferences list select one of the following options No The user will not be able to view the reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences assigned to other users of the same group Groups MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II even if the View All options are enabled in the Permissions assigned to this user Enter with Password The user will be able to view Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group if they enter the appropriate password Enter without Password The user will be able to view all Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group without any restrictions 5 Click OK The system returns to the lt User Name gt Group Assignment dialog box and adds the group to the list of groups to which the user has access rights 6 Add additional groups or click the Close button to complete the assignment procedure The User Tables Participants and Reservations
280. es or for conferences reserved on a regular basis Different messages can be created for weekdays and holidays or special announcements Up to four AV Message Services may be defined in the system The AV Message Service can be defined only after the appropriate audio and video files are prepared and converted into MGC internal format files For details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 A new AV Message Service cannot be defined while there are active conferences and reservations on the MCU To define the new AV Message Service 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Double click the MCU icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand the MCUs options 3 Ensure that there are no active conferences or reservations currently on the MCU 4 Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU Configuration icon to expand the MCUs Configuration options 5 Right click the AV Msg Services icon and then click New AV Service 2a MCU Configuration Es ie Cards ae Connections H B IVR Msg Services g MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The AV Message Service dialog box opens AY Message Service xj Name Add new file Wideo File Audio File Audio On Hold File IV Set Music Welcome Period 1 00 Cancel Only files that were downloaded and are stored in the MCU are shown in the Video File Audio file and Audio On Hold file lists If you have not downloa
281. es using a small icon and the entry name The list is displayed vertically Displays the details of each of the table entries The details are displayed in a table format allowing you to sort the list according to a selected column Displays the About window indicating the version number of the Web Server Manager application Use to move one level up in the database tree Updates the databases list used by the system when a database is added to the ODBC list via the Control Panel instead of from within the Web Server Manager application Displays changes made to the database by other users or via the MGC Database Manager particularly when modifying the Groups table Defaults MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The MGC Manager enables users to customize their system according to their needs by defining default values for users conferences participants and general system parameters These defaults can be determined for the WebCommander and MGC Manager users The default sets are stored in a centralized or local database The default sets may be defined in the WebCommander Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager application When a user defines a new conference Reservation On Going or Template or a new participant the fields display the default values taken from the active Defaults set minimizing the need to define all the parameters and allowing the user to modify specific fields as needed The default sets are
282. etting the user s access rights to various functions Permissions defined in the MGC Database Manager only include Permission Name Database Configuration Modify Defaults in Manager and Add Modify Public Filters options The rest of the system parameters are disabled and can only be used for reference purposes These Permissions are defined in the MGC WebServer Manager and cannot be modified in the MGC Database Manager By default there are five permission sets defined in the system Most of the access rights defined in the Permissions apply to the conferences run and controlled via the Web Only the Database control section applies to the MGC Manager application MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To define and modify Permissions refer to the MGC Web Server Manager User s Guide Chapter 5 Defining Permissions To define a set of permissions 1 In the Browser area right click the Permissions icon and then click Add New Permission to DB 2 The Permission Properties Settings dialog box opens Permission Properties 6 51 Chapter 6 Using a Database 3 Define the following options Table 6 4 Permission Properties Settings parameters ieee ee ee Permission Name Database Configuration Add Modify Public Filters Modify Defaults in Manager Enter the name for this set of options determining the access rights to various functions This set will be assigned to users and wi
283. eue Services This chapter also provides step by step instructions for the following procedures e Defining the general properties of the IVR software module e Defining a new IVR Service e Defining a new Entry Queue Service e Verifying the Messages Status What is an IVR Service 2 2 The IVR Service includes a set of voice prompts that allow support of multiple languages and user specific voice prompts This set is activated when a participant connects to the Polycom MCU for conference access or when certain events occur during the conference such as voting sessions Q amp A sessions requests for operator assistance and modifying self volume The IVR service is also used to enable special conferencing features such as Roll Call and SilencelT The IVR Service is assigned to specific conferences A different IVR Service can be assigned to each conference or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences If an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the caller must respond through the touch tone keypad to the voice prompts defined in the IVR Service in order to connect to the conference Different IVR Services can be created allowing customization of the menu driven scripts and voice prompts to meet different needs For video conferences a IVR Service can include a video slide that is displayed when the participants connect to an Entry Queue or an IVR queue The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service It is used
284. eues amp SIP Factories 18 3 23 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The Conference Properties General dialog box is displayed Default Conference Properties Product Management Default Conterence 3 Define the Profile parameters These parameters are identical to the Conference Template parameters For parameter details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference or the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences Ifconference access authentication with an external database application is required for this conference in the Properties Settings dialog box select an IVR service in which the External Server Authentication option is set to Always or Upon Request 3 24 ai MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II It is not recommended to enter the Conf Entry Password Chairperson Password and the conference Numeric ID in the profile as all Ad Hoc conferences initiated from the Entry Queue s to which it is assigned will have the same Numeric ID and Passwords The option for adding participants to the profile is intended for recording port and cascading link definitions Click OK to complete the Profile definition A new Profile is created and added to the Profiles list Listing Profiles The Profiles are stored on the MCU s hard disk and can be viewed u
285. eues amp SIP Factories 6 3 Right click the IVR Services icon and then click New IVR Service H m Product Management Normal H Ga MCU Configuration ig Cards ae Connections Fee BIVR Msg Services H B Network Services Operators Messages Status Properties Paste As Gtr P as He 3 GateWay Config H amp Profiles ag Recording Links aio 3 21 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 22 The IVR Global dialog box opens IVR Service Name Language for IVR ENGLISH tal External Server Authentication Number of User Input Retries Timeout for User Input DTMF Delimiter This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the IVR Service In the External Server drop down list select one of the following options Never to disable this option Upon Request to verify the Chairperson password with an external database application The validation process occurs only when the participant enters the Chairperson Identifier key pound or star All other participants are connected to the conference as standard undefined participants Always to verify the Conference Entry password or the participant s personal password with an external database application The verification process occurs for all participants attempting to join the conference Complete the definition of the IVR Ser
286. ext The Conference ID dialog box opens xl Name Request Conference Id Join failure Message Message file CNFIDROS ACA Join failure Message 7 Add Message File omes o The following messages and prompts may be played to request the conference Numeric ID Table 3 3 Conference Password parameters ea eea SSS Request Select the audio file that prompts the participant for Conference ID the conference Numeric ID Join Failure Select the audio file that requests the participant to Message re enter the conference Numeric ID when failing to enter the correct conference Numeric ID 3 19 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 9 To assign the audio file to the message type click the appropriate table entry The message type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit s memory want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page page 2 28 j If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you 10 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens x IV Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message OPERHELP AC x Add Message File Disconnection Message GOODBYE ACA x Add Message File IV Ena
287. f a second phone number is defined The chairperson password for the conference An empty field means that no chairperson password was assigned to the conference Indicates the chair control setting as follows 0 Chair control is disabled None in the Conference Properties dialog box 255 Chair control is enabled Auto in the Conference Properties dialog box The cascading mode as follows 0 None 1 Master 2 Slave 255 Auto Note This field is only relevant if the Cascade Mode is Slave The name of the participant that acts as the link to the Master conference in a cascading conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 C Sl as Number Of Undefined Parties Unlimited Reservation Flag Time Before First Party Join Time After Last Party Quit Conference Lock Flag Note This field is only relevant if the Allow Undefined Participants option is enabled The Minimum Participants for the conference that is the number of participants for which the system reserved resources in a Meet Me Per Conference conference Additional participants may join the conference without prior reservation until all the resources are utilized Indicates whether or not undefined dial in participants can connect to the conference as follows 0 Undefined participants cannot connect to the conference 1 Undefined partic
288. f the endpoint supports both interface types First select the appropriate Interface Type then define the Identification and Advanced fields and then click OK Open the Participant Properties Identification dialog box again and select another nterface Type Then define the dentification and Advanced fields Both definitions will be stored in the system s memory 11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 to define additional participants 12 Select Save Database from the Database menu or click the Save button on the Toolbar to save the changes to the database 7 41 Chapter 7 Database Templates The new Participant template is added to the selected Template Group in the Participant database iix E A Root Name Phone 1P Connection Type Channels aggregation H D office Reservation t Ra Henry fo Henry Dial in Auto Auto Sa Joe Ba Joe Dial in Auto Auto Sa Melissa a Melissa Dial in Auto Auto a polycom Debo Ga polycom Debo 29501111 Dial out 2 Yes icy Sarah ey Sarah Dial in Auto Auto Ba Tanya a Tanya Dial in Auto Auto H Polycom WebOffice weboffice_v2 Saving the Database 7 42 This option is used to save the changes made to the database tables Select this option before exiting the database or before refreshing it to prevent losing changes To save changes to the database e On the Database menu click Save Database DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9
289. f the system cfg file Implementation of Chairperson DTMF features The following chairperson DTMF actions are implemented across the MCUs e Mute all but me and unmute e Terminate the conference e Place the conference on hold and release the conference from being placed on hold e Lock and unlock the conference e Secure the conference and release a secured conference e Wait for the Chairperson Chairperson Conference Activation If chairperson activation is enabled in the Auto Cascade configuration in the MGC WebCommander Server Manager then the cascaded conference may implement the Start only when the chairperson connects and Terminate conference after the chairperson exits features provided these options are selected in the individual conferences If the Start only when the chairperson connects option is implemented participants in all conferences will be placed on hold until a chairperson joins one of the conferences If the Terminate conference after the chairperson exits option is implemented all conferences will be terminated when there is no longer a chairperson connected to a conference Terminating a Cascading Conference The system will terminate a slave conference when it no longer has any live participants and will terminate the master conference when it no longer has any live participants itself and has no slave conferences with live participants 1 61 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Set
290. ference run by an MCU defined as Slave requests the chair token from the MCU the slave MCU checks first if the chair token is assigned to another participant in its slave conference If another participant is holding the token the request for the chair token is rejected If no other participant in the conference run by the slave MCU holds the token the request is transferred to the Master MCU which checks if the chair token is free If the token is not assigned to any other participant in any conference belonging to the cascading conference the chair token is assigned to the participant If the chair token is assigned to another participant the master MCU sends a reject message to the slave MCU which in turn sends the message to the participant 5 23 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 5 24 In H 320 Master Slave cascading conferences only the 6 4 fixed rate option is available for FECC LSD In that conference when a request for the data token is invoked by an operator connected to the slave MCU the slave MCU checks if another participant possesses the data token If another participant does possess the data token the request is rejected If not the request is transferred to the Master MCU which opens the FECC LSD channel of all the participants in the Master conference When participants connect to the conference the MCU assigns a terminal number to each of them The MCU sends these numbers to all the terminals connected to the confe
291. ference to the recording system This connection is called a Recording Link Recording Links are defined on the conferencing MCU Recording can start automatically when the first participant connects to a conference or on request when the operator or chairperson initiates it Recording using a Recording Port Participant This method can only record audio not video This method can be used with any external recording system for example the Prairie system Most of this chapter describes how to record conferences using a Recording Link LY The last section of the chapter describes how to record conferences using a recording port participant For detailed information about the ReadiRecorder and the RSS 2000 including configuration instructions see the ReadiRecorder Getting Started Guide or the RSS 2000 User s Guide 9 1 Chapter 9 Recording Configuring the MCU to enable Recording To make recording possible you must set up the following components on the conferencing MCU e Recording Link defines the connection between the conference and the recording system For details see Defining a Recording Link on page 9 2 e Recording enabled IVR Service recording DTMF codes and messages must be set up in the IVR Service to enable recording related voice messages to be played and the conference chairperson to control the recording process using DTMF codes For details see Defining Recording Functions in an IVR Servic
292. ffice_v1 Qa To2_1 4 To2 Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl Line Rates Link participant Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Change the participant s name or any other parameters and then click OK The participant parameters are copied to the clipboard under the new name Right click the icon of the destination On Going Conference Reservation or Reservations template in the database and then click Paste The participant s details are copied to the destination conference or reservation under the same name dee Sales1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Cop trl C Paste Ctr Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties Alternatively click Paste As to modify the participant name or other properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Type the desired name that you wish to save the participant as and then click OK 7 25 Chapter 7 Database Templates The participant s details are copied to the destination conference or Reservation template under the new name Defining an Operator Reservation Template 7 26 To define an operator Reservation template 1 2 Open the Reservations in Database window Expand the Template Groups tree until you locate the group to which to add the Reservation template In the Groups Browser area right click the Group icon
293. fined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 T nom A i RA Ake Gan ot T Audio Only M vip Fill in the parameters in the Participant Properties Identification and Advanced tabs as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties For a definition of a participant with the T1 CAS Interface Type see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties The Participant Properties Identification fields differ according to the Interface Type selected Click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties dialog box closes and the Participant template is added to the Participant Template file rry 172 22 141 82 SIP Dial out Cag Nancy 122 22 132 116 H323 Dial in ISDN Dial in Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each new Participant template you want to add to the Participant Template file To save the changes to the Participant Template file on the Template menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button E on the toolbar Table 8 1 Participant Template Icons Participant template Audio only Participant template Audio and Video Linked participants are only available in the database and will not appear in the MGC Participant Template file and Reservation Template file Opening a Participant Template File To add modify or delete Participant templates from an existing Participant
294. g connected for this participant Connect Initiator Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Restrict Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 0 Non restricted line 1 Restricted line ATM ATM Address The ATM address Table A 22 Event Fields for Event 13 MPI CHANNEL CONNECTED C Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU A 45 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 46 Table A 22 Event Fields for Event 13 MPI CHANNEL CONNECTED Continued i ee Channels Number Channel ID Connect Initiator Called Participant Information Note This field is only relevant to multirate calls The total number of channels being connected for this participant The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the systems connect The initial channel is always 1 Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 0 Non restricted line 1 Restricted line The called participant information For a description of the fields see Table A 12 Called Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 33 Table A 23 Event Fields for Event 14 M
295. g music and noise To prevent this problem SilenceIT includes a mechanism that enables the system to measure the audio energy and based on this measurement fine tune the system usage of the SilenceIT algorithm To reliably measure the audio energy and apply the SilencelIT fine tuning mechanism speech and noise music must have sufficient energy and be consistent across all audio ports Lg MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II SilenceIT is enabled by performing the following steps e Measure the audio energy and based on this measurement configure a system cfg flag that enables the SilenceIT option for the MCU For a detailed description see Fine Tuning the SilenceIT Algorithm on page 2 71 e Enable the SilenceIT option in the IVR Message Service and select the voice messages for this feature For a detailed description see Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 23 e Optional Modify the DTMF codes assigned to the SilenceIT options in the IVR Message Service For a detailed description see Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 23 e Select the SilenceIT enabled IVR Message Service in the Conference Properties Settings tab e Select the SilenceIT option in the Conference Properties Settings tab For a description of new conference definition refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 If you select an IVR service that is not SilencelT enabled while enabling the SilencelT
296. g the procedure described above However Re activating the recording results in a new recording ID issued by Prairie Iltis not possible to play back several recordings of a conference at the same time Playback Using Prairie Systems 9 18 To initiate playback of a Prairie recording 1 The conference chairperson accesses the Prairie Systems website and enters the conference account number and the conference access password chairperson password depending on the current configuration of access requirements 2 The Prairie Systems web site displays confirmation data consisting of the unique Conference Recording ID recording date and time and a conference description The confirmation ID consists of the conference s MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II account number for example 9876543 and an additional 3 digit sequence for example 9876543001 The Conference Recording ID number is required to play a conference recording The chairperson must retrieve the Conference Recording ID for example 9876543001 and dial the Prairie s playback dial in number using the appropriate DTMF code The playback of the recorded session occurs directly between the endpoint and Prairie s system 9 19 Chapter 9 Recording 9 20 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility The Call Detail Record CDR utility enables you to view summary information about conferences and retrieve full conference information and archive it to
297. gned to the conferences accessed from the Entry Queue Direct Access In Meet Me Per Conference and Meeting Room conferences Participants simply dial the conference dial in number In this case the participants are not required to enter the conference Numeric ID and or passwords Operator Conferences gy An Operator conference allows the operator and one participant to talk without disturbing the On Going Conference The participant taking part in an Operator conference is moved out of the Entry Queue IVR queue Participant Queue or the On Going Conference to the Operator conference For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 An Operator conference must be active to enable the operator to perform various operations during an IVR enabled On Going Conference and move participants between the different IVR stages 2 5 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Operations Performed Using the IVR Service 2 6 In IVR enabled conferences various operations can be performed by the operator or the conference chairperson These operations are available only when an IVR Service is assigned to the conference using the IVR Software module The IVR software module enables the Operator to perform the following operations using the MGC Manager application or via the Web browser using the MGC WebCommander application e Individual and personal guidance of participants to the conferences e Monitor all participa
298. hairperson Web Password e Billing Code e Used Defined These additional events will only contain the value of the modified field 6001 CONFERENCE Additional information about a START CONFERENCE START event This event CONTINUE 5 contains conference encryption information For a description of the fields see Table A 8 Event Fields for Event 6001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5 on page A 29 A 17 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Event Specific Fields A 18 The following tables describe the fields which are specific to each type of event Table A 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START a Auto Terminate Conf Transfer Rate Indicates whether the conference was a standby dial out manually conference or not A standby conference is a conference in which the operator needs to connect each of the dial out or direct participants If the conference is not a standby conference the MCU initiates the communication with dial out or direct participants Possible values are 0 The conference was nota standby conference 1 The conference was a standby conference Indicates whether the conference was set to end automatically if no participant joins the conference for a predefined time period after the conference starts or if all participants disconnect from the conference and the conference is empty for a predefined time period Possible values are 0 The conference was not set to end automa
299. he Participant Template file Since it is a new Participant Template file the window is empty The title of the window PartyTemplatesFileX represents the default file name 8 3 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 3 On the Template menu click Save As Template DataBase Directory Optior New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Close Sa Gtri 5 Convert into Database Recent File The Save As dialog box opens Save in My Documents ace My eBooks Polycom My Music toc topics My Pictures My PSP8 Files My Templates My Videos File name Participants 1 Save as type Participant Files usr Cancel 4 Specify a file name and select the folder in which to save the new Participant Template file All Participant Template files are of Participants Files type and have a usr extension 5 Click the Save button The Participant Template file is saved and the window s title bar displays the name of the Participant Template file At this point you can add Participant templates to the Participant Template file Adding Participants to a Participant Template File Participant templates can be added to a Participant Template file using the following methods e Defining the participant parameters directly in the Participants Template file window 8 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining the participant during conference setup such as an On Going Conference or a Reserva
300. he MGC Manager DataBase folder and then click OK Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 10 gS One Access database may be used by both the MGC WebCommander application and the MGC Manager application provided the same database is selected for both applications If the MGC Manager is installed first select the database configured in the MGC Manager ODBC If the WebCommander Server Manager application is installed first select the database configured in the MGC WebServer application In both cases the database may be installed on a network server other than the one used for the Web Server In both cases the database must be installed on a disk defined as Shared or on one of the network disks that can be accessed by all MGC Manager and MGC WebCommander users 10 11 12 13 The system returns to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box displaying the name and path of the selected database file Click OK to return to the ODBC Data Source Administrator System DSN dialog box Click OK to confirm and exit the ODBC settings If you are registering the database in the ODBC from within the MGC Manager application an update window appears Select Yes to refresh the list of the databases available to the operator Select No to refresh the database list manually In that case the database will not be available to the user until the list is refreshed manually If you select Yes the system attempts to open all the databases regis
301. he SLNUNMTR ACA Unmute and return conference press one to the conference SilencelT To unmute your line at any time SLNUNMUT ACA Unmute reminder press pound six 2 70 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued SilencelT line is muted due to a noisy line PARTDET ACA Participant line detected as noisy Fine Tuning the SilencelT Algorithm The audio energy measurements are done by connecting an endpoint to an ongoing conference and using the IP Terminal to detect the noise speech level The values measured are then compared to the values listed in Table 2 16 on page 2 72 Based on the range of these values the user locates the corresponding parameter which is used to configure a system cfg flag To enable the SilenceIT algorithm and fine tune its operation 1 Create an ongoing conference and connect an endpoint using a noisy line 2 In the Cards section locate the audio card used to handle the participant connection to the conference and write down the slot and unit numbers 3 Using the participant s endpoint place the call on hold When the participant places the call on hold music is heard 4 Right click the MCU icon and then click IP Terminal The Donkey COM window opens 5 Inthe cmd gt field enter the following command Level g lt slot gt and then press lt Enter gt 6 Inthe command line enter AM lt slot gt lt unit gt CALCSTRMST
302. he Software CP conference are cont incompatible with the incoming video parameters 22 The participant connected with a different video bitrate when moved to a Video Switching conference 23 The outgoing video channel failed to re open in a Conference on Port conference 24 The endpoint closed its video channels 25 The participant video settings are not compatible with the conference protocol 26 The endpoint could not re open the video channel after the conference video mode was changed 27 The gatekeeper approved a lower bandwidth than requested 28 Video connection for the SIP participant is temporarily unavailable 255 Other Table A 15 Event Fields for Event 7 PARTY DISCONNECTED a Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Disconnect Cause The disconnection cause For possible values see Disconnection Cause Values on page A 69 Q931 Disconnect If the disconnection cause is No net connection or Cause Participant Hang Up then this field indicates the Q931 disconnect cause A 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 16 Event Fields for Event 2007 EVENT PARTY DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 Fc Local Sync Lost The number of times that the synchronization of the Counter MCU unit was lost Remote Sync Lost The number of times that the synchronization of the Counter participant was lost Local Video Sync
303. he connecting participant s defined encryption status the Conference Entry Queue encryption setting and the participant level flag setting Table 1 5 Participant Level Encryption Options Conference Entry Queue Conference Entry Queue Encryption Encryption Enabled Disabled Participant Level Flag Setting Participant Level Flag Setting e e efe Joins Joins Joins conference conference conference conference encrypted encrypted non encrypted non encrypted Joins Joins Cannot join conference conference conference conference encrypted encrypted encrypted Cannot join Joins Joins conference conference conference conference non encrypted non encrypted non encrypted Move Guidelines e When participants are moved to another conference their encryption settings and the MUX IP resources are evaluated to determine if the move is permitted If not the move fails and the participants remain in their original conference e In Video Switching conferences the encryption setting of the moved ISDN participant must be identical to the destination conference s encryption setting IP participants can move from encrypted to non encrypted conferences and from non encrypted to encrypted conferences e When the Participant Level flag is set to YES participants can move between conferences that have different encryption settings for example From an encrypted conference to a non encrypted conference or another encrypted conference
304. he contents of fields in the unformatted text file but does not reflect the exact contents of the formatted text file MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information Viewing the Conference Records You can use one of the two following methods to start the CDR utility and display the list of conference records Open the CDR utility from the Start menu Open the CDR utility through the MGC Manager right click menu To open the CDR utility from the Start menu 1 From the Start menu select Programs MGC Manager Ver 8 0 and then click CDR The CDR List window opens List of MCUs Connect Disconnect Icon Icon MGC Manager CDR 15 x onnection View Help MCU is not selected ze 2 Name Start Time Duration Reserved Start Time Reserved Dur GMT Of Status Ej For Help press F1 No From the MCUs list select the MCU whose conference records you wish to view The Connect icon is enabled Click the Connect icon 10 5 Chapter 10 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 10 6 The Logon dialog box opens 4 Enter your login name and password and then click OK The window displays the list of conference records currently stored in the MCU s memory CDR List Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 File Connection View Help E Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 7 2 Connected to Prod Mgmt heme lsat Time _ bursti
305. he dialog box should be closed using the Cancel button and not the OK button e Once the conference is extended beyond the initial 99 59 hours incorrect duration is displayed in the conference properties and the value switches between 99 59 and 99 29 e Each time the conference is extended an event is added to the CDR file until 1 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Cascading Conferences oy Cascading enables operators to run two or more conferences as one conference thereby allowing very large conferences The conferences that are part of a cascading conference may be run e On the same MCU to overcome the maximum number of participants per conference 30 participants when using the standard Audio card e On separate MCUs to utilize additional resources or to connect participants to their local MCU The MGC unit supports cascading conferences with the following capabilities e Simple Cascading ISDN Linking of two conferences using an ISDN connection e Simple Cascading H 323 Linking of two conferences using an IP address for connection e Enhanced Cascading H 323 Linking two conferences using an Alias for the IP connection H 243 and MIH Cascading modes are also available For H 243 Cascading Conferences see Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Simple Cascading Modes In cascaded conferences MCUs are networked together using two modes e MCU Cluster used for MCUs at different locations e M
306. he participant that was removed from the Q amp A queue Next Q amp A Indicates that a participant is the next questioner Questioner This message is played only to the participant who is the next in line to ask a question so he or she can get ready 2 33 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Secure ON Indicates that the conference status has changed to Secure This message is played to the conference when the chairperson secures the conference In this mode the conference cannot be joined by any new participant or by the operator the operator cannot monitor participants but can terminate the conference Note The conference can be secured and unsecured by the chairperson via DTMF codes For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 Secure OFF Indicates that the conference status has reverted from a Secure conference to a normal conference This message is played to the conference when the chairperson cancels the Secure mode Requires Indicates that a chairperson is required to start the Chairperson conference This message is played when participants join the conference before the chairperson Note This message is played only when the Start Conference Requires Chairperson option is selected in the conference Properties Settings dialog box First to Join the Informs that the participant is the first person to join Conferenc
307. hold has to follow the usual connection process and must record their name However when the participant enters the conference on hold their name is not played to the conference Only when the conference is reinstated and the on hold state is revoked the chairperson can request a roll call The list of played names will then include the participants who connected to the conference while it was on hold Admittance During a Roll Call When participants join or leave the conference during an on going Roll Call the corresponding announcement is played immediately thereby interrupting the on going Roll Call When the Roll Call is resumed the name of the participant who left the conference is skipped not played No Other Participants Indication When the chairperson asks for a Roll Call and there are no other participants in the conference at that time the chairperson will hear only his or her name Enabling Roll Call The Roll Call option is available to all conferences to which a Roll Call enabled IVR Service is assigned Roll Call has to be enabled or disabled at the conference level However if the Roll Call option is not enabled in the IVR Message Service it cannot be activated for the conference For more details on enabling Roll Call during a conference and a list of Roll Call DTMF options refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 2 9 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Using SilencelT 2 10
308. ibed in Defining a New AV Message Service on page 4 6 4 Click OK to confirm If you have selected a different audio and or video file the MCU must be reset for the changes to take effect 4 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Deleting a Message Service from the Message Services List Use this option to delete an AV Message Service from the list This option is useful if you want to define a new Message Service and you have exceeded the four allowed Message Services or if you want to replace an existing Message Service To delete a Message Service from the AV Message Service list 1 View the AV Message Services as described in Listing the AV Message Services on page 4 10 2 Right click the icon of the AV Message Service and then click Delete Properties A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation 4 13 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Defining an Attended Wait or Welcome No Wait Conference There are two types of Greet and Guide conferences Attended Wait and Welcome No Wait 4 14 In an Attended Wait conference upon connection to the MCU the participant enters the Greeting stage In this stage the participants are transferred to the Participants Queue where they view the video slide and hear the audio message The welcome video slide and audio message are defined in the AV Message Service assigned to the
309. icipant Defaults set currently loaded in the database For more details regarding the Default sets refer to Chapter 6 Managing the Defaults Sets on page 6 47 7 17 Chapter 7 Database Templates d Define the participant Name Interface Type and all required Identification parameters For a detailed description of the Identification parameters for the ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties For a detailed description of the Identification parameters for T1 CAS interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties e To save the participant to the database and define it as a linked participant select the Participant Linked check box at the bottom left corner of the dialog box If this check box is cleared the participant will be an embedded participant f Click the Advanced tab and define the required parameters For a detailed description of the Advanced parameters for the ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties For a detailed description of the Advanced parameters for T1 CAS interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties g To save the new participant to the database select the Save
310. icipant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the system the participant is disconnected from the MCU If the correct conference password is entered the participant is prompted to enter the chairperson identifier key If no identifier is entered the participant is connected to the conference as a standard participant If the chairperson identifier is entered the participant is prompted to enter the chairperson password When the participant enters the chairperson password or his her personal password it is sent to the external database application for validation Ifthe password is incorrect and the Operator s Assistance option is enabled the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the system the participant is disconnected from the MCU If there is a match the participant is granted the right to join the conference as chairperson In addition the external database application sends to the MCU the following parameters Participant name display name Participant Information such as the participant E mail These fields correspond to Info 1 2 3 and 4 fields in the Participant Properties Information dialog box To enable conference access validation for all participants the following conferencing components are required The external database must hold the Chairper
311. icipants The number of channels as follows 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 The band width of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a band width of 1B which is the only band width that is currently supported The name of the Network Service An empty field indicates the default Network Service Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or not relevant A 39 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 40 Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY Continued al Cane Voice Mode Number Type Net Sub Service Name Number of Party Phone Numbers Indicates the participant s Audio Only setting as follows 0 The participant is not an Audio Only participant 1 The participant is an Audio Only participant 255 Unknown Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The name of the Network sub service An empt
312. icipants or Reservations template windows This operation is useful when you want to add the a group without accessing the Database Manager Groups option To add a Template Group to the Reservation or Participant database 1 Open the Reservation or Participant database MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Reservations or Participants in Database window opens I cx CE Root Name LineRate Audiodlg Video Session Meet Me Office Reservation te H w Polycom Office Reservation w WebOffice Polycom weboffice_v2 WeboOffice SER amm alpha 1 weboffice_v2 feb CP conf ai 2B Auto J G 67221 alpha 21 iat Sizkbps Auto i H 323 conf alpha 17 Eber alpha 21 384 kbps 24 G722 1 Sir Ea H323 cnf alpha 22 haz confalpha17 128kbps 16 G728 Siren7 J H323 Lecture Mode irz cnfalpha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 ey Lecture Show aipha t prz Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Fe FE Ee A Transcoding Continuous Presence Video Switching Video Switching Video Switching Continuous Presence 2 Right click the Group icon to which you want to add a sub group and then click New Group on the pop up menu Ee New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print All Paste Ctrley Paste As Ctrl P The New Group dialog box opens Name Marketing us Note the group will be added immediatly when pressing OK and not when saving the database Cancel 3 Type the group name and the
313. icipants upon their connection to Chairperson the conference Invite IP ISDN and MPI Video participants to join the Chairperson conference Invite other Audio participants to join the conference Chairperson in an Audio Only conference Start and stop recording 2 7 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Using Roll Call 2 8 The Roll Call feature is used in IVR Message Services to record the participant s name and play it back when the participant enters or leaves a conference The purpose of Roll Call is to ensure that all required participants are present and to identify the participants to one another A participant connecting to the conference is asked to record their name The system records the name and plays the recorded name when the participant enters and leaves the conference During an IVR enabled conference the chairperson can request the system to play the names of all connected participants at the beginning of the conference or at any time during the conference The IVR system plays the recorded list of conference attendees one after the other in the order that they entered the conference The recordings are played to all the conference participants The basic flow of Roll Call comprises these stages 1 The participants connect to the conference and are requested to record their name 2 The participants record their name The recording is automatically terminated after two seconds 3 The system p
314. ideo card This card is required to use the Click amp View application from the participants video endpoints For a detailed description of the Click amp View application see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 11 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining the IVR Module Properties The audio messages and prompts played to participants can be recorded in different languages You can create VR Message Services and Entry Queue Services for different languages and assign them to different conferences allowing the participants who connect to the conference to hear the messages in their preferred language The language settings are per Service and therefore are the same for a given conference that is all the participants in the same conference or in the same Entry Queue will hear audio messages and prompts in the selected language one language only The IVR Properties function enables you to define the list of languages that will be used in all services While setting the properties for the new service you select the language to be used from the list of languages defined in the Properties function Several IVR Messages can use the same language but only one language can be selected for an IVR Message Service or an Entry Queue Service The Properties function also enables you to select the audio file to be used for each message type for each language and download it to the MCU memory IVR Properties are defined
315. ility does not require prior setting of the line rate during the conference setup A participant can be connected at any line rate up to the line rate that was set for the conference For example if the conference line rate is set to 6B the participant can be connected at a line rate between 2B to 6B Bonding or H 221 according to the endpoint capability This option is advantageous when the participant s endpoint capabilities are unknown at the time of the conference setup especially when defining a Transcoding or a Continuous Presence conference The Auto Rate Detect option is applicable to defined participants in standard conferences This option is not applicable to IP ATM and MPI participants When the Auto Rate Detect feature is enabled MGC Manager automatically identifies the following parameters for incoming calls e H 221 aggregation from 2B to 6B restricted and non restricted using the same CLI number for all channels e Video Protocol H 261 H 263 and H 264 e Bonding from 128 Kbps to 384 Kbps restricted and non restricted e Voice Only e CIF QCIF Frame Rate Setting up of automatic line rate detection is done on the participant level for each endpoint during the participant properties setup For a detailed description of the participant definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To enable Auto Rate
316. ined as template or assigned to the Meeting Room The definition of the cascading Links can be used for auto cascading and for simple cascading Use this procedure also to create a Dial out Link from one Conference Running on the MGC to the Conference Running on the RMX In the MGC Manager application define a new participant as follows 1 In the Participant Properties Identification dialog box enter a Participant Name 2 Inthe Connection Type field select Dial out In the Interface Type list field select H 323 4 There are two methods to define the dialing string to the other conference a Using the MCU s IP Address and the Alias string b Using only the Alias string requires a gatekeeper Method A If no gatekeeper is used In the JP Address field enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of the MCU hosting the destination conference in the example MCU B In the Alias Name Type field enter the ID of the cascade enabled Entry Queue EQ the Conference ID and Password of the destination conference MCU B as follows EQ ID Destination Conference ID Password Password is optional For Example 78485 24006 1234 cascade enabled Destination Password optional EQ ID Conference ID 1 63 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 64 6 Method B Using a gatekeeper In the Alias Name field enter the Prefix of MCU B EQ ID Destination Conference ID and Password as follows MCU Prefix EQ
317. ing State dialog box displays the name of the participant who currently holds the chair token and acts as the conference chairperson Slave 1 Properties Product Management a xi General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Recording Conference Status r FECC LSD FECC LSD Token Holder None FECC LSD Rate T Empty I7 One Participant At Most Not Ful m aa iaee IT Resources Deficiency The name of the I Down Speed Chair Control soe Chair Token Holder p articip ant or Recording None MCU Name Product Management MCU holding the Chair token Audio Source Withdraw Chair Token Alar Exclusive Speaker None PRET eis Used to tent r Current Cascade Mode nl withdraw the pas chair token from Withdraw Content Token the e ndpo int Refresh Video currently holding it oK Cancel a The Chair Control box displays the name of the participant holding the chair token If the chair token is currently not assigned to any participant the name of the MCU appears in the Chair Control box None indicates that the Chair Control option was disabled during the conference setup Clicking on the Withdraw Chair Token button enables you to withdraw the chair token from a participant and return it to the MCU In that case the participant loses the ability to control the conference This is usually done wh
318. ing to the conference Numeric ID his her parameters as defined in the database can be sent to the MCU in the same response granting the participant the right to start a new ongoing conference These parameters are Conference Name Conference Billing code Conference Password Chairperson Password Conference Information such as the contact person name These fields correspond to Info 1 2 and 3 fields in the Conference Properties Information dialog box Maximum number of participants allowed for the conference Conference Owner These parameters can also be defined in the conference Profile In such a case parameters sent from the database overwrite the parameters defined in the Profile If these parameters are not sent from the external database to the MCU they will be taken from the Profile A new conference is started based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue The participant is moved to the conference If no password request is configured in the Conference IVR Service assigned to the conference the participant that initiated the conference is directly connected to the conference as its chairperson If the Conference IVR Service assigned to the conference is configured to prompt for the conference password and chairperson password without external database authentication the participant has to enter these passwords in order to join the conference Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and Ext
319. ion parameters see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Participant Level Monitoring To monitor Software CP conference participants 1 In the Browser area expand the list of participants in the On Going Conference list Alternatively right click the On Going Conferences icon and select Monitor In the Browser Monitor or Status area right click the participant icon and then click Properties The participant s Properties dialog box opens Click the Connection Infol tab The Participant Properties Connection Infol dialog box opens Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Info2 Member In I7 Audio T120 J FECC I7 Video Content Participant State Disconnect Channels Status M Audio out Video in 28 9 M Video out 119 8 O Content in O Content out O 1120 in 0 00 0 00 oo op These columns provide information regarding the synchronization process with the endpoint A checked box indicates problems in a stage of the synchronization process The counter indicates the number of times the system tried to synchronize Channel Info gt gt JT rvideo syne loss I Content Token I video syne loss I FECC Token The window in the video layout where the participant is indicated by the blue box The names of the participants as viewed by thi
320. ip the General Welcome message Message for example if the participant already heard the message in the Entry Queue Message to be played when the participant first connects to the conferencing service and enters the conference IVR queue without connecting through an Entry Queue The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type Add Message File If you have not downloaded the audio files prior to the definition of the IVR Service click the button to download the audio file now For instructions see step 8 on page 2 28 Conference Select this option to enable a conference specific Welcome Message message When cleared no message is played when the participant enters the conference If you have enabled the conference specific message select the message the participant will hear when connecting to the conference The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type If you have not downloaded the audio files prior to the definition of the IVR Service click the Add Message File to download the audio file now For instructions see step 8 on page 2 28 On Hold for When you select this option participants are Operator automatically placed on hold when connecting and Assistance wait for the operator to move them to the destination conference While on hold participants hear background music if this feature is ena
321. ipant level flag is set to NO only the encrypted participants from an encrypted Entry Queue can join the target conference If the target conference is not encrypted and the participant level flag is set to YES encrypted and non encrypted participants from both encrypted and non encrypted Entry Queues can join the target conference If the target conference is not encrypted and the participant level flag is set to NO only non encrypted participants can join the target conference stage LS Enabling encryption for Entry Queues can only be done at the setup reservation 1 35 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To enable encryption for the Entry Queue Inthe Entry Queue Properties dialog box select the Encryption check box Entry Queue Properties Product Management x r Entry Queue Settings Name Entry Queue Service Ea Numeric ID I Cascade F Tx 1000 r Target Conference Settings I AdHoc Audio Alg Auto X Profile z Video Format auto m Target Conferences I Audio Only Frame Rate auto v I IP Ony Video Protocol Auto z Annex N F Annex P To Annex F Video Switching y Line Rate je H I Restricted Transcoding Continuous Presence ES E Dial in Number 1 Diakin Number 2 Cancel Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level You can select the encryption mode for each of the defined participants E
322. ipant lines that were detected as noisy Select the Enable SilenceIT check box to enable the SilenceIT feature for the conference The SilenceIT Menu and Unmute and Return to Conference check Silencelt feature boxes become selected as these messages are mandatory for the Select audio files for the mandatory messages Select the check boxes of any optional messages you wish to enable and select the required audio files If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 2 43 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 44 Table 2 11 IVR Properties SilencelT Options and Messages SilencelT Message SilencelT Menu Unmute and Return to Conference Adjust SilencelT Sensitivity and Unmute Disable SilencelT and Unmute Return to the Conference Muted Description Played when a participant returns to the conference after having placed the phone line on hold Notifies participants that the line has been muted and indicates which DTMF code they should enter to listen to the available options The default voice message is Your line has been muted due to a noisy line For list of available options press nine Note This message is mandatory Indicates which DTMF code participants should enter
323. ipant who was disconnected from the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 37 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 OPERATORS DELETE PARTY OPERATOR DISCONNECTED PARTY OPERATOR RECONNECT PARTY on page A 59 An operator updated the properties of a participant during the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY on page A 38 An operator modified the conference end time For a description of the fields see Table A 38 Event Fields for Event 106 OPERATOR SET END TIME on page A 60 An operator moved a participant from the conference to another conference For a description of the fields see Table A 39 Event Fields for Events 107 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY on page A 60 An operator moved a participant to the conference from another conference For a description of the fields see Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE on page A 60 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY OPERATOR ON HOLD PARTY OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE An operator moved a participant from the conference to an Operator conference Attended confere
324. ipants can connect to the conference Note This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate option is enabled Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse from the time the conference starts without any participant connection to the conference before the conference is automatically terminated by the MCU Note This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate option is enabled Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse after the last participant has disconnected from the conference before the conference is automatically terminated by the MCU Indicates the conference lock setting as follows 0 The conference is not locked for dial in participants 1 The conference is locked for dial in participants A 25 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 26 Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 ae eee Max Parties In Conference Audio Board ID Audio Unit ID Video Board ID Video Unit ID Data Board ID Data Unit ID Attended Welcome AV Message Service Name The maximum number of participants that can connect to the conference at one time The value 65535 auto indicates that as many participants as the MCU s resources allow can connect to the conference up to the maximum possible for the type of conference The slot number of the Audio card handling the participant audio channel or 65535 if there is no audio resource forcing The unit number Bri
325. ir telephone or endpoint s remote control participants input the required information to menu driven scripts and voice prompts that are part of the IVR Service Once the correct information is entered the participants are connected to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The IVR Service is assigned at the conference level and different conferences can use different IVR Services or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences Entry Queue Access Entry Queue Access is a call routing method in which all participants with the same conference properties dial the same dial in number This dial in number is assigned to the Entry Queue Participants are guided to the conference using menu driven scripts that are part of the Entry Queue Service Touch tone signals DTMF codes are the user input to voice prompts The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service and behaves in the same way The target conference must have the same properties as the Entry Queue therefore several Entry Queues can be created to accommodate different conference settings However a Video Entry Queue can be used also for audio only conferences and you do not need to define a separate Entry Queue for Audio Only conferences The Entry Queue enables you to use a limited number of dial in numbers for all the conferences and to use toll free numbers for conferences which are charged to the meeting organizers An IVR Service can also be assi
326. irperson identifier is entered the participant is requested to enter the chairperson password In this flow the chairperson password is not validated with the external database application only with the MCU Ifthe correct chairperson password is entered the participant is connected to the conference as its chairperson Ifthe wrong password is entered and the Operator s Assistance option is enabled the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the MCU the participant cannot be assisted and he she cannot be connected to the conference To enable conference access validation for all participants the following conferencing components are required The external database must hold the conference password or the participant personal password PIN code participant s Alias or CLI The conference IVR Service assigned to the conference must be configured to authenticate the participant s right to access the conference with the external database application for all requests In addition it must be configured to prompt for the Conference Password MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Conference Access Validation Chairperson Only Upon Request An alternative validation method at the conference level is checking only the chairperson password with the external database application All other participants can be checked only with the MCU if the Conference
327. is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star 6 Click Next The Welcome Message dialog box opens Welcome Message q x IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message IWELCMPNS ACE Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help To set the Entry Queue to Attended mode select the On Hold for Operator Assistance check box All participants connecting to this Entry Queue will be automatically placed in the participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference 3 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II This dialog box contains a limited set of options that are identical to those defined in the VR Welcome Message dialog box If the Entry Queue Service will be used in conjunction with an IVR Service and the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference the participant will hear the Welcome message twice once in the Entry Queue and the second time in the IVR queue In such a case you may select the Welcome Message in the Entry Queue Service and disable it in the IVR Service 7 Define the appropriate parameters For a detailed description of the parameters see Table 2 4 on page 2 27 8 Click N
328. is selected in the IVR Welcome Message dialog box Disconnection If the Enable Operator Assistance on Password Failure Message option is disabled select the audio file to be played when the participant enters an incorrect password and is to be disconnected from the conference Click Next The Roll Call dialog box opens Roll Call xj IV Enable Roll Call Name Messagefie O Roll Call Record namercrd aca Roll Call Verify Record terectd aca Roll Call Confirm Record nameis aca Roll Call Enter to Conference _ joined aca Roll Call Exit from Conference left aca Roll Call Start Names Review rollcall aca Roll Call Exit from v Add Message File Eee The Roll Call feature of the IVR Message Service is used to record the participants names for playback when the participants join and leave a conference Participants connecting to the conference are asked to record their name In addition the chairperson can request the Roll Call of all connected participants To enable the Roll Call feature select the Enable Roll Call check box 2 39 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 26 To assign the audio file to the message type click the appropriate table entry The Message Type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit memory If the Roll Call option is enabled all its message types must be assigned the appropriate audio
329. istrator s Guide Chapter 2 MGC Unit Software Installation 6 31 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 32 Log in to the Database Manager as described in the previous procedure If this is the first time you are logging in to the application since it was upgraded a popup window is displayed Manager version x A There are databases that are not updated with the new MGC database structure Do you want to update them now Le Select Yes to automatically update the database recommended or No to leave the database unchanged If you select No new entries to the database will not be saved when using the new Database Manager application version If you selected Yes the UpdateDB dialog box is displayed informing you which databases require updating The following dB s are not updated with the new accord dB Please choose the dB s that you want to Update AccordDB Sys DSN C Program Files MGC Manager ver 4 0 Database AccordAccess mdb If the list contains more than one database you can clear the check marks of databases you do not want to update Click the Apply button to update the selected databases A warning message recommending backup of the database before upgrading appears IT x Warning it is strongly recommended to Backup your db befor updating Do you want to continue with update Yes No MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 5 Click Yes to continue the update process or
330. k Defining H 323 Cascading Conference Participants The conference name is automatically added to an outgoing H 323 call as an H 323 ID in the call setup message The message H 323 ID is then defined as an H 323 alias that matches all incoming parties to the conference In case the conference name is designated as numeric the H 323 Network Service Properties stores the Gatekeeper Prefix of the card that is used to define the Alias Name in the Participant Properties e Set the Alias Type to E 164 format in the Participant Properties 1 55 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Enhanced Cascading with H 323 Links 1 56 Enhanced Cascading enables you to set up links between cascading conferences using aliases and the Prefix of the IP Network Service instead of the IP address of the IP card When the Prefix is used the conference name is added to the IP Network Service Prefix as the dial out string for the outgoing H 323 call In this case the alias is defined in the H323ID format If the destination conference name includes only numeric values the alias is comprised of the prefix number and the conference name Therefore the alias type should be set to E 164 Enhanced cascading using aliases is enabled in the system cfg in the H323 GK FLAGS Section by setting the flag H323_ENABLE_CONFERENCE_DIALIN_IDENTIFY NO to YES You can start the Enhanced Cascading conferences in the same way as Simple Cascading confe
331. k e zealako ay Prod Mgmt Normal EEIE mcu configuration On Going Conferences 4 i Conference A ukn 8 Link In 2 I Conference C Linkin from cont b ra Conference D Lk out to conf Single Participant Single Participant Network PhaneliP Jan 26 2004 14 09 58 Jan 26 2004 14 Jan 26 2004 14 21 Jan 26 2004 14 23 42 Jan 26 2004 16 09 58 Jan 26 2004 16 10 01 Jan 26 2004 16 21 00 Jan 26 2004 16 23 42 ED conference B Prod Mgmt 1D 3763 ukow k conterence C Prod Mgmt ID 3768 Linkin from conf c ukowz conference D Prod Mgmt ID 3769 3 Link Out to Conf C D gt connected D gt connected Single Participant D gt Connected D gt connected D gt connected Single Participant D gt connected M996 996 P 99 99 M998 998 P 99 99 M999 999 P 99 99 7087998 5 19 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Managing a Cascading Conference A cascaded conference is started in the same way as a standard conference Before the linking participant is connected each conference is run as a standard separate conference Once the connection between two or more conferences is established the MCUs exchange messages establishing the status of each conference as either a Master or a Slave conference The MCUs also recognize and assign a number to each terminal participating together in the conference If one conference is set as Auto and the
332. k OK The Database Manager window opens displaying the database icon 4 DatabaseManager ersion E iol x File Edit View Options Help 4 AccordDB Name Selected Defaut HE svt4 6 Private amp Global Upgrading from a Previous Version When upgrading from a previous version of the Database Manager the old database is saved during the installation procedure If there are discrepancies in the number of fields between the old and the new database the system queries whether to update the database to the new format The system automatically saves the network cards circuit ID assignments during the upgrade process and restores Reservations after the software upgrade However it is recommended that you document the order of the network cards and their circuit ID assignments as well as back up the reservations using the Reservation Backup utility prior to the MCU upgrade For more details regarding this utility see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Reservations Backup and Restore prior to the upgrade To upgrade the Database Manager from a previous version MGC Manager Version 7 5 can be used only when a hardware key dongle is installed on the MCU Before installing this software version and downloading the MCU software version you must install the dongle on the MCU For more information please contact Polycom support 1 Follow the directions for upgrading the Database Manager in the MGC Admin
333. k the MGC Manager Default icon A pop up menu appears MGC Manager Defaults Add MGC Manager Defaults 2 Click Add MGC Manager Defaults The MGC Manager Defaults dialog box opens MGC Manager Defaults E Name J Owner r General Defaults I Save Participant J Linked Party I Linked Party Message r Conference Templates In DB I Show Time In DB Conference Templates I Show Past Time As Current Time Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the defaults set 4 The Owner field displays the name of the user to whom the MGC Manager Default set is assigned This field is disabled for users with no permission to modify write database tables Users with Administrator permission can read and write all database tables can assign the defaults set to any registered user 6 45 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 Define the following parameters Table 6 3 MGC Manager Default options a os General Defaults Save Participant When enabled the Save Participant check box appears in the Participant Properties dialog box enabling the user to save the participant properties to the Participant template database Linked Party When enabled the Linked Participant check box appears in the Participant Properties dialog box enabling the user to save the participant properties to the database When disabled participants defined during conference definition are embedded participants only For
334. late file 1 Open the Reservation Template file 2 Inthe Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conferences List icon A list of Reservation templates appears below the Conferences List icon 3 Double click the icon of the Reservation template whose participants you want to list or click the plus icon next to the Reservation Template icon A list of the participants assigned to the Reservation template appears below its icon The participants are identified by their names W ResTemplates video audio and operator ca 3 Conferences List a gg r sie Polycom Audio Conference Ta Polycom Operator Conference ca pe 4 gt Polycom Video Conference Ea Poly 8 25 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 26 To list the participants in a Reservation Template in the Reservation database 1 Open the Reservation database 2 In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree until you locate the group in which the desired Reservation template is stored 3 Expand the Group icon where the Reservation template is stored The list of Reservation templates assigned to the group is displayed 4 Double click the icon of the Reservation template whose participants you want to list or click the plus icon next to the Reservation Template icon A list of participants is displayed Root
335. lates 7 34 When adding a linked participant a pointer to the Participant template is added to the reservation without copying its data to the reservation When modifying the properties of a linked participant in one reservation or in a template its properties are also modified in all the reservations to which the participant is linked and in the Participant template if changes are made in the reservation Participants who are embedded in a reservation do not appear as an entry in the Participant database list and cannot be viewed in the Participants window of the database They can only be viewed as part of the reservation in the Reservations window of the database These participants can be copied from one reservation to another The participants retain their embedded characteristics and are considered as unique participant definitions When you modify the properties of embedded participants this affects only those participants and not participant occurrences in other reservations Adding a Linked Participant Adding a linked participant to a Reservation template can be performed by using one of the following methods e Drag and drop the Participant icon from the Participant in Database window onto the Reservation icon in the Reservations in database window e Select the Participant templates from the database during the definition of the Reservation template in the database in the Conference Properties Participant di
336. lay one after the other as a single menu The grouping of two audio files into one Help menu can be done for the Chairperson Help menu and also for the Participant Help menu If you configure two help menu messages the two messages are heard in sequence as one menu Menu 1 is the first file to be played Note If you intend to modify the default DTMF codes the default voice message files for the help menus that are shipped with the system will have to be replaced with new recordings that list the new DTMF codes The help menus are usually recorded by the conferencing service provider as voice messages and are configured like any other voice message in the system Chairperson Help The audio file containing additional DTMF codes that Menu 2 can be used by the chairperson when two help menu messages are recorded for the chairperson operation This file is played after the file assigned to the Chairperson Help Menu 1 2 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Participant Help The audio file listing DTMF codes that can be used Menu 1 by the ordinary participant The voice message that can be recorded for one Help file is limited to 30 seconds To overcome this limitation you can have two audio files played one after the other as a single menu Menu 1 is the first file to be played Participant Help The audio file listing additional DTMF codes that can Menu 2 be use
337. lays the recorded name to the participant and asks for confirmation by pressing a pre configured key or the participant can record his her name again Playing the Roll Call Confirm Record message to participants is optional The Roll Call Confirmation message is not played to the participant when the flag ROLL_CALL_CONFIRMATION YES default located in the GREET AND GUIDE IVR section of the system cfg is set to NO 4 Once the participant confirms the recording the system connects the participant to the conference and announces his her name to the connected participants 5 During the conference the chairperson can request a roll call using the appropriate DTMF code from the endpoint s input device The system plays back the recorded names of the participants to all the conference participants one after the other in the order that they entered the conference All participants get to hear the announced names list The chairperson can end the Roll Call playback at any time by entering the appropriate DTMF code from the endpoint s input device 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When a participant leaves or is disconnected from the conference participants remaining in the conference hear an audio message announcing the name of the participant that has left the conference Roll Call can be activated during different conference statuses Conference On Hold A participant who accesses a conference that was placed on
338. led The Video Welcome Slide appears when an endpoint connects to a conference Select the video slide file to be displayed when the participant connects to the conference Select None if no Video slide is to be displayed If the video slide file was not downloaded to the MCU prior to the IVR Service definition click the Add Slide button The nstall File dialog box opens The downloading process is similar to the downloading of audio files see step 8 on page 2 28 Note Slides can be viewed only if the ENABLE_IP_SLIDE flag has been set to YES in the system cfg file SIP participants cannot view the slides the MGC internal format For a detailed description refer to the MGC Manager j Like audio files the video slides must be prepared in advance and converted into Administrator s Guide Audio and Video Conversion Tools 31 Click Next 2 42 32 33 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The SilencelT dialog box opens SilenceIT xj IV Enable SilencelT I7 SilencelT Menu 17 Unmute and Return to Conference I Retum to Conference Muted I Unmute Reminder I Disable SilencelT and Unmute I Participant Detected as Noisy Roll Call dependant option allmute aca x Add Message File slnunmtr aca x Add Message File Add Message File lt Back Next gt Cancel The SilencelIT feature of the IVR Message Service is used to automatically mute the partic
339. level by setting the flag ALLOW_ENCRYPT_IN_PARTY_LEVEL in the ENCRYPTION section of the system cfg file to YES or NO as follows Table 1 4 Participant Level Encryption According to Flag Settings ParticipantLevel Encryption is Enabled Encryption is Disabled for Flag Settings for the Conference the Conference Encryption is determined Encryption is determined at at the participant level the participant level therefore therefore encrypted and encrypted and non encrypted non encrypted participants participants can join the can join the conference conference 1 33 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Table 1 4 Participant Level Encryption According to Flag Settings ParticipantLevel Encryption is Enabled Encryption is Disabled for Flag Settings for the Conference the Conference Encryption is determined Encryption is determined at at the conference level the conference level therefore therefore only encrypted only non encrypted participants can join the participants can join the conference conference Encrypted participants cannot be moved from an encrypted Entry Queue to this conference parties Mixing encrypted and non encrypted endpoints in one call is supported The flag ALLOW_ENCRYPT_IN_PARTY_LEVEL does not apply to ISDN Ly only for H 323 defined participants Enabling Encryption at the Conference Level Encryption at the conference level is set during the conference definition and cannot be chang
340. lick the plus icon next to the Groups icon to expand the Groups tree 3 Repeat this procedure on all the Root Group and sub groups until you locate the required Reservation template 4 Double click the plus icon next to the desired Reservation template icon This displays the participants below the Reservation template and also in the Status area of the window P Reservations in AccordDB 5 x EB Root Name Phone 1P_ Connectio Channels Aggregation H Polycom Group tn H User Bag Oule K 172 22 13 Dial out al User Group 2 Emran 79320 Dial out Auto Auto H ia International TW Gag Nichelle 172 22 13 Dial out fe Nadine 172 22 13 Diakin ae Duke Knoop ae Frank os Michelle bo Nadine Ss Default Audio fob Default_video fob SW CP fob Video Switch i weboffice_at ia weboffice_v1 7 21 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 22 The following icons are used to indicate the participant type st indicates a Linked participant a Lo indicates an Embedded participant For more information refer to the section Adding Participants to a Reservation Template on page 7 33 To copy the participant properties from a Database Reservation template 1 2 4 Open the Reservations in Database window Expand the Template Groups tree until you locate the Reservation template containing the participant that you wish to copy Double click the Reservation template icon
341. ll Girit Cirie Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management ix General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Farce Meet Me Per Conf Recording Name Slave 1 Conf Entry Password l Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password l Billing Numeric ID l MCU Product Management a User Defined 1 DOO J Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 j IV Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 rr Conference Type Media r Supported Network Video Session Standard Audio C IP Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI C Operator Continuous Presence Classic z Remarks Update Remark Remarks History Type the Slave conference name in the Name field Fill in the rest of the General tab fields as described in the MGC User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters Click the Participants tab to add participants to the Slave Conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Identification Advanced Name Slave Conference 1 Connection Type Interface Type Dial out x H323 w Participant IP Signaling Port 172 22 133 67 i720 Alias Name Alias Type J H323 ID x Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined
342. ll determine their access rights Determines whether the user will be able to configure the administrator s tables Defaults MCUs Labels Permissions Users and Groups in the database via the Web Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager in the MGC Manager application when both applications use the same database This option should be enabled for a Permission that will be assigned to an Administrator Determines whether the user will be able to create and modify public filters Determines whether the user will be able to read the various default sets from the database add new defaults to the database or modify the existing default sets in the database from the MGC Database Manager or the MGC Web Server Manager applications Owned Users can view and or modify the default sets assigned to them while saving the default sets to the database All Users can view and or modify all the default sets in the database while saving the default sets 4 Click OK to confirm and add the new Permission to the database 6 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing the Permissions List 1 Inthe Browser area click the Permissions icon The Permissions list is displayed in the Status area in a table format g DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 6 loj x File Edit View Options Help 8 AccordoB H 4 Defaults 3 Administrator W Labels 9 Moderator BES Per mis 3Moderator Withou Users 3 Operator Hii Groups
343. ll the information required to define a participant in a conference A Participant template is stored in the database or in a Participant Template file The database or a Participant Template file can contain several Participant templates Reservation and Participant Template files are proprietary tools to organize data Data cannot therefore be easily exchanged between external standard databases and the MGC Manager template files Using Microsoft Access or SQL databases to organize the conference and participant data enables the MGC Manager users to easily share data with external applications Chapter 7 Database Templates Template files and Reservation and Participant databases can be installed on the LAN server or on the local computer running the MGC Manager Internet users Access the MGC WebCom mander site via Internet Browser MGC Manager Application 4 2 Intemet MGC Manager Application Hosts the MGC Web Server MGC Web Server Manager application MGC WebCommander site MGC Manager Application Internet Server and LAN Database Server optional Figure 7 1 Data Flow Figure 7 1 Data Flow describes the system structure with public databases that are used by all the users In this configuration several operator workstations running the MGC Manager application are connected to one or more MGC units The public databases are installed on a LAN server and they can
344. log box opens x IV Enable Chairperson Messages Chairperson Identifier Request ENTRYOPT AC Add Message File Request Chairperson Password LEDRPASS AC Add Message File Chairperson Password failure Message LEDRRTRY AC Add Message File Chairperson Identifier Key J Biling Code 10 Select the Enable Chairperson Messages check box to enable a participant to connect to the conference as a chairperson and play the appropriate messages while participants wait in the conference IVR queue If this feature is disabled participants will not be able to connect as the chairperson You can change the status of any participant to chairperson during an On Going Conference by using the appropriate DTMF code and password 11 When the Enable Chairperson Messages option is enabled select the various audio messages and prompts that assist the participant in identifying as a chairperson If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 Table 2 5 IVR Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages Chairperson Identifier Select the audio file that requests the participants Request to enter the key that identifies them as the conference chairperson 2 29 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry
345. low where the participants must be authorized before they can enter the conference created in the Ad Hoc flow Independent of Ad Hoc conferencing where conference access is validated for all conferences running on the MCU regardless of the method in which the conference was started 3 1 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication A participant dials in to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue and starts a new conference based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue In this configuration any participant connecting to the Entry Queue can start a new conference and no security mechanism is applied This mode is usually used in organizations where Ad Hoc conferences are started from within the network and without security breach Starting a conference uses the following method 1 2 3 The participant dials in to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue The Conference ID is requested by the system The participant inputs a Conference ID via his her endpoint remote control using DTMF codes The MCU checks whether a conference with the same Conference ID is running on the MCU If there is such a conference the participant is moved to that conference If there is no ongoing conference with that Conference ID the system creates a new conference based on the Conference Profile assigned to the Entry Queue and connects this participant as the conference chairperson MCU k in
346. lows 1 The conference is an On Going Conference 2 The conference was terminated by an operator 3 The conference ended at the scheduled end time 4 The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the conference for a predefined time period or all the participants disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty for a predefined time period 5 The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes 252 The conference never started since the end time was past at startup 253 The conference could not start due to a problem 254 The conference was ended by an MCU reset 255 An unknown error occurred A 3 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 1 Conference Summary Record Fields Continued ewo o eO File Name The name of the conference log file Note This field does not appear in the formatted file GMT Offset Sign Indicates whether the difference in the time zone is plus or minus as follows 0 Minus 1 Plus GMT Offset The difference in time zone between your site and Greenwich mean time File Retrieved Indicates if the file has been retrieved and archived as follows 0 No 1 Yes A 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Event Records The event records that is all records in the unformatted file except the first record contain standard fields such as the event type code and the time stamp followed by fields that are event specific
347. lt database gt window expand the Groups hierarchy until you locate the Group to which to add the Greet and Guide Reservation template Right click the Group icon and then click New Res Template In the Conference Properties General dialog box define the conference Name and Duration and then set the conferences type as Standard Select the Media Audio and Video Supported Networks all Networks and Video Session For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Del nference Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management z User Defined 1 T Entry Queue Access IV Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Conference Type Media Supported Network j Video Session Standard C Audio Cip Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Classic x Remarks Remarks History L Cancel Apply Help If you are defining a Reservation click the Scheduler tab Select the conference Starting Date and Starting Time For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 9 Defini
348. m DSN tab ODBC Data Source Administrator Microsoft Access Driver mdb rescue Microsoft Access Driver mdb 4 Click the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog box opens Create New Data Source Driver da Microsoft para arquivos texto txt csv Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excel xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Microsd Base Diver 5 Select Microsoft Access Driver from the database type list and then click Finish MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box opens ODBC Microsoft Access Setup 2 x Data Source Name Polycom Description Conferenced Cancel m Database Database e memea era r System Database None C Database System Database Options gt gt In the Data Source Name box enter a name that will identify the database file in the MGC Manager Database Enter the description of the database optional Click the Select button The Select Database dialog box opens Database Name Directories OK imdb o database Cancel Help V ReadOnly I Exclusive Ele AccordAccess mdb Eck E Program Files mw Database List Files of Type Dri tives Access Databases m 7 c z Network Select the database file supplied with the MGC Web Server Manager AccordAccess mdb located in t
349. m a Participant Template file or Participant database using the Conference Properties dialog box 1 Open the Reservations in Database window or the Reservation Template file window 2 In the Reservation database expand the Groups tree until you locate the group in which the Reservation template to which you wish to add a participant is stored Double click the Group icon to list its Reservation templates Alternatively in the Reservation Template file window expand the Conference List icon to list the Reservation templates 3 Right click the desired Reservation template icon and then click Properties Jab weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrlt Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties A The Conference Properties dialog box appears 4 Click the Participants tab in the Conference Properties dialog box 8 31 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Conference Properties Participants dialog box appears Default Conference Properties The name of the current Participant Template file or the Participant database is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File field The list of participants defined in the Participant Template file or in the current group of the Participant database is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list 5 To add a participant from a different database or to
350. matically selected by the system To view or configure additional Media Settings information click the Advanced button Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Define the participants to be used for the content presentation If you want to force the participant to the video window one to be seen by all click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video sources dialog box opens In the Video Layout window select the participant name to force this endpoint as the presenter For video Forcing details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Video Forcing Complete the conference definition and click OK to apply the settings 1 9 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Polycom Visual Concert PC 1 10 Lg Polycom s Visual Concert PC is an endpoint feature that enables the sending of two alternating video streams video and data Typically the video stream is transmitted in the standard H 263 resolution in high frame rate while the data video stream is transmitted in a higher resolution but lower frame rate The Visual Concert PC option is available with Polycom s ViewStation endpoints This option is available only in Video Switching conferences for both H 320 and H 323 participants To activate this option the Polycom Visual Concert PC application must be installed on the same computer deployed as the data source This computer is conne
351. more than one database is defined in your system select the appropriate database from the drop down list By default the database to which you are currently connected is selected 8 Inthe Properties Label field select the label that will be assigned to all the templates that will be converted into the database 9 Inthe Properties Group field select the group to which all the templates that will be converted into the database will be assigned The system lists all the Groups to which you have access rights according to your Login Name and Password 10 Click OK The Template file is converted to the database At the end of the conversion process a confirmation message is displayed 11 Click OK to continue Templates are listed in the appropriate database window The new templates can be viewed in the appropriate group of the database refreshing the database Otherwise you will lose all the information e When converting a Reservation template containing participants the participants will be embedded in the Reservation template not linked to it e You must first save the converted templates in the database before Converting Individual Reservation Templates into the Reservations Database You can copy an individual Reservation template into the Reservation database using the Copy and Paste commands The Reservation template is copied from the Reservation Template file window to the Reservations in Database window
352. n chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson Everyone chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson Everyone Everyone Everyone Everyone Everyone For a full list of IVR messages and their DTMF codes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Using DTMF Codes during a Conference 2 63 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Default IVR Prompts and Messages The system is shipped with the following audio prompts and messages Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Message Type Message Text FileName Welcome Welcome to VoicePlus WELCMPNS ACA Conferencing Connecting to You are now being connected to CONFCONN ACA conference your conference Conference Please enter the conference CONFPASS ACA password request password Press the pound key when complete Conference Invalid conference password CONFRTRY ACA password failure Please try again Disconnection Msg You are now being disconnected GOODBYE ACA from the conference Goodbye Operator Please wait The conference OPERHELP ACA Assistance operator will assist you momentarily NID Conference Please enter your conference ID CNFIDRQS ACA ID request Press the pound key when complete NID Conference Invalid conference ID Please try CNFIDFL ACA ID failure again Leader For conference Chairperson ENTRYOPT ACA Chairperson Services Press the Pound Key All ide
353. n IP ISDN Gateway session when both endpoints support 4CIF the MCU declares 4CIF capabilities e 4CIF is available in cascading conferences However both conferences must have the same properties and require selection of the H 263 Video Protocol The cascading link then inherits the properties of both conferences e Participants can be moved between conferences with different resolutions from CIF to 4CIF or 4CIF to CIF The MCU automatically adjusts the resolution to match the new conference and or participant settings 4CIF Global Setting at the MCU Level ACIF is enabled in the MCU in the system cfg file VIDEO PLUS FLAGS section SysConfig system cfg 172 22 138 103 F gxi E a Section VIDEO PLUS FLAGS Item Value VIDEO_PLUS_YES_NO YES COP_SINGLE_LINE_RATE_THRESHOLD YES COP_SINGLE_ENABLE_QCIF NO ENABLE_CLICK_AND_VIEW_SPLASH YES ENABLE_VIDEOCOMMANDER YES PARTY_NAME_ALWAYS ON NO PHY PAR ME Y m REMOVE gt Section Sub section Item J J Edit value Make sysenc file e CP_4CIF YES This flag enables or disables 4CIF at the MCU level YES default enables 4CIF and NO disables it e 4CIF_THRESHOLD 512 This flag defines the minimum conference line rate for transmitting 4CIF from the conference to the endpoints 512 Kbps is the recommended threshold MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Enabling 4CIF in a Continuous Presence Conferenc
354. n Message goodbye aca Add Message File I Enable Operator Assistance on Failure lt Back Cancel Help 21 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant waits in the IVR queue and during the conference The Operator Assistance function is enabled 22 Select the Enable Operator Assistance on Failure check box to enable operator assistance when the participant fails to correctly access the conference When this option is cleared a participant who failed all password attempts will be automatically disconnected from the conference after hearing the disconnection message 23 Select the various audio messages to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for operator s assistance or when the participant fails to enter the correct conference password want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC units memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 s If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you 2 38 24 25 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 8 IVR Properties Operator Assistance Messages Operator Select the audio file to be played to the participant Assistance when Indication The participant requested help Message The participant entered an incorrect conference password The On Hold for Operator Assistance option
355. n click OK The new Template Group is added to the Groups tree under the selected group 7 45 Chapter 7 Database Templates Refreshing the Database 7 46 When the database is installed on a server and is used by several users or when the Database User Table is open for a long time it is recommended to refresh the database to update the current view It is recommended to save the database before refreshing the database To refresh the database view 1 On the Database menu click Refresh Database DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC If the currently opened database window contains items that were not saved to the database a warning message will be displayed indicating that these items will be lost MGC Manager x A All your changes made to AccordDB1 will be lost Are you sure you want to refresh the database Cancel 2 Click OK to refresh the database unsaved items will be lost or Cancel to abort the operation MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Closing the Database Tables This option is used to close database tables Be sure to save changes before exiting the database To close the Reservations or Participants in Database window 1 At the top right c
356. n the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group containing the source Reservation template Double click the Reservation Template icon from which the participant is to be copied or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template A list of participants appears below the Reservations Template Right click the icon of the participant you want to copy and then click Copy or Copy As to copy the participant under another name Chc Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl Line Rates b Link participant Properties The participant s information is copied to the clipboard 8 41 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 5 In the MGC Manager s Main window right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Paste Participant or Paste Participant As to add the participant under a different name Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Copy Con Ctrl C Paste Participant Cry Paste Participant As Ctrl P Next Questioner Clear Q amp A Lock Conference Voting Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The participant is added to the conference The participant icon appears in the participants list in the Monitor area of the main window 6 For dial out participant connections if the conference is set to Dial out Manually you need to connect the new participant 8 42 MGC Manager User s Guide
357. nabling Recording for a Conference Recording is enabled for a conference as part of the conference definition process This section explains how to specify the recording parameters for a conference For an in depth description of the entire conference setup procedure refer to Chapter 4 Setting up conferences To enable recording for a conference 1 Inthe Conference Properties dialog box click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Properties Product Management x General Stings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording General Settings J Restricted Line Rate 384 kbps f Msg Service Type IVR X deo Rate In Out Msg Service Name iyvR1 X F Con PE 2 Inthe Message Service Type field select IVR 3 Inthe Message Service Name field select a recording enabled IVR Service 4 Clear the Encryption check box encrypted conferences encryption must be set at the participant level and all Recording cannot be done on an encrypted connection Therefore to record participants except the Recording Link can be encrypted 9 10 S MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click the Recording tab The Conference Properties Recording dialog box opens Polycom Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Recording IV Enable Recording Recording Link Name R21P hd Start recording
358. nager E ioj x File Edit View Options Help E H Accords B Defaults LI User Defined Defaults LE Conference Defaults Participant Defaults J MGC Manager Defaults S Product Management Gps Permissions Users E gt i Groups B enl Root Hea Default UserGroups ey WebOffice Ready Data Base Name AccordDB Sys DSN C Program Files MGC Manager ver 6 0 Database Accordacc a Sorting the Labels List You can sort the labels alphabetically by name in ascending or descending order by clicking on the Name heading 6 69 Chapter 6 Using a Database Refreshing the Database List Databases can be added to the database list used by the MGC Database Manager externally via the Control Panel Data Source ODBC In such a case you need to refresh the database list to gain access to that database from the MGC Database Manager application To refresh the database list in the MGC Database Manager e On the Options menu click Refresh dB List Options Help Auto Cascade Configuration Personal Scheduler Configuration Polycom Datastore settings E mail Format Automatic Email Crash Notifications Administrator Email Notification Settings dB s to Update Refresh dB F5 Ctrl F5 Add Remove connection to ODBC The database list in the MGC Web Server Manager window is refreshed and the new databases are listed Refreshing the Database Several users may access databases
359. nce For a description of the fields see Table A 39 Event Fields for Events 107 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY on page A 60 An operator put a participant on hold during the conference Attended conference For a description of the fields see Table A 44 Event Fields for Events 110 111 OPERATOR ON HOLD PARTY OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY on page A 67 An operator moved a participant back from an Operator conference to the home conference For a description of the fields see Table A 44 Event Fields for Events 110 111 OPERATOR ON HOLD PARTY OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY on page A 67 An operator moved an attended participant to the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE on page A 60 A 13 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued 113 CONFERENCE An operator added a remark during the REMARKS conference For a description of the fields see Table A 45 Event Fields for Event 113 CONFERENCE REMARKS on page A 68 2001 CONFERENCE Additional information about a START CONFERENCE START event CONTINUE 1 For a description of the fields see Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 on page A 22 2007 EVENT PARTY Additional information a
360. nce Numeric ID they enter or according to the conference entry password depending on the system configuration Participants connecting directly to an VR enabled conference are allowed in to the conference once they have entered the appropriate conference entry password and or chairperson password If the Entry Queue or the VR enabled conference is set to Attended mode the Entry Queue Service or the IVR Service is configured to On Hold for Operator Assistance the participants are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference Attended Participants are moved to the Operator conference After a short conversation with the participant the operator moves the participant to the appropriate conference Home conference or places the participant on hold On Hold Participants are placed on hold While waiting for the operator s assistance they hear background music and for video IVR a video slide is displayed Participants waiting in the Entry Queue are also placed on hold and moved to the Participants Queue when they enter the wrong Numeric ID or the wrong password While on hold they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference 2 3 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services gS Operator assistance must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR Service and an Operator conference must be running on the same MCU e Conferencing The participants are
361. nce is done from the IVR queue where participants are requested to enter the conference password and the chairperson password when relevant To minimize the number of voice prompts to which the caller has to respond before connecting to the conference it is recommended to exclude from the IVR Service prompts that are part of the Entry Queue Service such as the general Welcome message 2 58 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Assigning an Entry Queue Service to an Entry Queue To enable the system to route participants to their conferences according to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration an Entry Queue Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue Assigning is done during the Entry Queue definition in the Entry Queue Properties dialog box To assign the Entry Queue Service to an Entry Queue Q In the Entry Queue Properties dialog box in the Entry Queue Service list select the Entry Queue Service or leave this box empty to use the default Entry Queue Service if one is defined Entry Queue Properties Product Management x r Entry Queue Settings Name l Numeric ID I AdHoc Profile X m Target Conferences I Audio Only I IP Only J Encryption C Video Switching Transcoding Continuous Presence Dial in Number 1 Diakin Number 2 Entry Queue Service I Cascade I vTx 1000 Target Conference Setting
362. nced Media Settings in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 e Polycom ViewStation FX endpoints can receive slides form the ViewStation PC but cannot broadcast slides to ViewStation PC endpoints e Inthe MGC Manager you define the properties of the video conference The properties of the contents transmission are defined internally and cannot be modified by the MGC Manager operator e Annexes N P and F are optional and are additions to the Video Format when Polycom Visual Concert FX The Visual Concert FX VCFX feature enables you to view simultaneous live video and content data presentations using high resolution graphics This feature is available with ViewStation FX endpoints VCFX transmits the video stream in H 263 format and in a high frame rate CIF 30 FPS The data video stream is transmitted at a higher resolution SXGA 1280 x 1024 pixels and at a lower frame rate CIF 15 FPS In a dual video conference with Visual Concert FX settings presentations can be viewed if a Polycom Visual Concert FX box is connected between the ViewStation broadcasting the presentation and the PC used for the data source When a single video monitor is used for the presentation the monitor displays the content and broadcasts the video When a ViewStation endpoint without SXGA capabilities enters the conference the endpoint connects as Secondary audio only Polycom ViewStation FX connect as Secondary audio only e Inthe
363. ncel MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Add New Participant Defaults The Party Properties Settings dialog box opens Party Properties x Settings Settings2 Define the Settings parameters In the Name field enter the name of the Participant Defaults set The Settings parameters are defined in the same manner as in the Participant Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Owner field displays the name of the user to whom the default set is assigned This field is disabled for users without permission to modify write database tables User with Administrator rights who can read and write database tables can assign the defaults set to any registered user The Owner name can be used for filtering 6 43 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 Click the Settings 2 tab The Party Properties Settings2 dialog box opens Party Properties Guality OF Service Taken from service 6 Define the Settings2 parameters The Settings2 parameters are defined in the same manner as in the Participant Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties 7 Click OK to confirm the new set 6 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining MGC Manager General Defaults To define MGC Manager defaults 1 Right clic
364. ncryption options are affected by the settings of the participant level flag in the system cfg file Undefined participants are connected with the Participant Encryption option set to Auto inheriting the Conference Entry Queue encryption setting 1 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To enable encryption at the participant level In the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box in the Encryption list select one of the following options Auto On or Off I xi Identification Advanced Aggregation Number of Channels Video Protocol h s Recording Dial up v Restrict Only lV AGC For Standard ards only Not required for Videor Service Name Sub Service Name Node Type Num type MCU hd Taken from service z IV Save Participant Cancel Help Auto The participant inherits the Conference Entry Queue encryption setting On The participant joins the Conference Entry Queue encrypted Off The participant joins the Conference Entry Queue non encrypted When the participant encryption is set to Auto the participant connects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as encrypted A non encrypted undefined participant cannot connect to an Encrypted Auto Add conference even if the encryption at the participant level flag is enabled 1 37 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Table 1 5 summarizes the dependencies between t
365. nd Of Conference Alert feature can only be activated during the LS conference definition During an On Going Conference the End Of Conference Alert settings cannot be accessed or altered For example in the confer cfg the extension time is set to 6 minutes and the maximum extension time is set to 30 minutes and you set the End Of Conference Alert time to 5 minutes If the conference duration is set to 2 hours after 1 hour and 55 minutes the system checks whether a participant is still connected to the conference and if sufficient resources are allocated to extend the conference If yes the system extends the conference by 6 minutes new duration is set to 2 06 which is the extension time set in the confer cfg The system checks the participants resources status again 5 minutes before the end of conference and if a participant is still connected and if resources are available the system adds another 6 minutes to the conference new duration is set to 2 12 1 41 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings This extension procedure is repeated until the maximum allowed duration 2 30 is reached after which the system automatically ends the conference When no participant is connected or when no resources are available to run this On Going conference they are reserved for other conferences the system automatically terminates the conference Setting Auto Extend at the MCU Level When you enable the Auto Extend option and
366. nder the MCU Configuration tree To view the Profiles list In the Browser area expand the MCU Configuration tree and expand the Profile tree To view the Profiles list in the Status area click the Profiles icon The Profiles are listed with Conference IDs Passwords dialing numbers and other information MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help al elaine Oe s2 5 rule ke ks a Eb Product Management Normal A Ga MCU Configuration ce lf cards 3 Connections 02 00 00 02 00 00 SB IVR Msg Services E Av message Services E B Network Services a amp Operators FRG Gateway Configueatior DS Profiles ce 4B 10 only cp SB PROF2 4B sales quarterly meeting i vow 02 00 00 02 00 00 02 00 00 H on Going Conferences 2 Connection Network Participant Numbers JP Connection Type Audio Ready Pez 3 25 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 26 ay Using Profiles In addition to Ad Hoc conferencing Profiles can also be used in the same way as a Conference Template database or Participant Template file Once the Profiles are saved on the MCU a Superuser operator can modify the Profile parameters add and remove participants start a conference immediately b
367. ned information For a description of the fields see Table A 46 Event Fields for Event 3010 USER_DEFINED_INFORMATION on page A 68 Additional information about an OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE event For a description of the fields see Table A 42 Event Fields for Event 3108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 2 on page A 67 Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event This event contains remarks added before the conference started For a description of the fields see Table A 6 Event Fields for Event 4001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 3 on page A 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued 4108 OPERATOR Additional information about an MOVE PARTY OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO TO CONFERENCE event CONFERENCE For a description of the fields see CONTINUE 3 Table A 43 Event Fields for Event 4108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 3 on page A 67 5001 CONFERENCE Additional information about a START CONFERENCE START event This event CONTINUE 4 contains the conference billing code conference passwords and conference user defined information For a description of the fields see Table A 7 Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 on page A 28 Note An additional Conference Start Continue 4 event will be written to the CDR each time the value of one of the following conference fields is modified e C
368. nferences eee 1 68 Automatic Line Rate Detection cei ce eeeceeseeeeeeeeetaeteeeeeaes 1 70 IVR and Entry Queue Services 00 ee eee eens 2 1 What isan IVR Service ieciacsictesliecdtevscauhestossnestondvaetosescostevsegubontues 2 2 IVR and Entry Queue Stages oo eee eeeeeeseteeeseeeeseeeeenes 2 3 Conference ACCESS aiiiar nestori iain eiiis ni nenii 2 4 Conference IVR ACCESS sssisseiessissorscsrissosesssivssseseresseisneseasisie 2 4 Entry Queue ACCESS siessen iiai ibni 2 5 Diret ACCESS sui vescoteerunsueisvenseraceseuns enaa Se erai aE 2 5 Operator Conferences srissireesisersriiisiieiseiissiniisiariiio 2 5 Operations Performed Using the IVR Service eee eee 2 6 Using Roll Call ic ciscctsccsetescdssccvivsectnasses r iiis 2 8 Using Silene saeiscssesctsesssccsccdoracsunpectonsdsssuseqesscousdenvsstesaveneveonees 2 10 Enabling SilencelT 0 eecescsseecseseseeessesesessessessassesseees 2 10 DTMF Enabled Cascading Conferences eects 2 12 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 2 13 Audio and Video Conversion Tools ccceeeceseeeeeeseeseeeeeeees 2 13 TVR Hardware Requirement 0 0 cece eee eseeeeeeeceecseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 2 14 Defining the IVR Module Properties 00 0 eee eesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes 2 15 Setting IVR Message Services 0 eee eeeeceeseceeceeeseceeeeeeeseteeeeeeaes 2 23 Defining a New IVR Message Service oo eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeees 2 23 Viewing IVR Message Services
369. ng Help Menu Recording in Progress ee Recording Failed 3 Select the Recording In Progress message and then select the appropriate message file by default rerdconf aca from the file list at the bottom of the dialog box 9 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Select the Recording Failed message and then select the appropriate message file by default rerdfail aca from the file list at the bottom of the dialog box Click the DTMF Codes tab and then scroll down the list of functions to the three recording functions IVR Message Service x Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson Conference Password Generel Operator Assistance RollCal SiencelT DTMF codes Override Mute All but Me Everyone SilencelT Menu 9 Everyone Unmute amp Retum to Conference 1 Everyone Retum to Conference Muted 2 Everyone 3 Everyone Adjust Noise Detection Sensitivity amp Retum t Disable Noisy Line Detection amp Unmute 4 Start Recorcjg e Detection Unmute 4 Everyone 74 Chairperson Chairperson v Optional To modify the DTMF code or permission for a recording function a Inthe Name column click the required function The appropriate DTMF code appears in the box below the list b Inthe DTMF Code left field enter the new code In the Permission right field select whether this function can be used by all conference participants or only the chairperson Click
370. ng a New Reservation Click the Settings tab 4 15 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management E x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording p General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 28 x rc T Encryption Chair Control None v Cascade Ne F OnHold Master Name None 7 er C I Enable Invite T120 Rate None 5 T Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None X Before FistJon E Min After Last Quit M H Min p Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren7 G728 zl Dual Stream Mode None lt lt Basic I Roll Call Pro Mation Auto X I Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Video Protocol C I I End Time Alet Tone 5 Min Exit Tone Rall Call announcement VG SARE pute Frame Rate Auto 5 Tak Hold Time 15 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth pO cf ene nec eine Cancel Apply Help Define the Restricted Line Rate T120 Audio Alg Video Protocol Video Format Talk Hold Time and Audio Mix Depth fields as for standard conferences For a detailed description of these fields see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference Settings In the Msg Service Type field select Welcome No Wait for a Welcome conference or Attended Wait
371. ngoing conference on the MCU The automatic extension of the conference indefinitely is enabled by activating the Auto Extension mechanism and setting the conference duration to 99 59 making sure that it is the duration when the conference becomes ongoing Properties Product Manager Changing the duration once the conference is started will not change its permanent status 1 45 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings In the AUTO_EXTENSION section of the confer cfg file the flag EXTENSION_TIME_INTERVAL 30 determines the number of minutes by which the conference is extended during a conference For example if you enter 30 default the conference is automatically extended by 30 minutes each time the system verifies whether to extend the conference The Auto Extension flag MAX_EXTENSION_TIME is ignored when the conference duration is set to 99 59 and the conference can be extended indefinitely When the MCU is reset the conference is restarted on the MCU but it is not permanent as the duration changes to the actual time left as calculated by the MCU In such a case a new permanent conference must be created the file size reaches 1 MB Once this limit is reached no additional events are added to the CDR but they are written to the log file When the conference ends the appropriate event is added to the CDR file e When checking the properties on the ongoing permanent conference after the first extension t
372. nnels as follows 1 Restrict 2 SM comp 3 Bit rate for example when 6B is needed but not supported 4 LSD 5 HSD 6 MLP 7 H MLP 8 QCIF 9 Video frame rate 10 H 243 problem 255 Other A 49 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY E E Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Connection Type The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in 6 Direct Bonding Mode Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Indicates whether Bonding is enabled or disabled Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Possible values are 0 Bonding is disabled 1 Bonding is enabled 255 Auto Number Of Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Channels The number of channels as follows 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 Net Channel Width The band width of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a band width of 1B which is the only band width that is currently supported Net Service Name The name of the Network Service An empty field indicates the default Network Service A 50 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY Continued a Ca eae
373. ns prompting for confirmation MGC Manager xj A Delete Reservation Polycom Are You Sure De e Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the Cut operation The Reservation definition is moved from the source Reservation Template file or Reservation database to the clipboard Open the target Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group to which the Reservation template is to be moved 8 51 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 7 Right click the Conference List or Group icon and then click Paste H gt Polycom New Res Template New Res Operator Template Paste lt tri P New Group Delete Group The Reservation template is copied from the clipboard to the target Reservation Template file or to the target group in the Reservation database A new conference icon is added to the list of Reservation templates listed under the Conferences List or Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Copying an On Going Conference or a Conference Reservation to a Reservation Template File or Reservation Database 8 52 Another method for creating a Reservation templ
374. nt template parameters ee Oper Name The name of the operator printing the template information Or if you are using the printed data for scheduling reservations you can enter the name of the operator who should schedule the conference Report To Select the printing destination File The template information is saved to a text file Printer The template information is sent to the default printer selected in Windows ClipBoard The template information is sent to the clipboard The data can then be imported to an external application Date Use the arrows to select the month and year the conference should be set to start Click to select the day on which the conference is scheduled to start Starting Time Set the time at which the conference is to begin Enter the scheduled conference duration 8 58 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 5 Click OK If File is selected the Save As dialog box opens letting you save the text file to the desired folder Savein My Documents z e KE Ee File name Polycom Save as type Text File txt Cancel Select the destination folder The system assigns the Reservation template name as the default file name However you can define another file name The file can be saved only in text format Click Save to create the text file If Printer is selected the Print dialog box opens Select the required printer and then click OK The conference dat
375. ntifier request other participants please wait Leader Please enter the Conference LEDRPASS ACA Chairperson Chairperson Password Press the password request pound key when complete Leader Invalid chairperson password LEDRRTRY ACA Chairperson Please try again password failure 2 64 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Personal code Please enter your personal code PINRQST ACA request Press the pound key when complete Personal code Invalid personal code PINFAIL ACA failure Press any key Press any key to enter the ANYKEY ACA conference eneral The conference is now secured SECURED ACA Conference secured General The conference is now in an UNSECURE ACA Conference unsecured mode un secured General Wait for Please wait for the chairperson to LDRWAIT ACA chairperson join or start the conference General First to You are the first person to join the FIRST ACA join conference General Mute all All conference participants are now ALLMUTE ACA but me muted General Unmute All conference participants are now ALLUNMTE ACA all but me unmuted General The chairperson has left the CHAIRDRP ACA Chairperson conference dropped General End time The conference is about to end ENDALERT ACA alert General Change Press one to change conference PINCHANG ACA password menu passwor
376. ntry Queue Service must be configured accordingly Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue To initiate an Ad Hoc conference Ad Hoc conferencing must be enabled in the Entry Queue and a Profile must be assigned to the Entry Queue In addition an Entry Queue Service supporting conference Numeric ID and External database authentication if applicable must be assigned to the Entry Queue External Database Application Optional The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference or to join an existing conference The external database must contain a list of participants with their assigned parameters The Numeric ID entered by the participant is compared against the database If the system finds a match the participant is granted the right to create a new conference In a similar way the conference Entry password or chairperson password is 3 11 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication checked against the database and if a match is detected the participant is granted access to the conference To work with an external database application the Entry Queue Service and IVR Services must be configured to use the external database application for authentication For more information about configuring IVR Services see IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application on page 3 21 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining the Conf
377. nts wishing to participate in such a conference must dial one of these numbers to be automatically connected to the appropriate conference For more information on this conference type see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 7 19 Chapter 7 Database Templates Recording The MGC Manager provides a digital recording option with the ReadiRecorder and the RSS 2000 The ReadiRecorder enables recording of the audio channel of both Audio Only and video conferences The RSS 2000r enables recording of both the audio and the video channels of a conference For more information see Chapter 9 Recording 15 To complete the Reservation template definition procedure click OK from any Reservation template Properties dialog box The Properties dialog box closes and the new Reservation template is added to the Reservations in Database window below the Group icon oix E Root Name LineRate Audio lg Video Session Meet Me Office Reservation tn Polycom Office Reservation WebOffice E Polycom weboffice_v2 WebOffice ATM alpha 1 E weboffice_v2 H i f iy n i CP conf i 1 2B Auto Transcoding G7221 alpha 21 is i 512kbps Auto Continuous Presence J H 323 conf alpha 17 Scibez221 alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 Sir Video Switching a or H323 cnf alpha 22 SE5H 323 conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G726 Siren7 Video Switching g
378. nts currently waiting in the Entry Queue conference IVR queue and Participants Queue regardless of their conference association e Perform various operations to assist participants while in the Entry Queue IVR queue Participants Queue or during the conference e Conduct voting sessions during an On Going Conference e Control Question amp Answer sessions during an On Going Conference The IVR software module enables participants and the conference chairperson to perform various operations from their endpoints using DTMF codes Table 2 1 lists these actions and the default operation permissions These operations can be performed from the participant s endpoint using DTMF codes only if an IVR Service is assigned to the conference For a list of default DTMF codes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 Table 2 1 DTMF Enabled Actions and Permissions DTMF Enabled Action Permission Request personal assistance Play the help menu Adjust the participant s broadcasting and listening Everyone volume Change the participant s status to Chairperson Everyone MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 1 DTMF Enabled Actions and Permissions Continued DTMF Enabled Action Invoke Click amp View to modify the video layout display Everyone Personal Layout Chairperson Personal amp conference Layout Lock or unlock a conference to dial in undefined Chairperson participants Mute Meet Me part
379. nts that were already attended to by the operator and are waiting to be connected to the conference e Conferencing the participant is connected to the conference In Greet and Guide conferences the operator controls the transition between attended stages You can define a conference in which the transition from the greeting stage to the conferencing stage is automatic without the operator s intervention In the Welcome No Wait mode the participant who connects to the conference sees the video slide hears the audio message and after a pre defined period is automatically connected to the conference without the operator s assistance Several operators can run Greet and Guide conferences simultaneously Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences AV Message Services An AV Message Service is a set of audio messages two per Message Service and a video slide that are assigned to a conference This set is activated when a participant connects to the Greet and Guide conference to which the set is assigned Up to four Message Services can be defined to accommodate different types of conferences For example setting up a conference for a certain company on a regular basis you can use the company s logo and or title in the opening video slide and have a special message recorded Greet and Guide Hardware To set up and manage Greet and Guide conferences the following hardware is required e Messages exten
380. nu click Save Database when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar To add a participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database using the clipboard 1 Open the Participant Template file or the Participants in Database window When working with the Participant database in the Participants in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group where the desired Participant template is stored Expand the Group icon to list the Participant templates assigned to the group MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 3 Right click the participant icon and then click Copy am Gs New Participant F8 Q Copy As Cut Crl x Paste cry Delete Del Dial Out Cri a Line Rates gt Properties The participant s definition is copied to the clipboard Use the Copy As option from the right click pop up menu to copy the participant parameters to the clipboard using a new name 4 Ifthe Reservation Template file or the Reservations in Database window containing the Reservation template to which the participant is to be added is not open open it now 5 Inthe Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conferences List icon to display the Reservation templates list In the Reservations in Database window expand th
381. o Audio Volume The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB Undefined Type The participant type as follows 0 Defined participant The value in the formatted text file is default 2 Undefined participant The value in the formatted text file is Unreserved participant Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued eel Eye eres Bonding Phone Number Video Rate IP Address Call Signaling Port Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The video rate in units of kilobits per second A value of 4294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The IP address of the participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper N
382. o Mix Depth 3 Sites T AnnexN P AnnexP D Annex F Cancel Aoi Help 2 Inthe Cascade field select Master when defining the master conference Slave when defining the slave conference If Slave is selected in the Master Name field select the name of the participant used as a link to the Master conference 3 Complete the conference definition 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II An Example of ci a Star Cascading Conference m Dial up io 7087998 ve 7087998 pan TINT tm gui Bmw Bias B laz n MCU C MCU A Master Conference ConferenceA Participant Dial in Link Connection Type Dial in Link In Dial in Number 7087996 Link In 2 Dial in Number 7087998 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Master MCU B MCU C Slave Conference ConferenceB Slave Conference ConferenceC Participant Dial out Link Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087996 Dial out Number 7087998 Conference Properties Settings tab Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Cascade Slave Master Name Link Out Master Name Link out2 Figure 5 3 Star Cascading Flow Illustrated is the Participant Identification Properties as they should appear for the Dial in and Dial out links Check Participant Properties Advanced to find out the Service Name of the Network Service being used 5 15 Chapter 5 H 243
383. o print the DTMF codes data see Printing IVR DTMF Codes on page 2 62 Optional To modify the DTMF code or permission a Inthe Name field click the required function The appropriate DTMF code appears in the box below the list b Inthe DTMF Code left field enter the new code In the Permission right field select whether this function can be used by all conference participants or only the chairperson Click Finish to complete the IVR Service definition The new IVR Message Service is added to the IVR Services list MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing IVR Message Services 1 Connect to the MGC Unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree to view the MCU s Configuration options 3 Expand the IVR Msg Services tree to list the IVR Message Services ug Product Management Minor ga MCU Configuration iE Cards aa Connections SS IVR Msg Services BB attended IVR BE 1vr70 AV Message Services H amp Network Services A Operators H a Gateway Configuration H ic Profiles og Recording Links The currently defined IVR Message Services are listed by name Click the VR Msg Services icon to list the IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services in the Status pane displaying the service names and their defined language You can double click an IVR Message Service to view its properties 2 47 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Servic
384. of the local MCU the one that runs the Master conference the MCU Number field Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 9 If the Connection Type is set to Dial Out set the Participant Phone Number field to the number of the MCU running the second conference 10 Define at least one participant for each slave conference 11 Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording rM General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B x Msg Service Type None x Video Rate In Out J Msq Service Name J v F Gonterence On Part I Encryption F Silence IT F Tx 1000 p lt lt Basic I Conference Lock Selenite None z T Mute Meet Me patties Cascade None X je jairperson F OnHold Master Name None v F Terminate After Chairperson Exits f Enable Invite 7120 Rate None he JT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None Before FistJoin 5 Min After Last Quit fi Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren7 G728 X Dual Stream Mode None kd lt lt Basic F Roll Call Pro Motion Auto X IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement IV End Time Alert Tone 5 Min Video Protocol Auto z Exit Tone Roll Call announcement SENEDE Frame Rate Talk
385. on either Master or Slave It is not recommended to select the Auto option as the automatic selection of Master and Slave by the computer may result in conflicts When the link between conferences is connected MIH capabilities are exchanged between the two conferences If both conferences are MIH capable full H 243 cascading capabilities are established Setting Up Cascading Conferences Setting up a cascading conference begins with defining a number of conferences that take part in the Cascading conference The first conference the master Master Conference is the link to any additional conferences the second conference named Slavel is linked to the Master Conference Defining Master and Slave Conferences To define a Master Conference 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree Product Management Normal H Ba mcu Configuration a On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions Q d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 H 3 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference H T On Going Conferences 1 New Operator Conference Print All Paste Crrity ie Ctrl P Paste SIP Factory As Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management 3 Type the Master conference name in the N
386. on Template file or Reservation database to another You do this by using the Copy and Paste functions The conference Template is copied from the source Reservation Template file or Reservation database and pasted into the target Reservation Template file or Reservation database To copy a conference template from one file or database to another 1 Open the source Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window 2 Inthe source Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the source Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the Reservation template to be copied 3 Right click the icon of the Reservation template to copy and then click Copy Jab weboffice_v1 g Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The conference definition is copied to the clipboard 8 47 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 48 Open the target Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window In the target Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group to which the Reservation template is to be copied In the target window right click the Conferences List or Reservation Group icon and then click Paste or Paste As to change the name of the Reservation template gt Polycom New Res Templat
387. on page 3 23 Target Conferences Audio Only IP Only Select this check box to define an Audio Only Entry Queue If the Audio Look amp Feel mode is enabled for the MGC Manager this option is automatically selected Audio Only participants can connect to a video Entry Queue and you do not have to define a separate Entry Queue for Audio Only participants Select this check box to create an IP Only Entry Queue whose target conference are IP Only conferences The target conferences can be set as VoIP conferences Audio Only IP Only or Software Continuous Presence video For a detailed description of SWCP see Chapter 1 Software Continuous Presence Settings on page 1 27 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued ee ae eee onan Encryption Video Switching Transcoding Continuous Presence Select this check box to encrypt this Entry Queue When enabled only encrypted participants can join this Entry Queue while non encrypted participants are disconnected from the MCU For more details about encryption and encrypted Entry Queues see Chapter 1 Media Encryption on page 1 32 Select this option to set the Entry Queue as a Video Switching Entry Queue and save video resources as no video ports are used for participant connection The participants connect to this Entry Queue using the line rate and video settings of the Entry Queue
388. on_ Reserved start Time Reserver Duration emr offset status u H rorvcom Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 2 detbies Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 00 20 33 Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 02 00 00 Ba Product Management Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 01 59 58 Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 02 00 00 fo ees Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 01 59 56 Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 02 00 00 cebbies Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 01 59 56 Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 02 00 00 B Pouvcom Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 02 00 00 B Pouvcom Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 00 32 00 Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 02 00 00 P debbie Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 00 35 43 Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 02 00 00 PHB debbie Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 02 00 00 B tesxz Feb 01 2004 03 10 25 00 00 57 Feb O1 2004 03 10 25 00 01 00 HO Polycom Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 00 13 26 Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 02 00 00 Ongoing conference Terminated by operator Terminated when end time passed Terminated when end time passed Terminated when end time passed Terminated when end time passed Terminated by operator Terminated by operator Terminated when end time passed Terminated when end time passed Terminated by operator Pia um 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To open the CDR utility through the MGC Manager right click menu 1 2 If the MGC Manager is not connected to the MCU connect it now Right click the MCU icon and then click CDR Disconnec
389. onference Properties None AAT All the fields in the Settings dialog box display the default values defined in the MGC Database Manager Res Defaults You can change them as required 7 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Assigning Participants to the Conference Participants can be added to the Reservation template either by selecting the participants from the Participant database from a Participant Template file or by defining them directly during the Reservation template definition 8 Click the Participants tab to add participants to the Reservation template The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants 4 IV Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants 3 Max Participants Auto 4 Pre Defined Participants File CNDebbie MGC data T emplate and MCU files patticipants ust J Dial Out Manually Browse Gem dbase From directory At this point you can assign a participant to the conference from the Participant database from a Participant template file from an LDAP compatible directory if one is configured or you can define a new participant Participants that are assigned to the conference from the database are linked participants 9 To display the list of participants stored in the data
390. oper Operator POLYCOM Administrator user Moderator user2 Moderator Without Initiating WebOftice Administrator Select All Cancel Select the check boxes of all users to which you want to assign the Defaults set To select all users click the Select All button 4 Click OK 6 49 Chapter 6 Using a Database gy To designate a database as the Private or Global default database Only the administrator can assign a database as the Private or Global default database 1 In the Browser area right click the icon of the database to be designated as the Private or Global default database A pop up menu appears E et As Private Default et As Global Default Remove dB connection 2 Click Set As Private Default to designate this database as the source for the Private Default set or click Set As Global Default to designate this database as the source for the Global Default set A check mark next to the selected option indicates which option is active To define the database as both the Private and Global default database select both options repeating steps 1 and 2 Defining Permissions 6 50 gy Permissions define the access rights to various functions of the MGC WebCommander MGC Web Server Manager and MGC Database Manager You can define various permission types according to your needs creating a wide range of user types Once defined the permission is assigned to a user s
391. or Event 5 PARTY CONNECTED Continued Sy ie eee Capabilities The remote capabilities in H 221 format The remote communication mode in H 221 format Mode Secondary Cause Note This field is only relevant if the Party State is Secondary The cause for the secondary connection not being able to connect the video channels as follows 0 Default 1 Restrict 2 SM comp 3 Bit rate For example when 6B is needed but not supported 4 LSD 5 HSD 6 MLP 7 H MLP 8 QCIF 9 Video frame rate 10 H243 problem 11 The incoming video parameters are not compatible with the conference video parameters 12 H 323 card failure 13 The conference video settings are not compatible with the endpoint capabilities 14 The new conference settings are not compatible with the endpoint capabilities 15 Video stream violation due to incompatible annexes or other discrepancy 16 Inadequate video resources 17 When moved to a Transcoding or Video Switching conference the participant s video capabilities are not supported by the video cards 18 Video connection could not be established 19 The end point lacks VCPC or VCFX capabilities 20 The participant video settings are not compatible with the Conference on Port video settings A 35 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 14 Event Fields for Event 5 PARTY CONNECTED Continued ee Cr ee eee Secondary Cause 21 The parameters in t
392. or the selected ISDN Network Service or the T1 CAS Network Service For more details regarding the dial in numbers range see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Note When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX to the MCU the PBX may truncate the dialed numbers In that case the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service may include only part of the dialed string The operator must add the truncated digits to the dial in number conveyed to the participant Dial in number Enter the second dial in number to be assigned to the 2 Entry Queue This number is optional 3 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Simplified Ad Hoc Conferencing with Video Invite A simplified method of Ad Hoc Conferencing can be used utilizing Video Invite to connect other H 323 video participants to the new conference In the simplified flow a special Entry Queue is created When H 323 ISDN or PSTN participants connect to this entry queue a new conference is created with a random NID not known to any other users and that participant automatically enters the conference as its Chairperson without entering the conference Numeric ID and Chairperson s password Once the conference is running the Chairperson can use Video Invite to invite H 323 participants to the conference as with any other Invite enabled conference The Simplified Ad Hoc Conferencing is enabled by defining special Ad Hoc Entry Queue whose name begins with th
393. ormatted File A 1 The Conference Summary Record 0 cece eseesseeeseeseeeeeseteeeeeeeeees A 3 Event RECOrdS nied raone noa EE ii avenniandas A 5 Standard Event Record Fields saosna A 5 e E E E T EE E A 6 Event Specific Fields oe ee csceceseeseesecseeeecsecsesseseseeeseeeeeee A 18 Disconnection Cause Values cesceccsseeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeees A 69 Table of Contents Advanced Conference Settings In addition to the basic conference settings you can accommodate special requests by defining advanced parameters The advanced settings include Dual Stream modes Allows the deployment of two video streams in a conference LSD Low Speed Data FECC Far End Camera Control the MCU supports the participant s control of a far end camera during an On Going Conference 4CIF Resolution Allows the selection of High quality 4CIF video resolution in Continuous Presence conferences running at line rates of 512 Kbps or higher Software Continuous Presence Allows Continuous Presence conferences to be set up without using video card resources Encryption Enhances data security at conference and participant levels Auto Extend Conference Duration Allows the conference time to be automatically extended without operator intervention Simple Cascading Allows running separate conferences as one very large conference or conferences that run on different MCUs to run as one conference DTMF Enabl
394. orner of the Participants or Reservations in Database window click the Close button If you have not saved changes made to the database before closing the window the following message box is displayed MGC Manager a x A Save changes to Reservations in AccordDB1 w c Click Yes to save changes No to discard the changes or Cancel to abort the operation To close all Reservations or Participants in Database windows 1 On the Database menu click Logout amp Clear Login Record DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC 7 47 Chapter 7 Database Templates The following message is displayed MGC Manager f xj A All database windows will be closed Do you want to continue De e 2 Click Yes to close all the windows or No to cancel the logout operation If you clicked Yes and you have not saved the changes to the database before logging out the following message box is displayed MGC Manager x A Save changes to Reservations in AccordDB1 w cm 3 Click Yes to save changes No to discard the changes or Cancel to abort the operation 7 48 8 Templates Handling Ly MGC Reservation and Participant templates can be created in the database or in Template files Reservation Template and Participant Template files are MGC internal proprietary tools us
395. ort see Chapter 9 Defining a Recording Port Participant on page 9 15 Ad Hoc Cascading Link The link between the Ad Hoc conference and another conference such as a Meeting Room is defined in the Profile in the same way as it is defined in a standard conference The reserved Meet Me Per Conference or the Meeting Room contains a dial in participant as the link from the Ad Hoc conference and is configured to direct access No Entry Queue Access selected no IVR Service is assigned to it Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue To enable Ad Hoc conferencing configure the Entry Queue to support Ad Hoc conferencing and assign the appropriate Profile and Entry Queue Service to it The Profile and Entry Queue Service must be defined prior to the definition of the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue conference To define an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 2 Right click the Meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon and then click New Entry Queue H 3 27 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 28 3 The Entry Queue Properties window opens Entry Queue Properties F3 Alpha 02 x r Entry Queue Settings Name Entry Queue Service Se Numeric ID I Cascade F vTx 1000 r Target Conference Settings Audio Alg Auto z Video Format fAuto v m Target Conferences Ba Frame Rate Auto x I IP Ony Vi
396. ose Rmt doesn t support H323 Failure encryption A 72 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 47 Disconnection Cause Values Continued m Sodan SP CECA SPF sr Si novdpemereny Sa 2 senose SP se serao SP o sprono SP CEC CECO CEC SP jae sion SP forsee je S dioworerais SP CECL CEC Se mo sree m seaman Se ms seamos ere a sramno fere s sPusmponea nedene serme CECL A 73 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 47 Disconnection Cause Values Continued A 74
397. ote This field is only relevant to IP participants The signaling port used for participant connection A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU A 65 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued es eee H 323 Party Alias Note This field is only relevant to IP participants Type SIP Party Address Type For H 323 participants the alias type as follows 7 E164 8 H 323 ID 11 URL ID alias type 12 Transport ID 13 Email ID 14 Participant number For SIP participants the address type as follows 1 SIP URI 2 Tel URL H 323 Party Alias Note This field is only relevant to IP participants SIP Party Address For H 323 participants the participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants the participant address The address may contain up to 80 characters Table A 41 Event Fields for Event 2108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 1 AT Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Party Calling The telephone number used by the participant for dial in Number A 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 42 Event Fields for Event 3108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 2 ce Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification
398. ource Administrator dialog box opens See step 2 in the next procedure for the continuation of the registration procedure MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To register the database from the MGC Manager application 1 2 Open the MGC Manager application On the Database menu click Database ODBC and then click Add Remove connection to the ODBC DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template gt Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB gt Manage databases The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box opens User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Driver eee A dBASE Files Microsoft dBase Driver dbf dBase Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Remove Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls FoxPro Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Configure MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Visual FoxPro Database Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Visual FoxPro Tables Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver EN An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current Cancel Apply Help 6 7 Chapter 6 Using a Database 3 Click the Syste
399. ources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings T Restricted Line Rate 2B Msg Service Type WR e n Gut Msg Service Name e Gn Fot I Encryption I Silence IT es I Conference Lock Chair Control None X EME MEEN is Cascade None he I Start Conf Requires Chairperson F OnHold Master Name None 7 I Terminate After Chairperson Exits Enable Invite T120 Rate Nome J Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None x Before FistJoin gt Min AfterLast Quit T Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 Dual Stream Mode None X lt lt Basic I Roll Call Pro Motion Auto M Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Ride yatocee Auto M End Time Alert Tone 5 Min IV Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Yeo roma auo m Frame Rate Auto z Talk Hold Time fs 4 Sec Quality Auto x Audio Mix Depth pS Sites F AnnexN M AnnexP 7 Annex F Cancel Apply Help The IVR Service is enabled for this conference 2 50 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 2 From the Message Service Name list select the name of the IVR Service or leave this field blank if you wish to use a default IVR Service To assign an IVR Service to an Audio Only conference 1 When defining Audio Only conferences in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box in the General Settings pane click the Enable IVR Service check b
400. ox 2 From the Message Service Name list select the name of the IVR Service or leave this field blank if you wish to use the default IVR Service Default Conference Properties Product Management IVA70 x e a E mi 2 51 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service An Entry Queue Message Service is a subset of an IVR Message Service that is used with Entry Queues It includes a set of voice prompts that are used to guide the caller to the appropriate conference You can create different Entry Queue Services for different languages and personalized voice messages To set up a new Entry Queue Message Service 1 Connect to the MGC Unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the IVR Services icon and then click New Entry Queue Service um Product Management Minor i Ba MCU Configuration je Cards ae Connections Ham MIR 1 New New Entry Queue Service A F Gtri P Past Griy Messages Status Properties 4 IP H zh MPI H i ATM Operators a GateWay Configuration rial Profiles og Recording Links H A 2 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Entry Queue Message Service dialog box opens x Entry Queue Service Name Dema Language for IVR ENGLISH E External Server Noe O Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input 5 sec D
401. pant call H 323 Board ID The slot number of the H 323 card handling the participant call H323 Unit ID The number of the unit on the H 323 card handling the participant call Table A 17 Event Fields for Event 8 REMOTE COM MODE Fee le Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Remote The remote communication mode in H 221 format Communication Mode Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY ee Operator Name The login name of the operator Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY Continued i ae nn Connection Type Bonding Mode Number Of Channels Net Channel Width Net Service Name Restrict The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in 6 Direct Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Indicates whether Bonding is enabled or disabled Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Possible values are 0 Bonding is disabled 1 Bonding is enabled 255 Auto Note This field is not relevant to IP part
402. participants to an existing Reservation template There are several methods to add participants to a Reservation template e Add a new participant to an existing Reservation template defining the specific participant parameters There are two methods using the Reservation template right click or Reservation properties Participants tab When you add a new participant to a Database Reservation template you can specify whether they are linked or embedded e Select the Participants from the Participant database or Participant Template file during the definition of the Reservation template in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box If you add a participant from a Participant database to a Reservation template in the same database the participant will be added as a linked participant e Copy participants from a Participant Template file or Participant database to a Reservation template If you copy a participant from a Participant database to a Reservation template in the same database the participant will be added as a linked participant 8 27 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 28 Copy participants from one Reservation template stored in a Reservation Template file or a Reservation database to another Reservation template in the same or a different Reservation Template file or Reservation database If you copy linked participants from a Reservation template in the same database the participants will be added as linked parti
403. physical file name See R amp DSOL_log C MSSQL7 DATAAccord_log Idf C MSSQL7 DATAAccord_log mdf gp reer er Recovery completion state R amp DSOL_dat Leave database operational No additional transaction logs can be restored C Leave database nonoperational but able to restore additional transaction logs Leave database read only and able to restore additional transaction logs Undo file EAProgram Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSOL SQL2000 BA El ox cance f Hep 13 Click OK to confirm exit the Restore Database dialog box and launch the restore operation At the end of the restore operation the restored database appears in the list of databases In some installations an error message Microsoft SQL DMO ODBC SQLSTATE 42000 may be displayed when clicking OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To stop the installation error message from appearing a Stop the SQL Server by right clicking the SQL Server icon in the System Tray bottom right corner and then clicking Stop from the pop up menu te SQL Server Group 3 WEB SERVER ISOL2000 Windows NT New SQL Server Registration Edit SQL Server Registration properties Delete SQL Server Registration Disconnect Pause Start OUcECCCRCECECECE sy New b All Tasks View gt New Window from Here Refresh Export List
404. plate in the database or when defining an On Going Conference or conference Reservation directly 1 In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree until the desired group is located Right click the Group to which to add a new Reservation template and then click New Res Template on the pop up menu The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the Participant tab 7 35 Chapter 7 Database Templates The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties 3 To define a new participant click the New button 7 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties xj Identification Advanced Connection Type Interface Type Dialin i ISDN Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party he User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 it hoo oO wend Poon T A T Audio Only F VIP JT Participant linked Cancel Help Define the participant Name Select the network Interface Type that will be used by the participants If you select H323 or SIP as the Interface Type the Identification and Advanced fields change The Identification tab fields for ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP Interface Types a
405. ption When enabled you can set the H 239 People Content option at the conference level see To enable the H 329 People Content option at the conference level on page 1 5 To enable the H 239 and People Content option in Gateway Sessions set the flag GW_EPC_H239 YES default MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To enable the H 329 People Content option at the conference level The H 239 standard is enabled in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box In the Media Settings pane in the Dual Stream Mode list select one of the H 239 P C options Graphics Hi res Graphics Live Video Properties Product Management People and arty Visual Concert PC Visual Concert FX H 320 Duo Video E E a To Annex 7 Annex P I Annex When selecting this option the Chair Control Cascade and T 120 options are disabled unless you are defining an IP Only Video Switching conference Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 6 gS H 239 protocol is not supported by the SIP standard H 239 P C is not supported when participants are moved between conferences or in Attended Conferencing when participants are moved from the Operator conference to another conference The H 239 rate control is supported by the MUX card only Where old MUX cards are installed in an MCU or in a mixed environment of old MUX cards with MUX cards in an MCU the content rate will be reduced without notifi
406. r a detailed procedure refer to Logging into the User Tables of the Database on page 7 3 On the Database menu select Open D B Participant Template and then select the database you want to work with The system lists all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password DataBase Directory Options Window fe Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template AccordDB Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB gt Manage databases Database ODBC The Participants in Database window opens Expand the Template Groups tree and select the group to which to assign the Participant template Right click the Group icon to which to assign the Participant template A pop up menu appears fe My Group New Participant Click New Participant 7 39 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 40 The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties E xij Identification Advanced Connection Type Interface Type Dialin ISDN kd Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party k User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Define the participant Name Select the network Interface Type that will be used by the parti
407. r the desired information 6 29 Chapter 6 Using a Database To Log in to the Database Manager 1 On the Start Programs menu click MGC Manager Ver 7 5 and then click Database Manager t Programs r fan Accessories d CRE er ver 7 5 Ee Ceai rts Microsoft Office Tools Settings gt an Polycom WebOffice internet Explorer ORE gt oes Search Microsoft Outlook Help and Support MGC Manager ver 7 5 fa MGC Manager ver 7 5 hlp un tay UNInstall MGC Manager ver 7 5 Log Off Debbie Shut Down Alternatively in the MGC Manager on the Database menu click Manage Databases Windows XP Professional Q DataBase Directory Options Window Saye Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template gt Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB gt The Database Login dialog box opens x Login Name JACCORD Password J Create Login Record cres 2 The Login Name field is filled with the last name entered so you do not have to retype it each time you log in The first time you log in or 6 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II whenever the registry is empty the login you used to enter Windows will be automatically referenced when accessing the database If required type your Login Name 3 Enter your password in the Password field and then clic
408. re described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Identification tab fields for T1 CAS Interface Type are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties When defining a new participant during the definition of an Audio Only Conference or Reservation participant properties relevant to audio participants are displayed For more information see the MGC User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties 7 37 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 38 6 Check the Participant Linked check box to add the participant to the database If you clear the Participant Linked check box the participant will be embedded which means that he she will only be added to the conference and not to the database If you have Labels defined in the database and you want to use them for filtering the Participant templates assign a Label to the template In the Label list select the appropriate label 7 Click the Advanced tab to define additional parameters This step is optional as the default settings can apply to most participants and will not require changing 8 Define the various Advanced parameters These parameters change according to the Interface Type selected in the Identification dialog box The Advanced fields for ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP are described in the User Guide Volume
409. re erased together with the conference when the On Going Conference terminates Assign a Participant template defined either in the database or in a Participant Template file This participant will be Linked to the conference and the participant s definition will be consistent in all conferences to which it is linked Defining Participant Templates in the Database Participant templates can be added to a database using the following methods Define the Participant template directly from the Participants in Database window Copy the participant parameters from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to the Participant database Define the participants during conference setup during an On Going Conference or reservation setup and save the new participants to the database Convert existing templates from Participant Template files to the database format For more details see Chapter 8 Converting Participant Templates into the Participant Database on page 8 21 Adding Participants to a Reservation Template There are two ways to add participants to a Reservation template Define the participant directly during the reservation definition the participant can be Embedded in reservation or Linked depending on the selected mode Assign a Participant template to the reservation participant linked The Reservation template can include linked or embedded participants 7 33 Chapter 7 Database Temp
410. rence including terminals connected to the slave MCUs If a terminal has a name assigned to it the MCU will also display this name together with the terminal number The following information is available to the chair control terminal e The numbers assigned to each of the participants in the conference The number is composed of the MCU number and the terminal number A list of all the terminal numbers is displayed on the chairperson s endpoint as well as the names of all the other endpoints that support the H 243 standard Endpoint names when available are also displayed together with the terminal numbers e Requests for chair control from other participants The list of endpoint numbers and names is updated by the MCU on all the endpoints when participants connect or disconnect from the conference In Continuous Presence mode when the video layout is different from full screen the terminal number of the source video for each window is not indicated in the endpoint s video windows VIN2 mode MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Chair Control option is enabled in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording General Settings T Restricted Msg Service Type Noe Line Rate 384 kbps pi T Encryption r MsgSewiceName f SilencelT I VTX 100
411. rence parameters such as line rate audio algorithms audio tones video and more Participants adds participants to the reservation either from the Participant database or by defining new participants Video Sources selects the video layout when the session type is set to Continuous Presence or Software CP and enables Lecture Mode Meet Me Per Conference defines Meeting Rooms and Meet Me Per Conference Reservation templates when the General Meet Me Per Conf check box is selected Recording sets up recording options Conference General Parameters 4 Enter the template name in the Name box and fill in the other general parameters MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting the Scheduler Parameters 5 Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference starting date and time The Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Default Conference Properties 1 8 15 22 The date and time parameters are used for filtering enabling you to list all the templates that should be used to start an On Going Conference on the selected date This can be done if you do not want to reserve an actual conference on the MCU and use MCU resources 6 Define the start date and time 7 13 Chapter 7 Database Templates Defining the Settings Parameters 7 Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default C
412. rences by setting up each conference as a standard conference and then linking the participants and connecting the link In this mode the name of the master conference MasterConference is used as the dial out alias for the links from the slave conferences while the name of the slave conference Slave1 is used as the alias identifying the dial in participant used as the link from the slave conference Configuration Example In the configuration example shown in Figure 1 9 each of the Slave conferences includes one dial out participant used as the link to the master conference The dial out alias for each conference is the MCU prefix 1719 and the name of the master conference MasterConference The master conference MasterConference includes three dial in participants whose aliases are the names of their originating slave conferences Slavel Slave2 and Slave3 DTMF enabled cascading can also be applied to H 323 Enhanced Cascading conferences For detail see Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences on page 1 49 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Figure 1 9 illustrates the Enhanced Cascading links between conferences MasterConference e Party 1 e Party 2 e Slavei e Slave2 e Slave3 MCU 1 Prefix 1719 Slave1 Slave2 Slave3 e Link 1 e Link 2 e Link 3 e Party 11 e Party 21 e Party 31 e Party 12 e Party 22 e Party 32 e Party 13 e Party 23 e Party 33 MCU 2 MCU 3 MCU 4
413. rk with The system lists all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password DataBase Directory Options Window Saye Database Refresh Database Fg Filter B ion Template AccordDB Open D B Participant Template gt Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC gt The window of the selected database opens Reservations in database window I cx H gt Root af name LineRate Audioalg video Session Office Reservation te H Polycom Office Reservation E weboffice E weboffice_v2 H a ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 X ry SE CP conf dipam alpha 1 28 Auto Transcoding No eo oe H e G7221 alpha 21 ioe conf 512kbps Auto Continuous Presence No x AY a H 323 conf alpha 17 beret alpha 21 384 kbps 24 G722 1 Sir Video Switching No pis 3 H pey H323 cnf alpha 22 S H 323 conf apha17 128kbps 16 G728 5iren7 video Switching No Ee X EH H323 Lecture Mode 3329 cnf alpha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching No cha SAA z H pey Lecture Show phat ibr323 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence No Participants in database window E Participants in a iolx ELS Root H gt office Reservation i Henry Dial in Dial in Ba Joe i Melissa Dial in Ba polycom Debo 29501111 Dial out Bs Sarah Dial in Bs Tanya Dial in H Polycom WebOffice weboffice_v2
414. rmat Select the audio algorithm for the Entry Queue If target conferences are Audio Only conferences select G 711 If IP Only you have an additional option G 723 G 729 If set to Auto the system tries to connect the participants using the best possible audio algorithm selecting it in the following order G 728 G 722 G711 Select the Video format for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings The Video Format options are enabled only when defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and when the video protocol is H 261 or H 263 Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate video format according to the participant properties Select video format to force the participant to connect using one of these frame resolutions For a detailed description of the video format options see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings Select the Frame Rate for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings This option is enabled only for Video Switching conferences set to H 261 or H 263 Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate frame rate Select one of the frame rates to force the participant to connect using this frame rate For a detailed description of the frame rates values see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conf
415. rticipant connected to the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 26 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTY CONNECTED SIP PARTY CONNECTED on page A 48 A 9 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 2 CDR Event a Continued ae CALL SETUP The call setup of a SIP participant For a description of the fields see Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 15 24 H323 CALL SETUP SIP CALL SETUP on page A 47 SIP CLEAR The clear indication termination of the INDICATION call of a SIP participant For a description of the fields see Table A 25 Event Fields for Events 16 25 H323 CLEAR INDICATION SIP CLEAR INDICATION on page A 48 RECORDING A recording event such as recording LINK started or resumed occurred For a description of the fields see Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK on page A 56 RECORDING Note This event type is only applicable to SYSTEM LINK Readi Recorders A recording system playback or recording event such as playback started or resumed occurred For a description of the fields see Table A 33 Event Fields for Event 27 RECORDING SYSTEM LINK on page A 57 SIP PRIVATE Contains SIP Private Extensions EXTENSIONS information For a description of the fields see Table A 34 Event Fields for Event 28 SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS on page A 58 A 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 CDR Even
416. rvation template icon in the Reservation in Database window The participant is added to the Reservation template as a linked participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Adding Participants from another Reservation Template An additional method of adding participants to a Reservation template is to copy the participant information from another Reservation template defined in the same Reservation Template file or Reservation database or in a different Reservation Template file or Reservation database The template you are copying from is the source template The template to which you are copying is the target template To copy a participant from a Reservation Template 1 Open the Reservation Template file or the Reservation database containing the source Reservation template In the Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree and locate the desired Reservation template Double click the icon of the source Reservation template or click the plus icon next to the source Reservation template icon A list of participants defined in the Reservation template is displayed below the Reservation template s icon _ Oo Root H Office Reservation im Office Reservation m Ea g Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy Ba Alice Copy As m F
417. rvice 6 Define the appropriate parameters For a description of these parameters see Table 2 4 on page 2 27 7 Click Next The Conference ID dialog box opens Conference Id x Request Conference Id Password Join failure Message v Add Message File lt Back Next gt Cancel Help The following messages and prompts can be played to request the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration Table 2 13 Entry Queue Properties Conference Id Request Prompts the participant for the conference Numeric Conference ID ID or password depending on the Entry Queue mode Password as configured in the system cfg file Join Failure When the participant entered an incorrect conference Message Numeric ID or password requests the participant to type the Numeric ID or password again 2 55 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 8 Assign an audio file to each message type as follows a Click the table entry Name The message type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit s memory b Select the appropriate file from the Message File list want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 s If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you
418. ryption e Only two cascade options Master and Slave are available for H 320 H 239 P C cascade There is no Auto Cascade mode e IVR is supported However if Node Type in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box is set to MCU no IVR service is available e H 243 site names for H 320 are supported e AnH 320 link must be configured to H 263 using 30 Fps 5 13 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences To enable H 239 People Content in Video Switching Cascading conferences 1 In the Conference Properties Settings dialog box in the Dual Stream Mode list select H 239 People Content Default Conference Properties Product Management 7 x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording r General Settings I Resticted d Line Rate 384 kbps X Mea Serica lype None X ji a Msg Service Name I Silence IT I VTx 1000 lt lt Basic I Conference Lock IT Mute Meet Me E n F OnHod F Termina irperson Exits T Enable Invite JT Auto Termination Before First Join 5 Min After Last Quit M E Min r Media Settings Audio Alg 56 G71 x Dual Stream Mode H 239 People Content lt lt Basic Fe Roll Call Pro Motion Auto ad I Enty Tone Roll Call announcement E EA Hoss s End Time Alert Tone 5 Min Z Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Midea Foma ar 7 Frame Rate 30 pic sec z Talk Hold Time 15 Sec Quality Puto z Audi
419. ryption for Entry Queues 0 eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeee 1 35 Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level 0 0 eee 1 36 Monitoring the Encryption Status eee ee eeeeeeeeeee 1 39 Extending the Conference Duration 0 0 eee eeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 1 41 Setting Auto Extend at the MCU Level eee 1 42 Setting Auto Extend at the Conference Level 0 0 eee 1 43 Permanent Conference cscciiiicsssevecsz coda stiscedeasedaieatacdesiereaesozosonenes 1 45 Cascading Conferences sisssescccsicesesessseeseetevsccnests in ineine isian 1 47 Simple Cascading Modes sssisusessiniisrisidniiiedss 1 47 MCU CIUStet sicccsctcccccustcnessessattestessascoteceseustostsuasscotesvensnovenves 1 47 MCU Rollover secccicceciasiestieseiostessasecataseaesionriceesedecateoeueatenes 1 49 Table of Contents Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences eee 1 49 Simple Cascading sis secssiiscsessuscssetsperosavsedevsestessorsousosascveuerepeasoeey 1 50 Simple Cascading with an ISDN Link ee 1 50 Simple Cascading with an H 323 Link ooo eee 1 53 Enhanced Cascading with H 323 Links wo eee 1 56 Ad Hoc Auto Cascading and Cascading Links 0 1 60 Defining Auto Cascading Entry Queues eee 1 62 Creating the Dial out Link between Conferences 1 63 Monitoring Auto Cascaded Conference Links 00 1 65 Video Layout Display in Cascaded Conferences 1 66 LAMM TALL ONS siinseist niio reiissi 1 67 Configuring Large Video Switching Co
420. s Settings dialog box opens Conference Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Res Name field enter the name of the Reservation Defaults set that you are creating Define the Settings parameters The Settings Video parameters are defined in the same manner as in the Conference Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference If the Audio Only option is selected only the fields pertaining to Audio are shown Audio Only conference fields are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining a New On Going Audio Only Conference Click the Settings2 tab The Conference Properties Settings2 dialog box opens Conference Properties x Settings Settings2 Attended None zi Talk Hold Time 1 5 a Sec AV Msg Name Audio Mix Depth 3 Sites IT Auto termination Lecture Type None 7 Before First Joi f1 a Min F Timer Interval E H Sec After Last Quit 1 Min Lecturer name I Same Layout I Auto Layout I Entry Queue Access Onnar nn Entry Gueue Name Duration B E Hou f0 a Min J Meet me per conf Min fa Parties I7 Dial Out Manually P Auto add Max Participants Auto Tock I Enable Party f Meeting Room IF OnHold F Limit nces i JT Mute Meet Me Patties I Start Conf Requires Chairperson Background al zl
421. s Audio Alg Auto X Video Format Auto v Frame Rate Auto v Video Protocol Auto v F Annex N I Annex P I Annex F Line Rate je al I Restricted e You can set either a defined IVR Service or a defined Entry Queue Service as the default VR Message Service but not both If an IVR Service is selected as default you must assign the Entry Queue Service here 2 59 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Viewing the Audio Messages Status 2 60 The audio files for the messages and voice prompts are sorted and stored in groups according to their duration There are five duration categories 2 second 4 second 8 second 16 second and 32 second groups The messages are sorted in the Audio card of the MCU The number of messages that can be downloaded to the Audio card for each of these groups is listed in Table 2 14 Table 2 14 Default Number Of Messages for Each Duration Category Message Duration Category Number of Voice Messages in Group You can view the number of audio files that are currently stored on the Audio card and the status of the downloading process if you check the status during the download process To view the status of the audio messages 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click Messages Status New IVR Service New Entry Queue Servi
422. s Printing IVR DTMF Codes You can print the list of operations and their corresponding DTMF codes defined in the IVR Message Service Data can be sent to a printer saved to a file or copied to a clipboard The printed list includes the operation the keys that are required to activate the function and the type of permission for this operation chairperson only or everyone To print the list of DTMF codes 2 62 1 2 Expand the IVR Message Services list Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service whose DTMF codes are to be printed and then click Print IVR Data BE IVR Msg Services i ag FO Ef fun v Set s Default Delete Del Co The Print dialog box opens Name Of Operator Report To File Printer C ClipBoard Cancel In the Name Of Operator field enter the name of the operator who initiated the report optional x From the Report To options select the destination to which the codes data is to be sent File To save the list of DTMF codes to a text file Printer To print the list of DTMF codes to the default printer Clipboard To copy the list of DTMF codes to the clipboard for use by other applications 5 Click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II If you select the Report To File option a browser dialog box opens 6 Enter the file name select the destination directory and then click Save In the sample text file of DTMF codes the firs
423. s follows 0 Operation succeeded 1 Operation failed Failure Code The error code or 0 if no error occurred Table A 34 Event Fields for Event 28 SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS cei em Sea Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The participant s identification number as assigned by the system Called Party ID The called participant ID Asserted Identity The identity of the user sending a SIP message as it was verified by authentication Charging Vector A collection of charging information Preferred Identity The identity the user sending the SIP message wishes to be used for the P Asserted Header field that the trusted element will insert MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 35 Event Fields for Event 29 CHAIRPERSON JOINED CONFERENCE ee ee ae Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Table A 36 Event Fields for Event 100 OPERATOR TERMINATE Co ene eee Terminated By The login name of the operator who terminated the conference Table A 37 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 OPERATORS DELETE PARTY OPERATOR DISCONNECTED PARTY OPERATOR RECONNECT PARTY Sees OSE ene NE Operator Name The login name of the operator who reconnected the participant to the conference or disconnected or deleted the participant from the conference Party Name The name of the participant reconnected to the conference
424. s in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box If you clear this check box all four User Defined fields will be hidden User Defined 1 2 and 3 Enter the text to be displayed as the title of the User Defined fields in the Conference Properties General dialog box using up to 25 characters These titles replace the default titles User Defined 1 etc If left blank the default titles are displayed Note The titles of the User Defined fields appear only in the MGC Manager application In the WebCommander application only the default titles are shown User Defined 1 2 3 and 4 Enter the text to be displayed as the title of the User Defined fields in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box using up to 25 characters These titles replace the default titles User Defined 1 etc If left blank the default titles are displayed Note The titles of the User Defined fields appear only in the MGC Manager application In the WebCommander application only the default titles are shown 6 39 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 40 Te Click OK to confirm and store the new User Defined Defaults set Defining Conference Defaults To define a conference default 1 2 3 Expand the Database Manager window Expand the Defaults tree Right click the Conference Defaults icon A pop up menu appears Sak Conference Defaults Click Add New Conference Defaults The Conference Propertie
425. s in units of 0 01 seconds Possible values are in the range of 150 to 1000 that is 1 5 to 10 seconds The maximum number of participants whose audio can be mixed The range is 1 5 Indicates whether or not the conference is an Operator conference as follows 0 The conference is not an operator conference 1 The conference is an operator conference The video protocol as follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 3 H 264 4 H 264 255 Auto Indicates the Meet Me Per Conference setting as follows 0 The Meet Me Per Conference option is disabled 1 The Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled and dial in participants can join the conference by dialing the dial in number Note This field is only relevant if the Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled The number of Network Services assigned to the conference The value can be between 0 to 30 A 23 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File A 24 Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 Ge ee Network Service Information Conference Password Chair Mode Cascade Mode For each Network Service assigned to the conference there will be 3 or 4 fields as follows The name of the Network Service The number of phone numbers defined for the Network Service Possible values are 1 or 2 The first phone number defined for the Network Service The second phone number defined for the Network Service Applicable only i
426. s participant 1 31 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Media Encryption Encryption is available at the conference and participant levels based on AES 128 Media Encryption and DH 1024 Key Exchange standards It is supported in all types of video conferences and IP Only Audio Only conferences Audio Only PSTN and ISDN participants cannot be encrypted 1 32 Lg ISDN and IP encrypted participants require more resources than non encrypted participants Media Encryption guidelines Endpoints must support both AES 128 encryption and DH 1024 key exchange standards which are compliant with H 233 H 234 H 320 and H 235 H 323 to encrypt and to join an encrypted conference The encryption mode of the endpoints is not automatically recognized therefore the encryption mode must be set for the conference or the participants when defined Encrypted conferences with ISDN participants require the installation of a MUX card Encrypted conferences with IP participants require the installation of an IP card Encryption is enabled at the MCU level and can be applied at the conference level or participant level MCU level encryption and system handling of encrypted and non encrypted participants are enabled in the system cfg file Mixing encrypted and non encrypted endpoints in one call is supported only for H 323 defined participants In Video Switching conferences only predefined ISDN participants whose encryption
427. sage Service to set as default and then click Set As Default lt i Polycom Standard Set As Default Delete Del Properties A check mark appears next to the function in the pop up menu and the icon is highlighted The AV Message Service name is displayed in bold print ei Polycom Enl v Set As Default Delete Del Properties You cannot set an AV Message Service as default while there are active conferences and reservations saved on the MCU 4 11 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Modifying an AV Message Service You may change the selection of the video and audio files set in the AV Message Service However the Message Service name cannot be modified To change the Message Service name delete it from the list and define a new one with a different name To change the AV Message Service parameters 1 View the defined AV Message Services as described in Listing the AV Message Services on page 4 10 2 Right click the icon of the AV Message Service you want to modify and then click Properties Set As Default Delete Del Properties __ gt The AV Message Service dialog box opens x Name Add new file Video File Audio File Audio On Hold File RIVNDELACY x TPLY_ATT ACA v XGEN_ATT ACA x M Set Music Welcome Period 1 00 Cancel 3 Modify the AV Message Service parameters as descr
428. scading In Simple Cascading one conference is connected directly to another conference With Simple Cascading it is possible to connect conferences using both ISDN and H 323 links Conferences can run on different MCUs or on the same MCU using cascading on a single MCU enables you to run very large conferences whose number of participants exceeds the predefined maximum number of participants per conference Figure 1 4 Simple Cascading Scheme In Figure 1 4 a participant dials from one MCU to another establishing a dial in link in conference A and a dial out link in conference B Simple Cascading with an ISDN Link In Simple Cascading you set up two conferences In conference A you define one participant as a link from conference B This participant is defined as the dial in ISDN participant Meet Me per Party and you enter the dial in number for this participant In conference B you define one participant as a link to conference A This participant is defined as the dial out ISDN participant the dial out number is the same as the MCU number of the dial in link in conference A F mea Dials Ue ii 9251995 ert il IMI na All MCU 7 Hana Conference A Conference B Participant Link In Participant Link Out Connection Type Dial in Connection Type Dial out MCU Number 9251995 Dial out Number 9251995 Figure 1 5 Simple Cascading with an ISDN link 1 50 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To define the ISDN link
429. scription of the fields see Table A 11 Calling Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 32 The called participant information For a description of the fields see Table A 12 Called Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 33 Table A 11 Calling Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 Cie 7 Number Type Number Plan The type of calling number as follows 0 Unknown default 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated The calling number plan as follows 0 Unknown 1 ISDN default 2 Telephony 9 Private MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 11 Calling Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 Continued ee eee Presentation The presentation indicator as follows Indication 0 Presentation allowed default 1 Presentation restricted 2 Number not available 255 Unknown Screening The screening indicator as follows Indication 0 User not screened default 1 User verification succeeded 2 User verification failed 3 Network provided 255 Unknown Calling Phone The telephone number used for dial in Number Table A 12 Called Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 a ec Number Type The type of number called as follows 0 Unknown default 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated Number Plan The calle
430. se To register the SQL Database in ODBC 1 6 20 On the Start menu click Control Panel E Adobe Reader 6 0 S Adobe FrameMaker 6 0 E E mail I Microsoft Outlook my Documents L My Recent Documents 2 My Pictures Sy My music T My computer My Network Places Help and Support Access and File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Qi O B n gt Folders j 2 x 9 s Address G Control Panel S Add Hardware T Add or Remove F Administrative Tools EA Automatic Updates gt Date and Time ilDiskShare Configuration EN Display Folder Options Ef Fonts Game Controllers Dinternet Options Slava Plug in Sakeyboard Email Mouse e Network Connections Power Options Printers and Faxes QuickTime y Adjust your computer settings For vision hearing and n Installs and troubleshoots hardware a and Windows components Configure administrative settings for your computer S NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager e Phone and Modem Options 9 Regional and Language Options setup Windows to automatically deliver important upda Set the date time and time zone for your computer DiskShare Configuration Change the appearance of your desktop such as the b Customize the display of files and folders change file as Add change and manage Fonts on your computer Add remove and configure game controller hardware s Config
431. ser Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 J I Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Gecuned en Gan D fu ite yo Congo coo CG Gnu Mayen ot T Audio Only Tr vip T Audio Only F vip ee T E Save Participant I Save Participant SOPRA A Help ave Participant Cancel Help Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out Table 1 6 summarizes the participant definition options in the Master and Slave conferences based on Figure 1 10 on page page 1 57 Table 1 6 Participant Definition Options Summary Link 1 defined in In conference Slave1 define a dial out participant conference Slave1 Link 1 whose dial out alias is the prefix of the MCU and the master conference name the alias in the example above is 1719MasterConference Link 2 defined in In conference Slave2 define a dial out participant conference Slave2 Link 2 whose dial out alias is the prefix of the MCU and the master conference name the alias in the example above is 1719MasterConference 1 58 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 1 6 Participant Definition Options Summary Continued Link 3 defined in conference Slave3 Slave1 defined in conference MasterConference Slave2 defined in conference MasterConference Slave3 defined in conference MasterConference In conference Slave3 define a dial out participant Link 3 whose dial out alias
432. servation template to an On Going conference Modify a participant s Line Rate Modify a participant s Dial In Dial Out definition Delete a participant from a Reservation template Copy Reservation templates from one file to another or from one database to another Base a Reservation template on another Reservation template Move Reservation templates from one file to another or from one database to another Copy an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation Template file or the Reservation Database Modify a Reservation template Delete a Reservation template Print the Reservation template information Add a participant from an On Going conference or a Reservation to a Participant Template file or to the Participant database Modify a participant s definition in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database Modify a participant in a Reservation template from linked to embedded and vice versa Delete participants from a Participant Template file In all the above operations multi selection of Participant and or Reservation templates is available using the standard Windows techniques MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template It is possible to view the list of participants assigned to a Reservation template stored in a Reservation Template file or in the Reservation database To list the participants in a Reservations Template in a Reservation Temp
433. setting is identical to the conference setting can connect to the conference An encrypted ISDN participant cannot join a non encrypted conference and vice versa Different states of encryption for predefined IP participants is possible based on a system cfg flag settings ALLOW_ENCRYPT_IN_PARTY_LEVEL Encryption is not available in all countries Contact Polycom Support to enable it MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II e Conference level encryption must be set at reservation stage that is during conference definition and cannot be changed once the conference is running e In Cascaded conferences the link between the cascaded conferences must be encrypted Enabling Encryption at the MCU Level Encryption is enabled for the MCU in the system cfg file When encryption is disabled at the MCU level all encryption options are disabled for all conferences running on that MCU and encryption is not included in the capabilities set declared by the MCU To enable Encryption AES encryption is not available in all countries and to enable it at the MCU level contact Polycom support When enabled encryption can be applied at the conference level and at the participant level Encryption should be enabled on the MCU only if the appropriate license was obtained from Polycom In addition you can define whether access to conferences for encrypted and non encrypted IP participants is done at the conference level or at the participant
434. settings are required To set the Audio bridge unit to run large Video Switching conferences Standard Audio card 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Inthe Browser area expand the MCU tree to list its options 3 Expand the MCU Configuration tree to list its options A list of options appears below the MCU Configuration icon 4 Expand the Cards tree to display the cards installed in the MCU Expand the list of units by selecting the slot containing the Standard Audio Card MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 6 Right click the Audio Bridge unit LE and then click 1 30 Cal A A A MCU Product Management Normal Configuration ig Cards Connections a IVR Msg Services Network Services Operators Gateway Configuratio Profiles Slot 3 AUDIO Yj tt Reset Unit Disable Unit Enable Unit Set 4s Primary Glock Source Set 4s Backup Glock Source 4 16 6 12 A bullet appears next to the chosen configuration This audio bridge unit is now reserved for large Video Switching conferences 1 69 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Automatic Line Rate Detection 1 70 The MGC unit can automatically detect the communication mode for example the type of video protocol and the bandwidth of incoming and outgoing ISDN calls and connect the participant accordingly This capab
435. sion a special card that is attached to the audio card It stores up to eight audio messages four Attended messages and four On Hold messages that can be played while the participants wait in the Welcome queue Only one message extension per MCU can be installed Music card optional an I O card attached to the rear of the Audio module at the MCU s rear panel It is used to play back music or recorded messages from an external device such as a tape or CD player If both extensions Music and Messages are installed in the MCU background music can be played from the external device while an audio message is played from the Messages Extension When no message is played the system plays the music audio from the external device When the audio massage is played the volume of the background music audio is automatically decreased and then increased again at the end of the audio message Only one music card per MCU can be installed e MUX the video slides are downloaded and stored in the MUX memory Up to four slides may be stored in the MUX memory one per Message Service To run Greet and Guide conferences all MUX modules must be compatible with each other LS For more information see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 4 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Greet and Guide Tools The MGC Manager includes tools that allow you to convert the audio and video files into a format recognized by the MCU and send
436. son Password or the participant s Alias The Conference IVR Service assigned to the conference must be configured to check the external database for the Chairperson password only when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key either pound or star In addition it must be configured to prompt for the chairperson identifier key and password MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Requirements for Ad Hoc Conferencing Before a participant can initiate an Ad Hoc conference the following components must be defined Hardware Ad Hoc conferences require the use of an Audio board Profiles A Profile is a set of parameters for a conference similar to a template which is used to define the Ad Hoc conference parameters Profiles are stored on the MCU s hard disk and can only be accessed by an operator with Superuser permission Entry Queue Service with Conference Numeric ID support From version 6 0 on each conference is assigned a unique conference ID The Entry Queue Service is configured to prompt for the conference Numeric ID This ID is used to route participants to their destination conferences In Ad Hoc conferencing the Numeric ID is used to check whether the destination conference is already defined or running on the MCU and if not to verify whether the user has the right to start a new conference If an external database application is used to verify the participant s right to start a new conference the E
437. ssigned parameters The Numeric ID entered by the participant is compared against the database If the system finds a match the participant is granted the permission to start a new conference In a similar way the conference Entry password or chairperson password is checked against the database and if a match is found the participant access to the conference is granted To work with an external database application the Entry Queue and IVR Services must be configured to use the external database application for authentication For more details about Ad Hoc conferencing see Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication For Ad Hoc conferencing the MCU has to be configured with the Numeric ID routing mode Audio and Video Conversion Tools The MGC Manager includes tools that allow you to convert the audio and video files into a format recognizable by the Polycom MCU and to send the converted files to the MCU for storage in the Audio card s memory This step is required in order to use the audio files with the IVR Message Service and the Entry Queue Service The conversion process must be performed prior to the definition of the IVR Properties and the IVR Message Service The conversion process is the same as for AV Message Services used in Greet and Guide conferences MGC Manager is shipped with default audio files in English and Spanish in wav and MGC internal format aca that can be used with the existing
438. t IP Configuration New Reservation Resource Report Faults MCU Utils Retrieve Diagnostic Files Fast Configuration Wizard Play Batch Telnet IP Terminal Create SSL Certificate Request Send SSL Certificate Stop Current Indication Repeating Remove MCU Reset MCU Properties The CDR List window opens displaying the list of conference records currently stored in the MCU s memory SCDR List Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 O x File Connection View Help Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 Ejj lt 2 hene olse L burton _ Reserved Start Tine Reserved Duration cot ofset stats oo ouu H PoLycom Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 2 Ongoing conference detbie4 Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 00 20 33 Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator B Product Management Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 01 59 56 Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed H test Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 01 59 56 Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed 2 debbie3 Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 01 59 56 Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed B Powvcom Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed B Pouvcom Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 00 32 00 Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator debbiez Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 00 35 43 Feb 01 2004 0
439. t Properties You can also add existing participants to the template from a Participant Template file For details see To add a participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database using the Conference Properties dialog box on page 8 31 6 If you are defining a Continuous Presence or Lecture Mode Conference click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Select the appropriate Video Layout and if you have assigned participants to the template you can force them to the selected video window For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Video Sources If you are defining a Lecture Mode conference you can enable Lecture Mode and define Lecture Mode parameters For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options If you have checked the Meet Me per Conference option in the Conference Properties General dialog box click the Meet Me per Conf tab Define the Meet Me per Conference parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms The MGC Manager provides a digital recording option with the ReadiRecorder and the RSS 2000 The Readi Recorder enables recording of the audio channel of both Audio Only and video conferences The RSS 2000 enables recording of both the audio and the
440. t Type The endpoint type as follows 0 Terminal 1 Gateway 2 MCU 3 Gatekeeper 4 Undefined Table A 25 Event Fields for Events 16 25 H323 CLEAR INDICATION SIP CLEAR INDICATION id eee er Party Name The name of the participant Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Disconnect Initiator Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Table A 26 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTY CONNECTED SIP PARTY CONNECTED a Ce Party Name The name of the participant An empty field denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose name is unspecified Party ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 26 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTY CONNECTED SIP PARTY CONNECTED Continued en CSC ey Party State The participant status as follows 1 Connected 8 Secondary the participant could not connect the video channels and is connected via audio only Capabilities The remote capabilities in H 245 format An empty field means that capabilities are unavailable Remote The remote communication mode in H 245 format Communication Mode Secondary Cause Note This field is only relevant if the Party State is Secondary The cause for the secondary connection not being able to connect the video cha
441. t Types Continued CHAIRPERSON A chairperson joined the conference JOINED For a description of the fields see CONFERENCE Table A 35 Event Fields for Event 29 CHAIRPERSON JOINED CONFERENCE on page A 59 OPERATOR An operator terminated the conference TERMINATE For a description of the fields see Table A 36 Event Fields for Event 100 OPERATOR TERMINATE on page A 59 101 OPERATORADD An operator added a participant during the PARTY conference For a description of the fields see Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY on page A 38 OPERATORS An operator deleted a participant from the DELETE PARTY conference For a description of the fields see Table A 37 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 OPERATORS DELETE PARTY OPERATOR DISCONNECTED PARTY OPERATOR RECONNECT PARTY on page A 59 OPERATOR An operator disconnected a participant DISCONNECTED For a description of the fields see PARTY Table A 37 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 OPERATORS DELETE PARTY OPERATOR DISCONNECTED PARTY OPERATOR RECONNECT PARTY on page A 59 A 11 Appendix A CDR Fields Unformatted File Table A 2 CDR Event Types Continued A 12 OPERATOR RECONNECT PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY OPERATOR SET END TIME OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE An operator reconnected a partic
442. t column lists the function to be performed the DTMF name the second column lists the DTMF string to be used and the third column lists the required permission I R6O I R txt Notepad Fle x File Edit Format Help IVR Service IVR70 unlock conference secure Conference unsecure Conference Increase my Broadcasting volume Decrease my Broadcasting volume Mute all but me Cancel Mute All but me Change Password Place conference on hold Reinstate on hold conference Mute dial in participants Cancel mute dial in participants Start voting session stop voting session New voting session Cancel voting session Ask a question Cancel my quere ton i Dial out to Invitee Admit invitee amp continue dial out Disconnect invitee amp continue dial out Admit invitee amp return to conference Disconnect invitee amp return to conference play Menu 1e Roll call Disable Roll call Rol call Review Names Roll call Stop Review Names Start Dial out conference Termination Start Click amp view Change to Chairperson Increase Listening volume Decrease Listening volume override Mute All but Me DTMF string Permission Everyone chairperson Everyone Everyone chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson Everyone Everyone chairperson Chairperson Chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperson Everyone Everyone chairperson chairperson chairperson chairperso
443. t digit identifier The system requests the participant to enter a random key and after any key is pressed moves the participant to the conference This option is used mainly for dial out participants and to prevent an answering machine from entering the conference None The participant is moved to the conference without any password request 2 31 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 15 If you have enabled the conference password request and defined the system behavior for dial in and dial out participants select the various audio messages that will be played in each case want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 28 j If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you Table 2 6 IVR Conference Password Messages Eo eer e Request Select the audio file that prompts the participant for Password the conference password Retry Password Select the audio file that requests the participant to enter the conference password again when failing to enter the correct password Request Digit Select the audio file that prompts the participant to press any key 16 Click Next The General dialog box opens x Name Messagefe dhl Lock ON locked aca Lock OFF Biling Number Added to 0 amp 4 Removed from Q amp A Next 084 Questioner Secure ON
444. table are separate entities they are both organized by the same Group hierarchy Only users who have permission to configure the database can define the Groups hierarchy and the access rights of users to the various Groups in the database MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a New Group To define a new group 1 Log in to the MGC Database Manager and list the Database categories 2 Expand the Groups tree by clicking the plus icon next to the Groups icon gH DatabaseManager ioj x File Edit View Options Help IB AccordDB A A Defaults EE Root L User Defined Defaults LE Conference Defaults Participant Defaults 4 MGC Manager Defaults E Labels Permission My Group a UserGroups ey ACCORD E Administration Operator EE POLYCOM eS user1 user2 i WebOffice Ready Data Base Name AccordDB Sys DSN C 1_ 3 Ifthe list already includes several groups expand the tree until the group to which you wish to add a sub group is displayed On first entry only the Root group is listed when expanding the Groups tree When upgrading from a previous version that did not support Groups when the Update Database process is performed by the MGC Database Manager it creates a group for each of the listed users and assigns access rights to that group Participant and Reservation templates are automatically assigned to the appropriate user group according
445. tables Logging into the Database Manager 6 28 Access to the Database Manager is password protected Depending on the Permission Type assigned to the user different options are enabled By default the following login names and passwords are defined in the MGC Database Manager application Table 6 1 Database Passwords ACCORD ACCORD Administrator MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 6 1 Database Passwords These users differ in the functions they are allowed to perform and the information they can access By default five Permission types that define the access rights for each user are defined in the system Administrator Operator Moderator Moderator Monitoring only and Participant The permission types are defined in the Permissions table in the MGC Database Manager application All users can access the database and define their personal reservations participants and general application defaults All database users can create a different set of defaults to use locally or over the network However only participants with the highest permission rights Administrator can manage the default sets for all the users on the network In addition users with the highest permission rights Administrator can perform the following operations e Define new database users and their access rights e Define labels to be assigned to conferences and participants These labels can be used to filter the database fo
446. tered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Since the MGC database is not password protected select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes that are displayed by the system If you register the database from the ODBC Control Panel you must refresh the database list manually in the MGC Manager application by selecting Database ODBC and then Refresh the Database List from the Database menu The system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes that are displayed by the system MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II SQL Server Configuration and Registration Optional This step is required only if you have an SQL Server installed in your configuration Otherwise skip this step Restoring the SQL Database In this step the SQL database supplied with the MGC Manager application is restored and configured in the SQL Server application To restore and configure the SQL database 1 On the Start Programs menu click Microsoft SQL Server and then click Enterprise Manager e Windows Update KILL opersrvv4_5 gt A Accessories amp Internet Explorer gy Documents Outlook Express o B z Administrative Tools al g He fa Mic QL Server t fii Enterprise Manager o ES Search
447. text box SysConfig system cfg 172 22 188 40 lolx x EA m Section EXTERNAL DB OK ENABLE EXTERNAI EXTERNAL B8IP i Cancel EXTERNAI 80 M Sub sec Item Edtvaue NO Make sysenc file In the Edit value text box enter the value YES 6 Click the Set value button 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to set the values of the following flags Table 3 1 System cfg values for accessing external database application Flag oo Description and Value EXTERNAL_DB_IP The IP address of the external application server EXTERNAL_DB_ The port number used by the MCU to access the PORT external application server For the WebCommander application you must specify 5005 EXTERNAL_DB_ The user name defined in the external database LOGIN application for the MCU For the WebCommander application the default user name is POLYCOM EXTERNAL_DB_ The password associated with the user name PASSWORD defined for the MCU in the external database application For the WebCommander application the default password is POLYCOM 3 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 1 System cfg values for accessing external database application Flag o Description and Value EXTERNAL_DB_ The URL of the external database application DIRECTORY For the sample script application the URL is lt virtual directory gt SubmitQuery asp To set the system validation mode for starting a new conference
448. the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference The Conference Properties General dialog box opens allowing you to define the general parameters of the conference 2 Define the conference General parameters such as name duration passwords optional and whether the conference is Standard or a Meeting Room For a detailed description of conference setup see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 In the Supported Network box select IP 4 In the Video Session box click the Continuous Presence option and then select Software from the list Conference Properties E x General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Name Finance Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management User Defined 1 sid I Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 I Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 Say Conference Type p Media r Video Session Standard C Audio C Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio C IP ISDN C Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Remarks History 1 28 5 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management 3 x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording
449. tically 1 The conference was set to end automatically The conference line rate as follows 0 1B 1 2B 2 3B 3 4B 4 5B 5 6B 6 384 kbps 11 1536 kbps 12 1920 kbps 13 128 kbps 14 192 kbps 15 256 kbps 16 320 kbps MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START Continued a Conf Transfer Rate cont Restrict Mode Audio Rate Video Session 23 512 kbps 24 768 kbps 26 1152 kbps 29 1472 kbps Note This field is only relevant to dial out participants Note This field is not relevant to IP participants Indicates whether the conference was set to a restricted line rate 56 kbps or normal 64 kbps as follows 27 Restrict 28 Non restrict 255 Auto The audio algorithm as follows 11 8 kbps G 729 G 723 1 19 56 kbps G 711 When using restricted lines 56 kbps and 48 kbps are similar 21 48 kbps G 711 24 56 kbps G 722 G 711 If the endpoint does not support G 722 then the conference will use G 711 When using restricted lines 56 kbps and 48 kbps are similar 25 48 kbps G 722 G 711 If the endpoint does not support G 722 then the conference will use G 711 27 32 kbps Siren14 G 722 1 Siren7 28 24 kbps Siren14 G 722 1 Siren7 29 16 kbps Siren 7 G 728 255 Auto The video session type as follows 1 Video Switching 2 Video Transcoding 3 Continuous Presence 5 Software Continuous Presenc
450. ting Rooms and On Going Conferences assigned to other users of the same group even if the View All options are enabled in the Permissions assigned to this user Enter with Password The user will be able to view Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group if the appropriate password is entered upon their selection Enter without Password The user will be able to view all Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group without any restrictions Click the Close button to finish the access rights definition and exit this dialog box Defining a New Label 6 68 Labels are used to sort Reservation or Participant templates Labeling enables the remote user to filter conferences or Participant templates when accessing the database to schedule or monitor conferences To define a new Label In the Browser area right click the Label icon Click Add New Label to DB in the pop up menu bx Add New Label to dB MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Label Properties dialog box opens xi Nae O oz 3 Inthe Name box type the label name Sorting of the conferences or parties may be done according to this name 4 Choose OK to confirm and add the new Label to the database Viewing the Labels List In the Browser area click the Labels icon The Labels list is displayed in the Status area g DatabaseMa
451. tings 1 62 Defining Auto Cascading Entry Queues To eliminate IVR prompts when Auto Cascade links are created you must set up Auto Cascade Entry Queues on each MCU 1 Inthe Entry Queue Properties dialog box select the Cascade check box Entry Queue Properties Product Management xi r Entry Queue Settings Entry Queue Service SA IF vTx 1000 r Target Conference Settings Audio Alg Auto z Video Format auto v m Target Conferences I Audio Only Frame Rate auto E T IP Only Video Protocol Auto v J Encryption F Annex N I Annex P DT Annex F Video Switching Line Rate 2B X Tl Restricted Transcoding Continuous Presence Dialin Number 1 Dialin Number 2 2 Enter a value in the Numeric ID field The Numeric ID must be identical in the Auto Cascading Entry Queues of all the MCUs Leave the Ad Hoc check box cleared 4 Proceed to configure the Entry Queue as for any other Entry Queue MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Creating the Dial out Link between Conferences The dial out link participant is created or added in the linked conference Conference A The dial out string defined for the participant is the dialing string required to connect to the destination conference Conference B via the Cascade enabled Entry Queue defined on the MCU hosting the destination cascaded conference The dial out participant can be def
452. tion In the external database application you must define all participants users with rights to start a new conference using Ad Hoc conferencing For each user defined in the database you enter the conference ID Conference Password optional and Chairperson Password when applicable billing code Conference general information corresponding to the User Defined 1 field in the Profile properties and user s PIN code The same user definitions can be used for conference access authentication that is to determine who can join the conference as a participant and who as a chairperson Participant authentication can also be done using the participant s CLI Caller ID In such a case the system does not prompt for conference password and the query to the external database application is automatically sent using the participant s CLI The authentication mode of the participant s right to join the conference is controlled by a system cfg flag 3 3 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Entry Queue Level Conference Initiation Validation with an External Database Application Starting a new conference with external database application validation checking first if the conference is already running entails the following steps MCU T i Tmn External Database lt rui Uia 7 g g il Ongoing Conference SS Gonfer nge _ ID 1001 lt 2 ix i Can pare Mey Prefix m m new conference Gatekeeper
453. tion and saving the new participants to an existing Participant Template file Defining the participants during the creation of a Reservation template and saving the new participants to an existing Participant Template file Copying the participant parameters from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to the Participant Template file Defining a Participant Directly The MGC Manager application does not need to be connected to an MCU when you add the participant to the Participant Template file To define a new Participant Template 1 Open a Participant Template file This is where the new Participant template will be stored To open an existing Participant Template file refer to Opening a Participant Template File on page 8 7 Right click in the Participant Template file window Do not right click on a Participant template icon as this displays a different menu Click New Participant W Participants 1 5 x Name Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address Channels New Participant Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Participant Properties dialog box opens Default Participant Properties x Identification Advanced Name D efault Participant Connection Type Interface Type Dialin ISDN kd Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party ka User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User De
454. to return to the conference unmuted The default voice message is To unmute and return to the conference press one Note This message is mandatory Optional Indicates which DTMF code to enter to adjust the sensitivity of the SilencelT algorithm and then return to the conference unmuted The noise detection sensitivity remains at the adjusted level until the end of the conference The default voice message is To reduce the noise detection level and return to the conference press three Optional A voice message indicating which DTMF code to enter to disable the SilencelT option and then return to the conference unmuted The default voice message is To disable noise detection and return to the conference press four Optional Indicates which DTMF code to enter to return to the conference and remain muted The default voice message is To return to the conference muted press two MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 11 IVR Properties SilencelT Options and Messages Continued SilencelT Message Description Unmute Reminder Indicates which DTMF code to enter to unmute the participant s line once they return to the conference muted This message is played once as a reminder when the participant has selected to return to the conference muted The default voice message is To unmute your line at any time press pound six Note This message is enabled and mandatory
455. to the AV Message Services list 11 Reset the MCU LY Before you reset the MCU ensure that no one else is using the MCU 4 9 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Listing the AV Message Services 4 10 To view the list of AV Message Services defined in the system 1 2 Connect to the MCU Expand the MCU options by double clicking the MCU icon or by clicking the plus icon next to the MCU icon Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU Configuration icon to expand the MCU Configuration options Click the plus icon next to the AV Msg Services icon or double click the AV Msg Services icon The list of AV Message Services is displayed AS sage Services lt i Polycom lt E standard gt Up to four AV Message Services can be defined in the system The default AV Message Service is indicated by a highlighted icon and bold name MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting an AV Message Service as the Default Service An AV Message Service can be set as the default service Attended wait or Welcome No Wait conferences in which the Message Service is not defined use the audio and video settings of the default AV Message Service To set an AV Message Service as the Default Service 1 Lg View the AV Message Services as described in Listing the AV Message Services on page 4 10 Right click the icon of the AV Mes
456. to the conference duration each time the system performs a new check to determine whether or not at least a single participant is connected to the conference and if resources are available for the extended conference Setting Auto Extend at the Conference Level Once the automatic extension parameters are enabled and defined in the system confer cfg file you can apply them to a specific conference using the Conference Properties Settings dialog box To set a conference to automatically extend 1 Inthe Conference Properties dialog box if the Media Settings area shows only the Basic settings click the Advanced button to display the advanced settings options 2 Select the End Time Alert Tone check box to apply the automatic extension of the conference duration 3 Set the value to define how many minutes before the end of the conference the system will play the End Time Alert Tone and display the end of conference alert icon rah 1 43 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings This value determines when the system checks for the first time if at least a single participant is still connected to the conference and if resources are available to automatically extend it This check is repeated x minutes before the added time segment is up to determine whether or not the conference should be extended again until the predefined maximum extension time is reached and the conference is automatically ended by the MCU Defa
457. ton The Create New Data Source dialog box opens Create New Data Source Microsoft FoxPro YFP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle Microsoft Paradox Driver db Microsoft Paradox Treiber db Microsoft Text Driver txt csv Microsoft Text Treiber txt csv Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver isual FoxPro Treiber VOOR 5 6 23 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 6 24 In the database type list Select SQL Server and then click Finish The Create a New Data Source to SQL Server window opens Create a New Data Source to SQL Server MGC WEB SERVER M In the Name box enter a name that will identify the database file in the MGC Web Server Manager application In the SQL Server drop down list select Local if the SQL Server is installed in the same computer as the MGC Web Manager application Otherwise select the server name from the drop down list Click Next to continue Create a New Data Source to SQL Server e Login ID Password seak ne J cee Hee MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 9 Keep the default settings as shown in the figure above and then click Next to continue 10 Click the Change the default database to check box and select the database that was restored in the SQL Server Create a New Data Source to SQL Server ndas appropriate while you are 11 Click Next to continue 12 To change the User Interface language used
458. tor Conference 1 Expand the Template Groups hierarchy by clicking the plus icon next to each Template Group until you locate the Template Group storing the Operator Reservation template 7 31 Chapter 7 Database Templates 2 Right click the Operator Reservation template icon to be defined as default and then click Default Attending Operator H E Operator Start Immediately Start New Participant Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Grr y Paste 4s Gtrl P Delete Del Properties The next time you access the right click pop up menu a check mark appears next to the function to indicate that the selected Operator Reservation template is set as default The selection of an Operator Reservation template as default automatically cancels the existing default setting To cancel the selection of an Operator Reservation template as default either repeat the definition procedure above or select another Operator Reservation template as default 7 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Participant Templates Participants can be added to Reservations or On Going Conferences using one of the following techniques Define a participant directly during the reservation definition without saving the participant information to the database This participant will be Embedded in the conference and is unique to the reservation The participant parameters a
459. toring Greet and Guide conferences describes the various options for monitoring Greet and Guide conferences e Operations that can be performed during On Going Conferences Greet and Guide tools that are used to prepare audio messages and video slides for the Greet and Guide conferences are described in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools 4 1 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Greet and Guide Conferences 4 The Greet and Guide conference is a form of an attended conference with an assigned AV Message Service in which participants are moved from one stage to another during their connection to the conference There are two types of Attended conferences e Welcome No Wait e Attended Wait In the Welcome No Wait conference the participant is greeted by a video slide and an audio message when connecting to the conference After a pre defined period the participant automatically connects to the conference without the operator s assistance In an Attended Wait conference the participant is greeted by the video slide and the audio message and waits for operator assistance in the Participants Queue The Greet and Guide software module enables the operator to perform the following operations e Provide personal guidance to conference participants e Customize the video slide and audio message played when participants connect to the MCU and move
460. trol by clicking on the pan tilt and zoom buttons in the camera s application As long as the participant keeps using the pan tilt and zoom buttons he retains the data token holder Once these buttons are no longer used the data token is returned to the MCU and can be passed to another participant while the LSD channel remains open If the token is not returned to the MCU when the participant is no longer controlling the far end camera the token can be withdrawn by the MCU When a participant requests the data token while another participant possesses it the request is rejected by the MCU When a participant is moved from an FECC LSD enabled conference to an FECC LSD disabled conference the MCU automatically closes the FECC LSD channel When a participant is moved from an FECC LSD disabled conference to an FECC LSD enabled conference the MCU automatically opens the FECC LSD channel for that participant To view FECC LSD conference properties and control the data token The FECC LSD token holder can control a video camera at a remote site During an On Going Conference when the FECC LSD option is enabled you can view the name of the participant holding the FECC LSD token You can withdraw the FECC LSD token from the participant and return it to the MCU whenever required This is usually done when problems occur while releasing the data token from one participant and transferring it to another for example when you want to transfer th
461. ts in a Cascading Conference When running a cascading conference once the connection between two or more conferences is established the MCUs exchange messages establishing the status of each conference either as a Master or a Slave and number all the terminals participating in the combined conference The number of the endpoint as assigned by the MCU can be viewed in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box Link In Properties Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Aggregation Number of Channels H221 2 Video Protocol Terminal Number identity Auto 0 2 Recording Cascade Status None 7 F Auto Detect I Restrict Only V AGC eo Cards only Not required for Yideo Sub Service Name ZERO Service Name pao Node Type Taken from service Terminal 5 21 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 5 22 The following parameters display the Cascading status Table 5 1 Participant Properties Cascading Parameters ieee See nS Terminal Number Displays the terminal number as assigned by the identity MCU The first number indicates the terminal s sequential number The second number indicates the MCU number Cascade Status Master indicates that the participant is part of a slave conference and is used as a link to a Master conference
462. ttings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Default Conference Duration f 2 00 Billing J Entry Queue Access IV Meet Me Per Conf Conference Type p Media Standard Audio C Meeting Room Video Audio Web Chairperson Password m m Video Session Video Switching Transcoding C Operator Continuous Presence Remarks D Remarks History Conference Parameters MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The conference definition options include both Audio Only and Video and Audio conferences For information on the conference definition parameters when defining Video and Audio conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference For Audio Only and Audio Look and Feel settings refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences The conference properties are logically grouped in the following tabs General defines the conference name duration password and type 7 11 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 12 Scheduler defines the duration and time parameters option is enabled in the MGC Manager Defaults in the MGC Database Manager The Scheduler tab appears only if the Show Time in DB Conference Template application Settings defines the confe
463. uch as a remote control IVR automates the connection to the conference process and enables the participant to perform various operations during the On Going Conference By combining the input of the caller with the menu driven scripts participants can call the conference dial in number and use a touch tone telephone or the endpoint s remote control to interact with the conferencing system The IVR system requires the installation of the Audio card in the MCU The Video card is required for the Click amp View application This chapter describes the following features and terms e What is an IVR Service and how it is used to access a conference e IVR hardware describes the hardware required to run an IVR enabled conference e IVR Stages describes the various participant statuses during a conference using the IVR system e The operations that can be performed during an On Going Conference to which an IVR Service is assigned an IVR enabled conference e Roll Call describes the Roll Call module of the IVR system e SilencelIT describes the SilenceIT feature used to automatically detect and mute noisy lines e Audio and Video Conversion Tools briefly describes the tools required to convert audio wav and video raw file into the MGC internal format aca and acv These tools are detailed in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools 2 1 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Qu
464. ueue where they are prompted for the conference password e When the participant enters the conference password or his her personal password it is sent to the external database application for validation Ifthe password is incorrect and the Operator s Assistance option is enabled the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the system the participant is disconnected from the MCU e If there is a match the participant is granted the right to join the conference Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication In addition the external database application sends to the MCU the following parameters Participant name display name Whether or not the participant is the conference chairperson Participant Information such as the participant E mail These fields correspond to Info 1 2 3 and 4 fields in the Participant Properties Information dialog box If there is no match i e the conference or personal password are not defined in the database the request to access the conference is rejected and the participant is disconnected from the MCU If the conference IVR Service is configured to prompt for the chairperson identifier and password the participant is requested to enter the chairperson identifier Ifno identifier is entered the participant connects as a standard undefined participant If the cha
465. ult Conference Properties Product Management xi General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording M General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B v Msg Service Type None Vv Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name E F Conference On Port I Encryption I Silence F vTx 1000 AFER y I Conference Lock Ghat Comme None Tr Mute Meet Me Cascade None z I Start Conf Requin F On Hold Master Name None z J Terminate After Chair I Enable Invite 7120 Rate None X IT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None z Before First Join f9 a Min AfterLastQut fT H Min r Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren7 G728 hd Dual Stream Mode None z lt lt Basic Rol Call Pro Mation Auta z J Enty Tone Rell Call announceme Video Protocol fauto o d M End Time Alert Tone i Peat Video Format Auto v Frame Rate Auto x Talk Hold Time 154 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth B 4 Sits I AnnewN P AnnexP I Annex F Q Extending a Conference Manua 1 44 The operator can manually extend the conference duration For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 lly MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Permanent Conference The Auto Extension mechanism can be used to enable the system to automatically extend an ongoing conference indefinitely creating a permanent o
466. ure your Internet display and connection settings Java Plug in Control Panel Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor b Microsoft Outlook Profiles Customize your mouse settings such as the button conl Connects to other computers networks and the Intern Configure your NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager settings Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settir Configure energy saving settings for your computer Shows installed printers and fax printers and helps you Configures QuickTime software and hardware componer Customize settings for the display of languages numbei w MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Control Panel window double click the Administrative Tools option The Administrative Tools window opens Re Administrative Tools eI File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Q O BIK C search gt Folders SH X 1 2 Address Administrative Tools z Ba 2KB Shortcut 2KB Shortcut 2KB Shortcut fil Event Viewer 2KB Shortcut Fr Local Security Policy 2KB Shortcut Eg Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration 1KB Shortcut Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards 2KB Shortcut Hf Performance 2KB Shortcut fis Services 2KB Shortcut qea H gt l Double click the Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box opens See step 2 in the next procedure for the continuation of the registration procedure 6 21 Chapter 6
467. used for auto cascading and for simple cascading For more details about Cascading Links see Creating the Dial out Link between Conferences on page 1 63 The automatic cascading of conferences is beneficial in distributed MCU environment when MCUs are installed in different locations A maximum of six conferences can be Auto Cascaded into one conference The MCU network can support multiple Auto Cascaded conferences simultaneously The cascading is performed by an Ad Hoc Cascade component in the WebCommander Professional which monitors the MCUs When the Ad Hoc Cascade component finds that two or more MCUs are running a conference with the same Conference Numeric ID it checks if the conferences are already cascaded by looking for a cascading link between the conferences If there are no cascading links conferences are automatically connected using pre defined cascading links If at a later stage the Ad Hoc Cascade component finds an additional MCU running a conference with the same Numeric ID it adds the conference to the cascaded conferences Set up identical Ad Hoc Entry Queues and Profiles on each MCU so that the cascaded conferences will have the same properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To use the Auto Cascade feature the system cfg flag QUICK_LOGIN_VIA_ENTRY_QUEUE must be set to NO on all MCUs that is the Conference Numeric ID routing mode must be used This flag is located in the GREET AND GUIDE IVR section o
468. vailable only in H 320 Master Slave Cascading conferences but not with simple cascading e FECC is available in Gateway Sessions but not in Double Gateway sessions To enable FECC for a conference The FECC LSD parameters must be set during the reservation stage and cannot be modified once the conference has started Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 Inthe Conference Properties Settings dialog box if the General Settings pane shows only the Basic settings click the Advanced button to display the advanced settings options Default Conference Properties Product Management o xi General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording p General Settings T Restricted Line Rate 28 X Msg Service Type None X g Msg Service Name _ I Silencel F VTX 1000 ease T Conference Lock Chair Conto None a Cascade JNone MasterName Jey T120 Rate I Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None x Before FistJoin E Min None After Last Quit T Min Dynamic Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 ha Dual Stream Mode None z lt Basic I Roll Cal Pro Motion Auto x I Enty Tone Roll Call announcement vaii pe SY I EndTimeAletTone 5 Min I Exit Tone Rall Call announcement pees ome pune zj Frame Rate Auto Talk Hold Time 15 Sect Quality Auto z E Bal Stes Arnen M Armes PIE EE
469. various operations that can be performed with templates in general such as copy paste delete and move Participant Template Files 8 2 Figure 8 1 Participant Template Files Flow shows the steps required to create the Participant templates that are stored in a Participant Template file Before creating a Participant template you must create a new Participant Template file or open an existing Participant Template file to which the new Participant template is added Create a new Participant Template File Add a new Participant Template to the Participant Template File Define the Participant arameters Save the Participant Template File Figure 8 1 Participant Template Files Flow Creating a New Participant Template File This section describes how to create a new Participant Template file You can create as many Participant Template files as needed MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To create a new Participant Template file 1 On the Template menu click New Template DataBase Directory Optior Ctrl Open Ctrl O Glose Saye Ghrl s Saye As Convert into Database Recent File 2 Highlight the Participant Template File option and then click OK A new empty window appears on the desktop E PartyTemplatesFile1 BEE Name Participant Numb Network Connecti Channel Aggrega This window lists all the Participant templates that were added to t
470. vice as described in Chapter 2 Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 23 Profiles MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Profiles are conference templates stored on the MCU designed mainly for Ad Hoc conferences They must be defined for all Ad Hoc conferencing scenarios Profiles are assigned to Entry Queues designated for Ad Hoc conferencing They allow callers to start a new conference without prior definition of the conference based on the conference properties defined in the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue Only MGC Manager operators with Superuser permission can create modify or delete Profiles Defining Profiles Profile definition is done the same way as defining a regular conference It is recommended to create only Profiles required for Ad Hoc conferences and use Templates database or MGC for all other conferencing modes Profiles can be copied and pasted into Conference Template files and into databases or as Profiles on other MCUs To define a new Profile 1 Inthe Browser area expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 2 Right click the Profiles icon and then click New Profile M Product Management Normal H Ba MCU Configuration gsi iE Cards ae Connections H B IVR Msg Services E av message Services amp Network Services ea Operators H Ea Gateway Configuration o New Operator Profile Print All H B aste S Meeting Rooms Entry Qu
471. vices The operator controls all stages of the Attended conferences For more information regarding Attended conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 In a Welcome No Wait conference the participant is automatically moved from the Participants Queue Greeting stage to the Conference conferencing stage without the operator s intervention However while in the Participants Queue the operator can move the participant to the Operator conference for a one on one conversation if needed The MGC Manager provides tools that enable you to monitor participants statuses in each conference stage and to move them from one stage to another e The status of participants in Attended conferences can be monitored in the Participants Queue e Special icons are used to indicate the participant status in a Greet and Guide conference e Interactive drag and drop of participants from the Participants Queue to the Operator conference or to any other conference is available e Adding or deleting participants from Greet and Guide conferences Once the participant connects to the conference all operations that can be performed during a standard conference can also be performed during an On Going Greet and Guide conference For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing Participants in a Greet an
472. video channels of a conference For more information see Chapter 9 Recording Click OK to complete the Reservation template definition The Conference Properties dialog box closes The new Reservation template is added to the conference list The Reservation template is added to the Reservation Template file window below the Conferences List icon An asterisk appears in the title of the Reservation Template file window to indicate that changes have been made If the list of conferences is not currently displayed double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conference List icon to display the list E ResTemplatesFile2 r lol x pe s Sales g 8 15 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 10 To save the changes on the Template menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title of the Reservation Template file window In the widow shown below are illustrated the different template types including their icons E ResTemplatesFile2 lolx Conferences List a Audio Conference aa Operator Conference upu ab Video Conference Opening a Reservation Template File To work with a Reservation template you need to open the Reservation Template file where the Reservation template is stored To open a Reservation Template file 1 On the Template menu click Open or click the Open button e on the toolbar The Open
473. when the Return to the Conference Muted check box is selected Participant s Line Informs all participants that the line of participant X Detected as Noisy has been detected as noisy and has been muted The default voice message is participant s name has been automatically muted due to a noisy line Note This option is available only if the Roll Call option on the Roll Calltab is enabled in the same IVR Message Service 34 Click Next The DTMF Codes dialog box opens DTMF codes xj Name TMF Code Permissions 0 Request Private Assistance Everyone Request Assistance for Conference 00 Chairperson Mute My Line 6 Everyone Unmute My Line 6 Everyone Lock Conference 70 Chairperson Unlock Conference 70 Chairperson Secure Conference 71 Chairperson Unsecure Conference 71 Chairperson Increase My Broadcasting Volume kr Everyone xl 2 45 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 46 35 36 This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be performed during the conference by all participants or by the chairperson A combination of digits activates a function for example 70 activates the Lock Conference feature For each function you can modify the DTMF code and the permission For the list of all actions and their respective default DTMF codes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Using DTMF Codes During Conference T
474. y up to 16 participants in a Video Switching conference However if your system does not include Audio cards you can configure standard Audio cards to include 30 participants in a single Video Switching conference Systems with Audio cards support large Video Switching conferences without additional configuration When the audio bridge unit on the standard Audio card is configured for a conference of up to 30 participants it can run only one conference at a time even if the number of the participants is reduced to less than 16 If the conference started as a small conference and is running on another audio bridge unit when adding the 17th participant the system will attempt to move the conference to the audio bridge unit configured as 1 30 1 indicates the maximum number of conferences 30 indicates the maximum number of participants that can be supported If this audio bridge unit is occupied the 17th participant will be rejected The system uses the audio bridge unit that is set to 30 participants to manage conferences with 17 to 30 participants If the conference has 16 participants or less the system uses other audio bridges if available If no other audio bridge unit is available the audio bridge unit set as 1 30 will run the smaller conference but will not be able to run more than one conference at a time With the Audio card up to 100 participants can connect to one Video Switching conference at 128 Kbps line rate No special
475. y URI and the call is established successfully a new conference is automatically created and the endpoint joins the conference All other participants are invited to the conference using the SIP REFER method The conference automatically ends when the conference creator leaves the conference The SIP Factory URI must be registered with the SIP server to enable routing of calls to the SIP Factory To ensure that the SIP factory is registered the option to register Entry Queues and SIP Factories must be enabled in the IP Network Service For instructions refer to the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Defining an IP Network Service Creating SIP Factories The Profile should be set to Auto Terminate when the Chairperson exits the A conference Profile must be defined in the MCU before creating a SIP Factory ls conference To create a SIP Factory 1 Expand the MCU tree 2 Right click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon and then click New SIP Factory Product Management Normal g MCU Configuration H a On Going Conferences 2 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 pas DEP atatamsFatatent iaaii Factories 7 E P Print All Paste 3 37 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The SIP Factory dialog box opens x SIP Factory Settings Name SIP ADHOC Profile CP
476. y another endpoint IP or ISDN without the MCU closing the data channel or stream If the token is not released by the endpoint the MGC Manager operator can also withdraw the data token from the endpoint FECC LSD Guidelines e FECC is supported in Entry Queues e The system allocates the LSD channel from the video channel bandwidth resulting in a lower line rate for the conference e In Video Switching conferences in which FECC LSD is enabled ISDN endpoints that do not support LSD and cannot open the LSD channel connect as Secondary Audio only while IP endpoints remain connected at their initial line rate e In Continuous Presence and Transcoding conferences ISDN endpoints that do not support LSD remain connected at their initial line rate e In encrypted conferences with ISDN and IP participants the FECC channel rate is always 4 8 Kbps MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II e In H 320 Master Slave cascading conferences only the FECC LSD 6 4 fixed rate option is available In such a conference when a request for the data token is invoked by an operator connected to the slave MCU the slave MCU checks if another participant possesses the data token If yes the request is rejected If no the request is transferred to the Master MCU which opens the FECC LSD channel of all the participants in the Master conference e When the FECC LSD option is enabled the T 120 Rate and Chair Control options are disabled e FECC is a
477. y field means that MCU selects the default sub service Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The number of participant phone numbers In a dial in connection the participant phone number is the CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection participant phone numbers are the phone numbers dialed by the MCU for each participant channel MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 18 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 RESERVED PARTY OPERATOR ADD PARTY OPERATOR UPDATE PARTY Continued ac eal Number of MCU Phone Numbers Party and MCU Phone Numbers Ident Method Meet Method Note This field is not relevant to IP participants The number of MCU phone numbers In a dial in connection the MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU In a dial out connection the MCU phone number is the MCU CLI number as seen by the participant Note This field is not relevant to IP participants No one or more fields one field for each participant and MCU phone number The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The method by which the destination conference is identified as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number IP address or alias 2 Calling phone number IP address or alias Note This field is only

User Guide 9.0 vol. 2_Advanced Features.book - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents